This manual is for GNU Texinfo (version 7.1, 18 October 2023), a documentation system that can produce both online information and a printed manual from a single source using semantic markup.
texi2any
: The Translator for Texinfo@chapter
: Chapter Structuring@unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other Labeling@majorheading
, @chapheading
: Chapter-level Headings@section
: Sections Below Chapters@unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
@subsection
: Subsections Below Sections@subsection
-like Commands@subsubsection
and Other Subsub Commands@part
: Groups of Chapters@raisesections
and @lowersections
@xref
with One Argument@xref
with Two Arguments@xref
with Three Arguments@xref
with Four and Five Arguments@xref
@ref
@pxref
@anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets@link
: Plain, unadorned hyperlink@inforef
: Cross-references to Info-only Material@url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
@cite
{reference}@code
{sample-code}@kbd
{keyboard-characters}@key
{key-name}@samp
{text}@verb
{chartextchar}@var
{metasyntactic-variable}@env
{environment-variable}@file
{file-name}@command
{command-name}@option
{option-name}@dfn
{term}@abbr
{abbreviation[, meaning]}@acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}@indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator}@email
{email-address[, displayed-text]}@quotation
: Block Quotations@indentedblock
: Indented text blocks@example
: Example Text@verbatim
: Literal Text@lisp
: Marking a Lisp Example@display
: Examples Using the Text Font@format
: Examples Using the Full Line Width@exdent
: Undoing a Line’s Indentation@flushleft
and @flushright
@raggedright
: Ragged Right Text@noindent
: Omitting Indentation@indent
: Forcing Indentation@cartouche
: Rounded Rectangles@small…
Block Commands@sub
and @sup
: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts@math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics@TeX
{} (TeX) and @LaTeX
{} (LaTeX)@copyright{}
(©)@registeredsymbol{}
(®)@dots
(…) and @enddots
(...)@bullet
(•)@euro
(€): Euro Currency Symbol@pounds
(£): Pounds Sterling@textdegree
(°): Degrees Symbol@minus
(−): Inserting a Minus Sign@geq
(≥) and @leq
(≤): Inserting Relations@result{}
(⇒): Result of an Expression@expansion{}
(→): Indicating an Expansion@print{}
(-|): Indicating Generated Output@error{}
(error→): Indicating an Error Message@equiv{}
(≡): Indicating Equivalence@point{}
(∗): Indicating Point in a Buffer@U
@*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line Breaks@-
and @hyphenation
: Hyphenation in Printed Output@allowcodebreaks
: Control Line Breaks in @code
@w
{text}: Prevent Line Breaks@tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable Space@sp
n: Insert Blank Lines@page
: Start a New Page@group
: Prevent Page Breaks@need mils
: Prevent Page Breaks@deffnx
, et al.: Two or More ‘First’ Linestexi2any
: The Translator for Texinfo
texi2any
from a Shelltexi2any
texi2any
Printed Outputlatex2html
Customization Variablestex4ht
Customization Variablespod2texi
: Convert Pod to Texinfo
texi2html
: Ancestor of texi2any
@setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before Chapters@paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation@firstparagraphindent
: Indenting After Headings@exampleindent
: Environment Indenting@smallbook
: Printing “Small” Books@pagesizes
[width][, height]: Custom Page SizesGNU Texinfo is free software; this means that everyone is free to use it and free to redistribute it on certain conditions. Texinfo is not in the public domain; it is copyrighted and there are restrictions on its distribution, but these restrictions are designed to permit everything that a good cooperating citizen would want to do. What is not allowed is to try to prevent others from further sharing any version of Texinfo that they might get from you.
Specifically, we want to make sure that you have the right to give away copies of the programs that relate to Texinfo, that you receive source code or else can get it if you want it, that you can change these programs or use pieces of them in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To make sure that everyone has such rights, we have to forbid you to deprive anyone else of these rights. For example, if you distribute copies of the Texinfo related programs, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must tell them their rights.
Also, for our own protection, we must make certain that everyone finds out that there is no warranty for the programs that relate to Texinfo. If these programs are modified by someone else and passed on, we want their recipients to know that what they have is not what we distributed, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on our reputation.
The precise conditions of the licenses for the programs currently being distributed that relate to Texinfo are found in the General Public Licenses that accompany them. This manual is covered by the GNU Free Documentation License (see GNU Free Documentation License).
Texinfo is a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both online information and printed output. This means that instead of writing several different documents, one for each output format, you need only write one document.
Using Texinfo, you can create a printed document (via the TeX typesetting system) in PDF format, including chapters, sections, cross-references, and indices. From the same Texinfo source file, you can create HTML output suitable for use with a web browser, you can create an Info file for use in GNU Emacs or other Info-reading programs, and also create DocBook, EPUB 3, or LaTeX files.
A Texinfo source file is a plain text file containing text interspersed with @-commands (words preceded by an ‘@’) that tell the Texinfo processors what to do. Texinfo’s markup commands are almost entirely semantic; that is, they specify the intended meaning of text in the document, rather than physical formatting instructions.
GNU Emacs has a special mode, called Texinfo mode, that provides various Texinfo-related features. (See Using Texinfo Mode.)
Texinfo was devised specifically for the purpose of writing software documentation and manuals. If you want to write a good manual for your program, Texinfo has many features which we hope will make your job easier. However, Texinfo is not intended to be a general-purpose formatting program. It provides almost no commands for controlling the final formatting, so may be inappropriate for your needs if you want to lay out a newspaper, devise a glossy magazine ad, or follow the exact formatting requirements of a publishing house.
Spell “Texinfo” with a capital “T” and the other letters in lowercase. The first syllable of “Texinfo” is pronounced like “speck”, not “hex”. This odd pronunciation is derived from the pronunciation of TeX. Pronounce TeX as if the ‘X’ were the last sound in the name ‘Bach’. In the word TeX, the ‘X’ is, rather than the English letter “ex”, actually the Greek letter “chi”.
Texinfo is the official documentation format of the GNU project. More information, including manuals for GNU packages, is available at the GNU documentation web page.
We welcome bug reports and suggestions for any aspect of the Texinfo system: programs, documentation, installation, etc. Please email them to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. You can get the latest version of Texinfo via its home page, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
For bug reports, please include enough information for the maintainers to reproduce the problem. Generally speaking, that means:
When in doubt whether something is needed or not, include it. It’s better to include too much than to leave out something important.
It is critical to send an actual input file that reproduces the problem.
Any problems with the Info reader in Emacs should be reported to the Emacs developers: see Bugs in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Patches are welcome; if possible, please make them with ‘diff -c’, ‘diff -u’ (see Comparing and Merging Files), or ‘git diff’ and include ChangeLog entries (see Change Log in GNU Coding Standards), and follow the existing coding style.
Here is an overview of the output formats currently supported by Texinfo.
(Generated via texi2any
.) Info format is mostly a plain
text transliteration of the Texinfo source. It adds a few control
characters to provide navigational information for cross-references,
indices, and so on. The Emacs Info subsystem (see Info), and the standalone info
program (see GNU Info), among others, can read these files. See Info Files, and Creating and Installing Info Files.
(Generated via texi2any --plaintext
.) This is almost the
same as Info output with the navigational control characters are
omitted.
(Generated via texi2any --html
.) HTML, standing for Hyper
Text Markup Language, is the language for writing documents on the World
Wide Web. Web browsers
can render this language online. There
are many versions of HTML, both different standards and
browser-specific variations. texi2any
uses a subset
of the language that can be interpreted by any common browser,
intentionally not using many newer or less widely-supported tags.
Although the native output is thus rather plain, it can be customized
at various levels, if desired. See Generating HTML.
(Generated via texi2any --epub3
.)
EPUB is a format designed for reading electronic books on
portable devices. It is a derivative of HTML. The format was
developed by the International Digital Publishing Forum (IDPF),
which is now part of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). The
latest major revision, EPUB 3, dates from 2011.
(Generated via texi2dvi
.) The DeVIce Independent binary
format is output by the TeX typesetting program
(http://tug.org). This is then read by a DVI ‘driver’, which
knows the actual device-specific commands that can be viewed or
printed, notably Dvips for translation to PostScript (see Dvips) and Xdvi for viewing on an X display
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/xdvi/). See Formatting and Printing with TeX. (Be aware that the Texinfo language is very different
from TeX’s usual languages: plain TeX, LaTeX, ConTeXt,
etc.)
(Generated via texi2dvi --ps
.) PostScript is a page
description language that became widely used around 1985 and is still
used today. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PostScript gives a
basic description and more preferences. By default, Texinfo uses the
dvips
program to convert TeX’s DVI output to PostScript.
See Dvips.
(Generated via texi2dvi --pdf
or texi2pdf
.) This
format was developed by Adobe Systems for portable document
interchange, based on their previous PostScript language. It can
represent the exact appearance of a document, including fonts and
graphics, and supporting arbitrary scaling. It is intended to be
platform-independent and easily viewable, among other design goals;
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portable_Document_Format and
http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb22-3/tb72beebe-pdf.pdf have some
background. By default, Texinfo uses the pdftex
program, an
extension of TeX, to output PDF; see
http://tug.org/applications/pdftex. See PDF Output.
(Generated via texi2any --latex
.) This is a typesetting
system built on top of TeX. It was originally released by
Leslie Lamport in 1984. LaTeX adds more definitions to those
of TeX and has a wide range of packages built on it. LaTeX is
ubiquitous in academic literature. The current version of LaTeX
is under active development; more information is available online
at https://www.latex-project.org/.
The LaTeX output can be further processed into DVI, PostScript, or PDF. In theory, the LaTeX output should allow for much more customizability of the output than would be possible with the plain TeX implementation of Texinfo.
(Generated via texi2any --docbook
.) This is an XML-based
format, primarily for technical
documentation. It therefore bears some resemblance, in broad
outline, to Texinfo. See http://www.docbook.org. Various
converters from DocBook to Texinfo have also been developed;
see the Texinfo web pages.
(Generated via texi2any --xml
.)
The texi2any
XML output, unlike all the other output
formats, is a transliteration of the Texinfo source, rather than
finished output. Texinfo XML files cannot be viewed in web browsers
or other programs.
XML is a generic syntax specification usable for any sort of content. (A reference is at http://www.w3.org/XML.) The purpose of the Texinfo XML output is to allow further processing by XML tools. The output syntax is defined in an XML DTD, which is contained in a file texinfo.dtd included in the Texinfo source distribution.
The Texinfo source distribution includes a utility script txixml2texi to do a backward transformation to recreate the original Texinfo content (except for Texinfo macros and conditionals).
As mentioned above, Info format is mostly a plain text transliteration of the Texinfo source, with the addition of a few control characters to separate nodes and provide navigational information, so that Info-reading programs can operate on it.
Info files are nearly always created by processing a Texinfo source
document. texi2any
, also known as makeinfo
, is
the principal command that converts a Texinfo file into an Info file;
see texi2any
: The Translator for Texinfo.
Generally, you enter an Info file through a node that by convention is named ‘Top’. This node normally contains just a brief summary of the file’s purpose, and a large menu through which the rest of the file is reached. From this node, you can either traverse the file systematically by going from node to node, or you can go to a specific node listed in the main menu, or you can search the index menus and then go directly to the node that has the information you want. Alternatively, with the standalone Info program, you can specify specific menu items on the command line (see Info).
If you want to read through an Info file in sequence, as if it were a printed manual, you can hit SPC repeatedly, or you get the whole file with the advanced Info command g *. (See Advanced Info commands in Info.)
The dir file in the info directory serves as the departure point for the whole Info system. From it, you can reach the ‘Top’ nodes of each of the documents in a complete Info system.
If you wish to refer to an Info file via a URI, you can use the (unofficial) syntax exemplified by the following. This works with Emacs/W3, for example:
info:emacs#Dissociated%20Press info:///usr/info/emacs#Dissociated%20Press info://localhost/usr/info/emacs#Dissociated%20Press
The info
program itself does not follow URIs of any kind.
A Texinfo file can be formatted and typeset as a printed book or manual. To do this, you need TeX, a sophisticated typesetting program written by Donald Knuth of Stanford University. It is not part of the Texinfo distribution.
Texinfo provides a file texinfo.tex that contains the definitions that TeX uses when it typesets a Texinfo file. You can get the latest version of texinfo.tex from the Texinfo home page, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/.
A Texinfo-based book is similar to any other typeset, printed work: it can have a title page, copyright page, table of contents, and preface, as well as chapters, numbered or unnumbered sections and subsections, page headers, cross-references, footnotes, and indices.
TeX is very powerful and has a great many features. However, because a Texinfo file must be able to present information both on a character-only terminal in Info form and in a typeset book, the formatting commands that Texinfo supports are necessarily limited.
See Formatting and Printing with TeX, for more information on processing a manual with TeX.
The output formats in the previous sections handle a wide variety of usage, but of course there is always room for more.
If you are a programmer and would like to contribute to the GNU
project by implementing additional output formats for Texinfo, that
would be excellent. The way to do this that would be most useful is
to write a new back-end for texi2any
, our reference
implementation of a Texinfo parser; it creates a tree representation
of the Texinfo input that you can use for the conversion. The
documentation in the source file
tp/Texinfo/Convert/Converter.pm is a good place to start
(see Texinfo::Convert::Converter in Texinfo modules documentation).
See texi2any
: The Translator for Texinfo.
Another viable approach is use the Texinfo XML output from
texi2any
as your input. This XML is an essentially complete
representation of the input, but without the Texinfo syntax and option
peculiarities, as described above.
If you still cannot resist the temptation of writing a new program
that reads Texinfo source directly, let us give some more caveats:
please do not underestimate the amount of work required. Texinfo is
by no means a simple language to parse correctly, and remains under
development, so you would be committing to an ongoing task. You
are advised to check that the tests of the language that come with
texi2any
give correct results with your new program.
From time to time, proposals are made to generate traditional Unix man pages from Texinfo source. However, because man pages have a strict conventional format, creating a good man page requires a completely different source from that needed for the typical Texinfo applications of writing a good user tutorial and/or a good reference manual. This makes generating man pages incompatible with the Texinfo design goal of not having to document the same information in different ways for different output formats. You might as well write the man page directly.
As an alternative way to support man pages, you may find the program
help2man
to be useful. It generates a traditional man page
from the ‘--help’ output of a program. In fact, the man pages
for the programs in the Texinfo distribution are generated with this.
It is GNU software written by Brendan O’Dea, available from
http://www.gnu.org/software/help2man.
Richard M. Stallman invented the Texinfo format, wrote the initial processors, and created Edition 1.0 of this manual. Robert J. Chassell greatly revised and extended the manual, starting with Edition 1.1. Brian Fox was responsible for the standalone Texinfo distribution until version 3.8. Karl Berry continued maintenance from Texinfo 3.8 (manual edition 2.22), and Gavin Smith has continued maintenance since Texinfo 6.0.
Richard Stallman included an on-line, hypertext help system called Info in the original implementation of Emacs (in 1975/6). Stallman had been inspired after seeing a presentation a couple of years earlier on the “NLS” hypertext system of Douglas Engelbart.
In another development, in the 1970’s at CMU, Brian Reid developed
a program and format named Scribe to mark up documents for printing.
It used the @
character to introduce commands, as Texinfo does.
Much more consequentially, it strove to describe document contents
rather than formatting, an idea wholeheartedly adopted by Texinfo.
Meanwhile, people at MIT developed another format called Bolio. Richard Stallman (RMS) worked on converting Bolio to use TeX as its typesetting language, resulting in BoTeX. The earliest BoTeX version seems to have been 0.02 on October 31, 1984.
BoTeX could only be used as a markup language for documents to be printed, not for online documents. RMS combined BoTeX and Info to create Texinfo, a mark-up language for text that is intended to be read both online and as printed hard copy.
The original translator to create Info was written
(primarily by RMS and Bob Chassell) in Emacs Lisp, namely the
texinfo-format-buffer
and other functions. In the early 1990s,
Brian Fox reimplemented the conversion program in C, now called
makeinfo
, as well as the standalone info
program.
In 2012, the C makeinfo
was itself replaced by a Perl
implementation generically called texi2any
. This version
supports the same level of output customization as
texi2html
, an independent program originally written by
Lionel Cons, later with substantial work by many others. The many
additional features needed to make texi2html
a replacement
for makeinfo
were implemented by Patrice Dumas. The first,
never-released version of texi2any
was based on the
texi2html
code.
That implementation, however, was abandoned in favor of the current
program (also written by Patrice Dumas), which parses the Texinfo
input into a tree for processing. It inherited the design of
customization and other features from texi2html
(for more
on texi2html
compatibility, see texi2html
: Ancestor of texi2any
).
However, texi2any
is a full reimplementation: it constructs
a tree-based representation of the input document for all back-ends
to work from.
The new Perl program is much slower than the old C program. The speed
gap has partially closed since first release, but it may not ever be
entirely comparable. So why did we switch? In short, we intend and
hope that the present program will be much easier than the previous C
implementation of makeinfo
to extend to different output
styles, back-end output formats, and all other customizations.
In more detail:
texi2html
for years. Thus, in effect two independent
implementations of the Texinfo language had developed, and keeping
them in sync was not simple. Adding the HTML customization possible
in texi2html
to a C program would have been an
enormous effort.
makeinfo
code had become
convoluted to the point where adding a new back-end was quite complex,
requiring complex interactions with existing back-ends. In contrast,
the new implementation provides a clean tree-based representation for
all back-ends to work from. People have requested numerous different
back-ends (LaTeX, the latest (X)HTML, …); this change made them
much more feasible to implement. Which leads to the last item:
makeinfo
implementation for anyone to read and contribute to, with the resulting
obvious benefits. After ten years, contributed back-ends were yet to
happen, but it is still believed that this structure could in theory
lend better to contributions.
texi2any
is intended to be a reference implementation
that defines parts of the language not fully specified by the manual.
Without such a reference, alternative implementations would be very
likely to have subtle, or not-so-subtle, differences in behavior,
and thus Texinfo documents would become dependent on the processor.
It is also important to have consistent command-line options for
all processors. Extensive tests of the language and processor were
developed at the same time as texi2any
; we encourage anyone
thinking of writing a program to parse Texinfo input to make use of
these tests.
With the release of texi2any
as the reference
implementation, development of both the C implementation of
makeinfo
and texi2html
has been halted. Going
forward, we ask authors of Texinfo documents to use only
texi2any
.
This chapter describes Texinfo syntax and what is required in a Texinfo file, and gives a short sample file.
This section describes the general conventions used in all Texinfo documents.
Depending on what they do or what arguments they take, you need to write @-commands on lines of their own, or as part of sentences. As a general rule, a command requires braces if it mingles among other text; but it does not need braces if it is on a line of its own. For more details of Texinfo command syntax, see @-Command Syntax.
@example
environment.
@code
and @example
.
Form feed (CTRL-l) characters in normal text end any open paragraph. Other ASCII whitespace (tab, carriage return) may be treated the same as space characters, although the results may differ depending on output format. Hence, there is not much point in using these in documents. Non-ASCII spaces, such as Unicode “em space”, are not recognized as whitespace at all and will be treated as regular, non-whitespace characters.
However, in verbatim modes, for example in code samples, tab characters may produce the correct formatting in the output.
You can write comments in a Texinfo file by using the @comment
command, which may be abbreviated to @c
. Such comments are
for a person looking at the Texinfo source file. All the text on a
line that follows either @comment
or @c
is a comment;
the rest of the line does not appear in the visible output. (To be
precise, the character after the @c
or @comment
must
be something other than a dash or alphanumeric, or it will be taken as
part of the command.)
Often, you can write the @comment
or @c
in the middle
of a line, and only the text that follows after the @comment
or @c
command does not appear; but some commands, such as
@settitle
, work on a whole line. You cannot use @comment
or @c
within a line beginning with such a command.
In cases of nested command invocations, complicated macro definitions,
etc., @c
and @comment
may provoke an error when
processing with TeX. Therefore, you can also use the DEL
character (ASCII 127 decimal, 0x7f hex, 0177 octal) as a true TeX
comment character (catcode 14, in TeX internals). Everything on
the line after the DEL will be ignored and the next line will
be merged.
You can also have long stretches of text ignored by the Texinfo
processors with the @ignore
and @end ignore
commands.
Write each of these commands on a line of its own, starting each
command at the beginning of the line. Text between these two commands
does not appear in the processed output. You can use @ignore
and @end ignore
for writing comments. (For some caveats
regarding nesting of such commands, see Conditional Nesting.)
By convention, the name of a Texinfo file ends with one of the extensions .texi, .texinfo, .txi, or .tex. Using .tex is discouraged as this extension is already used by TeX and LaTeX input files. The most common and recommended extension is .texi. The name of a Texinfo file should only contain ASCII characters.
The output name is based on the input file name, in the default case. First, any of the extensions .texi, .tex, .txi, or .texinfo is removed from the input file name; then, the output format specific extension is added—.html when generating HTML, .info when generating Info, etc. The output name should only contain ASCII characters1.
In order to be made into a printed manual, a Texinfo file must begin with a line like this:
\input texinfo
The contents of the file follow this beginning, and then you must end the Texinfo source with a line like this:
@bye
The @bye
line at the end of the file on a line of its own tells
TeX that the file is ended and to stop formatting. If you
leave this out, you’ll be dumped at TeX’s prompt at the end of the
run.
Furthermore, you will usually provide a Texinfo file with a title, a title page, indices, and the like, all of which are explained in this manual. But the minimum, which can be useful for short documents, is just the one line at the beginning and the one line at the end.
Without additional information, the input and output encodings are assumed to be UTF-8, an universal codeset compatible with 7-bit ASCII.
Here is a short sample Texinfo file.
\input texinfo @settitle Sample Manual 1.0 @copying This is a short example of a complete Texinfo file. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @end copying @titlepage @title Sample Title @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying @end titlepage @contents @node Top @top GNU Sample This manual is for GNU Sample (version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}). @menu * First Chapter:: The first chapter is the only chapter in this sample. * Index:: Complete index. @end menu @node First Chapter @chapter First Chapter @cindex chapter, first This is the first chapter. @cindex index entry, another
Here is a numbered list. @enumerate @item This is the first item. @item This is the second item. @end enumerate
@node First Section @section First Section First section of first chapter. @node Second Section @section Second Section Second section of first chapter. @node Index @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye
Texinfo files start with the line:
\input texinfo
The ‘\input texinfo’ line tells TeX to use the texinfo.tex file, which tells TeX how to translate the Texinfo @-commands into TeX typesetting commands. (Note the use of the backslash, ‘\’; this is correct for TeX.)
It makes sense to include any command that affects document formatting
as a whole in the header. The @settitle
line is usually
present at the beginning of the header:
@settitle Sample Manual 1.0
The @settitle
line specifies a title for the page headers
(or footers) of the printed manual, and the default title and document
description for the ‘<head>’ in HTML. @synindex
(see @synindex
: Combining Indices), for instance, is another command often
included in the header.
The start of the Texinfo file up to the first content that is output
as part of the main body of the document is the preamble.
It includes the header, Document Permissions and Title and Copyright Pages
specification. It is important for the LaTeX output format as the
end of preamble is where the \begin{document}
line is output. In
other output formats it may be used to determine how some special output is
formatted, for example @copying
: Declare Copying Permissions output as a comment
at the beginning of output files, or the language used in file headers.
@setfilename
: Set the Output File Name@settitle
: Set the Document TitleEvery Texinfo file that is to be the top-level input to TeX must begin with a line that looks like this:
\input texinfo
When the file is processed by TeX, the ‘\input texinfo’ command tells TeX to load the macros needed for processing a Texinfo file. These are in a file called texinfo.tex, which should have been installed on your system along with either the TeX or Texinfo software. TeX uses the backslash, ‘\’, to mark the beginning of a command, exactly as Texinfo uses ‘@’. The texinfo.tex file causes the switch from ‘\’ to ‘@’; before the switch occurs, TeX requires ‘\’, which is why it appears at the beginning of the file.
You may optionally follow this line with a comment to tell GNU Emacs to use Texinfo mode when the file is edited:
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
This may be useful when Emacs doesn’t detect the file type from the file extension automatically.
@setfilename
: Set the Output File Name ¶The @setfilename
line specifies the name of the output file to
be generated by texi2any
. This command is ignored for
TeX formatting. When present, it should be the first Texinfo
command (that is, after ‘\input texinfo’). Write the
@setfilename
command at the beginning of a line and follow it
on the same line by the Info file name.
@setfilename info-file-name
The name must be different from the name of the Texinfo file.
There are two conventions for choosing the name: you
can either remove the extension (such as ‘.texi’) entirely from
the input file name, or (recommended) replace it with the ‘.info’
extension. It is not advised to base the @setfilename
name
on a entirely different name than the input file name.
When a @setfilename
line is present, the Texinfo processors
ignore everything written before the @setfilename
line. This
is why the very first line of the file (the \input
line) does
not show up in the output.
If there is no @setfilename
line, texi2any
uses the
input file name to determine the output name (see What a Texinfo File Must Have). The
\input
line is still ignored in this processing, as well
as leading blank lines.
When producing another output format, texi2any
will replace any
final extension with the output format-specific extension (‘html’
when generating HTML, for example), or add a dot followed by the
extension (‘.html’ for HTML) if the given name has no extension.
@-commands are not allowed in @setfilename
, except for
@@
, @{
, @}
and associated @-commands
such as @atchar{}
.
@setfilename
used to be required by the Texinfo processors
and some other programs. This should not be the case any more;
@setfilename
can be omitted. If the Texinfo input is
processed from standard input, without an input file name to deduce the
base file name from, @setfilename
could still be relevant.
This is not the only way, however: --output option specifies
the output file name on the texi2any
command-line
(see Invoking texi2any
from a Shell).
Although an explicit ‘.info’ extension is preferable, some
operating systems cannot handle long file names. You can run into a
problem even when the file name you specify is itself short enough.
This occurs because the Info formatters split a long Info file into
short indirect subfiles, and name them by appending ‘-1’,
‘-2’, …, ‘-10’, ‘-11’, and so on, to the original
file name. (See Tag Files and Split Files.) The subfile name
texinfo.info-10, for example, is too long for old systems with
a 14-character limit on filenames; so the Info file name for this
document could be texinfo rather than texinfo.info on
such a system. @setfilename
is a way to specify an
alternative name.
@settitle
: Set the Document Title ¶A Texinfo file should contain a line that looks like this:
@settitle title
Write the @settitle
command at the beginning of a line and
follow it on the same line by the title. Do not write anything else
on the line. The @settitle
command should precede everything
that generates actual output. The best place for it is right after
the @setfilename
command, if present (described in the previous
section).
This command gives the title to use in a header or footer for double-sided printed output, in case such headings are output. For more on headings for printed output, see Heading Generation.
In HTML, title serves as the document ‘<title>’ and it becomes the default document description in the ‘<head>’ part.
When the title page is used in the output, as is generally the case for printed
output, the title in the @settitle
command does not affect the title as
it appears on the title page. Thus, the two do not need not to match exactly.
A practice we recommend is to include the version or edition number of the
manual in the @settitle
title; on the title page, the version number
generally appears as a @subtitle
so it would be omitted from the
@title
. See @titlepage
.
The preamble starts at the beginning of the Texinfo file and continues
until the first directly output material. It typically includes the
file header (see Texinfo File Header), the @copying
block
specifying the document permissions (see @copying
: Declare Copying Permissions) and the
@titlepage
specification (see Title and Copyright Pages).
The preamble may contain commands that affect document formatting
as a whole but which do not produce output, or do not produce output
straight away, such as @settitle
(see @settitle
: Set the Document Title),
@documentlanguage
, (see @documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document Language),
commands setting the headings, controlling indentation or hyphenation,
or the table of contents (see Generating a Table of Contents).
Any text that starts a paragraph, @-commands that are formatted
as quotations, tables, lists and so on, and @node
(see Nodes)
and chapter structuring commands (see Chapter Structuring) end the
preamble.
The concept of the preamble is significant for LaTeX output, as the
\begin{document}
line is output at the end of the preamble.
In plaintext, the preamble is simply output as usual at the beginning of the
document; for example, a @contents
in the preamble is output as
the table of contents (see Generating a Table of Contents).
There is not much special treatment of the preamble for HTML and Info
output either. However, some settings current at the very end of
the preamble may be used for the document as a whole, regardless of
what follows. This may apply to commands specifying the indentation,
or the language (see @documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document Language).
For example, for the following document, the HTML and Info copying
comments are formatted with @documentlanguage
set to ‘pt’,
as it is the last @documentlanguage
before the end of the
preamble.
\input texinfo @documentlanguage fr @copying The copying information @error{} some text @end copying @documentlanguage pt Text ending the preamble @documentlanguage de @node Top
In Emacs, start- and end-of-header lines can be used to enclose commands that
globally affect the document in the Texinfo preambule. This allows you to
format only part of a Texinfo file for Info or printing.
See The texinfo-format…
Commands.
A start-of-header line is a Texinfo comment that looks like this:
@c %**start of header
Write the start-of-header line on the second line of a Texinfo file.
Follow the start-of-header commands that globally affect the document
formatting, such as @settitle
, @synindex
or
@footnotestyle
; and then by an end-of-header line.
A end-of-header line is a Texinfo comment that looks like this:
@c %**end of header
The odd string of characters, ‘%**’, is to ensure that no other
comment is accidentally taken for a start-of-header line. You can
change it if you wish by setting the tex-start-of-header
and/or
tex-end-of-header
Emacs variables. See Formatting and Printing in Texinfo Mode.
The start- and end-of-header lines are not part of the Texinfo format specification, which is why they are implemented with comments.
Use the @dircategory
command to specify a category
for the manual. Here are a few examples of category names:
Basics Text creation and manipulation Archiving Compression Database Editors Emacs Email Graphics Localization Network applications Printing Science Software development Software libraries Version control
@dircategory
commands are usually followed by a
@direntry
blocks, which are used by install-info
.
See Installing Info Directory Files, for details.
The first @dircategory
command in a manual is the category for
the entire manual. Subsequent uses of @dircategory
set the category
for following @direntry
blocks only.
This segment describes the document and contains the copyright notice
and copying permissions. This is done with the @copying
command.
A real manual includes more text here, according to the license under
which it is distributed.
@copying This is a short example of a complete Texinfo file, version 1.0. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @end copying
The copyright notice and copying permissions for a document need to
appear in several places in the various Texinfo output formats.
Therefore, Texinfo provides a command (@copying
) to declare
this text once, and another command (@insertcopying
) to
insert the text at appropriate points.
If the document is a software manual, the software is typically under a different license—for GNU and many other free software packages, software is usually released under the GNU GPL, and manuals are released under the GNU FDL. It is helpful to state the license of the software of the manual, but giving the complete text of the software license is not necessarily required.
@copying
: Declare Copying Permissions ¶The @copying
command should be given very early in the document;
the recommended location is right after the header material
(see Texinfo File Header). It conventionally consists of a sentence
or two about what the program is, identification of the documentation
itself, the legal copyright line, and the copying permissions. Here is
a skeletal example:
@copying This manual is for program (version version, updated date), which ... Copyright @copyright{} years copyright-owner. @quotation Permission is granted to ... @end quotation @end copying
The @quotation
has no legal significance; it’s there to improve
readability in some contexts.
The text of @copying
appears as a comment at the beginning of Info
and HTML output files. This information is also output at the beginning
of the DocBook output files using appropriate markup. It is not
output implicitly in plain text or printed output; it’s up to you to use
@insertcopying
to emit the copying information. See the next section
for details.
The @copyright{}
command generates a ‘c’ inside a
circle when the output format supports this glyph (print and HTML
always do, for instance). When the glyph is not supported in the
output, it generates the three-character sequence ‘(C)’.
The copyright notice itself has the following legally-prescribed form:
Copyright © years copyright-owner.
The word ‘Copyright’ must always be written in English, even if the document is otherwise written in another language. This is due to international law.
The list of years should include all years in which a version was completed (even if it was released in a subsequent year). It is simplest for each year to be written out individually and in full, separated by commas.
The copyright owner (or owners) is whoever holds legal copyright on the work. In the case of works assigned to the FSF, the owner is ‘Free Software Foundation, Inc.’.
The copyright ‘line’ may actually be split across multiple lines, both
in the source document and in the output. This often happens for
documents with a long history, having many different years of
publication. If you do use several lines, do not indent any of them
(or anything else in the @copying
block) in the source file.
See Copyright Notices in GNU Maintainer Information, for additional information. See GNU Sample Texts, for the full text to be used in GNU manuals. See GNU Free Documentation License, for the license itself under which GNU and other free manuals are distributed.
@insertcopying
: Include Permissions Text ¶The @insertcopying
command is simply written on a line by
itself, like this:
@insertcopying
This inserts the text previously defined by @copying
. To meet
legal requirements, it must be used on the copyright page in the printed
manual (see Copyright Page).
The @copying
command itself causes the permissions text to
appear in an Info file before the first node. The text is also
copied into the beginning of each split Info output file, as is legally
necessary. This location implies a human reading the manual using Info
does not see this text (except when using the advanced Info
command g *). This does not matter for legal purposes,
because the text is present. But to get a visible text in the output,
@insertcopying
should be used.
Similarly, the @copying
text is automatically included at the
beginning of each HTML output file, as an HTML comment. Again, this
text is not visible without @insertcopying
(unless the reader views the
HTML source).
The permissions text defined by @copying
also appears
automatically at the beginning of the DocBook output files
using appropriate markup. @insertcopying
can be used
to output the permission text within normal text.
In hard copy output, the manual’s name and author are usually printed on
a title page. Copyright information is usually printed on the back
(verso) of the title page. This segment must be enclosed between
@titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands:
@titlepage @title Sample Title
@c The following two commands start the copyright page. @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying @end titlepage
We use the @insertcopying
command to
include the permission text from the previous section, instead of
writing it out again.
The title and copyright pages appear in printed manuals, but not in
most other output formats. In HTML, the best way to get a title page
similar to printed manuals is to set the NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
customization variable (see NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
).
@titlepage
@title
, @subtitle
, and @author
@titlefont
, @center
, and @sp
@titlepage
¶Start the material for the title page and following copyright page
with @titlepage
on a line by itself and end it with
@end titlepage
on a line by itself.
The @end titlepage
command starts a new page and turns on page
numbering (see Heading Generation). All the
material that you want to appear on unnumbered pages should be put
between the @titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands.
By using the @page
command, you can force a page break within the
region delineated by the @titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands and thereby create more than one unnumbered page. This is how
the copyright page is produced. (The @titlepage
command might
perhaps have been better named the @titleandadditionalpages
command, but that would have been rather long!)
When you write a manual about a computer program, you should write the version of the program to which the manual applies on the title page. If the manual changes more frequently than the program or is independent of it, you should also include an edition number2 for the manual. This helps readers keep track of which manual is for which version of the program. (The ‘Top’ node should also contain this information; see The ‘Top’ Node and Master Menu.)
One method uses the @title
, @subtitle
, and
@author
commands to create a title page. With this method,
you do not specify any of the actual formatting of the title page.
You specify the text you want, and Texinfo does the formatting.
The usual formatting consist of black rules under
the title and author lines and the subtitle text set flush to the
right-hand side of the page.
Texinfo also provides a second method for creating a title page.
using typesetting commands that are not to be used in the main text.
This method uses uses the @titlefont
, @sp
, and @center
commands to generate a title page in which the words on the page are
centered.
For sufficiently simple documents, and for the bastard title page in
traditional book frontmatter, Texinfo also provides a command
@shorttitlepage
which takes the rest of the line as the title.
The argument is typeset on a page by itself and followed by a blank
page. In HTML, @shorttitlepage
can play the same role as
@settitle
, if @settitle
is not set. See @settitle
: Set the Document Title.
@title
, @subtitle
, and @author
¶You can use the @title
, @subtitle
, and @author
commands to create a title page in which the vertical and horizontal
spacing is done for you automatically.
Write the @title
, @subtitle
, or @author
commands at the beginning of a line followed by the title, subtitle,
or author. The @author
command may be used for a quotation in
an @quotation
block (see @quotation
: Block Quotations);
except for that, it is an error to use any of these commands outside
of @titlepage
.
The @title
command normally produces a line in which the title is set
flush to the left-hand side of the page in a larger than normal font.
The title is underlined with a black rule. The title must be given on
a single line in the source file; it will be broken into multiple
lines of output is needed.
For long titles, the @*
command may be used to specify the
line breaks in long titles if the automatic breaks do not suit. Such
explicit line breaks are generally reflected in all output formats; if
you only want to specify them for the printed output, use a
conditional (see Conditionally Visible Text). For example:
@title This Long Title@inlinefmt{tex,@*} Is Broken in @TeX{}
The @subtitle
command normally sets subtitles in a normal-sized font
flush to the right-hand side of the page.
The @author
command normally sets the names of the author
or authors in a middle-sized font flush to the left-hand side of the
page on a line near the bottom of the title page. The names are
followed by a black rule that is thinner than the rule that normally
underlines the title.
There are two ways to use the @author
command: you can write
the name or names on the remaining part of the line that starts with
an @author
command:
@author by Jane Smith and John Doe
or you can write the names one above each other by using multiple
@author
commands:
@author Jane Smith @author John Doe
A template for this method looks like this:
@titlepage @title name-of-manual-when-printed @subtitle subtitle-if-any @subtitle second-subtitle @author author @page ... @end titlepage
@titlefont
, @center
, and @sp
¶You can also use the @titlefont
, @sp
, and @center
commands to create a title page for a printed document.
Use the @titlefont
command to select a large font suitable for
the title itself. You can use @titlefont
more than once if you
have an especially long title.
For HTML output, each @titlefont
command produces an
<h1>
heading, but the HTML document <title>
is not
affected. For that, you could put a @settitle
command before
the @titlefont
command (see @settitle
: Set the Document Title).
For example:
@titlefont{Texinfo}
Use the @center
command at the beginning of a line to center
the remaining text on that line. Thus,
@center @titlefont{Texinfo}
centers the title, which in this example is “Texinfo” printed in the title font.
Use the @sp
command to insert vertical space. For example:
@sp 2
This inserts two blank lines on the printed page.
(See @sp
n: Insert Blank Lines, for more information about the @sp
command.)
A template for this method looks like this:
@titlepage @sp 10 @center @titlefont{name-of-manual-when-printed} @sp 2 @center subtitle-if-any @sp 2 @center author ... @end titlepage
The spacing of the example fits an 8.5 by 11 inch manual.
By international treaty, the copyright notice for a book must be either
on the title page or on the back of the title page. When the copyright
notice is on the back of the title page, that page is customarily not
numbered. Therefore, in Texinfo, the information on the copyright page
should be within @titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands.
Use the @page
command to cause a page break. To push the
copyright notice and the other text on the copyright page towards the
bottom of the page, use the following incantation after @page
:
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
The @vskip
command inserts whitespace in the TeX output; it
is ignored in all other output formats. The ‘0pt plus 1filll’
means to put in zero points of mandatory whitespace, and as much
optional whitespace as needed to push the following text to the bottom
of the page. Note the use of three ‘l’s in the word
‘filll’; this is correct.
To insert the copyright text itself, write @insertcopying
next (see Document Permissions):
@insertcopying
Follow the copying text by the publisher, ISBN numbers, cover art credits, and other such information.
Here is an example putting all this together:
@titlepage ... @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying Published by ... Cover art by ... @end titlepage
We have one more special case to consider: for plain text output, you must insert the copyright information explicitly if you want it to appear. For instance, you could have the following after the copyright page:
@ifplaintext @insertcopying @end ifplaintext
You could include other title-like information for the plain text output in the same place.
Texinfo has two standard page heading formats, one for documents printed on one side of each sheet of paper (single-sided printing), and the other for documents printed on both sides of each sheet (double-sided printing).
In full generality, you can control the headings in different ways:
@setchapternewpage
command
before the title page commands.
Most documents are formatted with the standard single-sided or
double-sided headings, (sometimes) using @setchapternewpage
odd
for double-sided printing and (almost always) no
@setchapternewpage
command for single-sided printing
(see @setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before Chapters).
@headings
command to prevent
page headings from being generated or to start them for either single
or double-sided printing. To turn off headings, write @headings off
.
See The @headings
Command.
The @chapter
, @section
, and other structuring commands
(see Chapter Structuring) supply the information to make up a
table of contents, but they do not cause an actual table to appear in
the manual. To do this, you must use the @contents
and/or
@summarycontents
command(s).
@contents
Generates a table of contents in a printed manual, including all
chapters, sections, subsections, etc., as well as appendices and
unnumbered chapters. Headings generated by @majorheading
,
@chapheading
, and the other @…heading
commands
do not appear in the table of contents (see Structuring Command Types).
@shortcontents
@summarycontents
(@summarycontents
is a synonym for @shortcontents
.)
Generates a short or summary table of contents that lists only the chapters, appendices, and unnumbered chapters. Sections, subsections and subsubsections are omitted. Only a long manual needs a short table of contents in addition to the full table of contents.
Both contents commands should be written on a line by themselves, and
placed near the beginning of the file, after the @end
titlepage
(see @titlepage
), before any sectioning
command. The contents commands automatically generate a chapter-like
heading at the top of the first table of contents page, so don’t
include any sectioning command such as @unnumbered
before
them.
Since an Info file uses menus instead of tables of contents, the Info formatting commands ignore the contents commands. But the contents are included in plain text output and in other output formats, such as HTML.
In HTML output, the links in the short table of contents point to corresponding entries in the full table of contents rather than the text of the document. The links in the full table of contents point to the main text of the document.
@shortcontents
is not implemented for LaTeX output.
The ‘Top’ node is the node in which a reader enters an Info manual. As such, it should contain a very brief description of the manual (including the version number). The contents of the ‘Top’ node do not appear in printed output nor in DocBook output.
It is conventional to write a @top
sectioning command
line containing the title of the document immediately after the
@node Top
line (see The @top
Sectioning Command).
We repeat the short description from the beginning of the ‘@copying’ text, but there’s no need to repeat the copyright information, so we don’t use ‘@insertcopying’ here.
The ‘Top’ node contains a top-level menu listing the chapters, and possibly a detailed menu listing all the nodes in the entire document.
@node Top @top Short Sample This is a short sample Texinfo file.
@menu * First Chapter:: The first chapter is the only chapter in this sample. * Index:: Complete index. @end menu
A master menu is the main menu. It is customary to include a
detailed menu listing all the nodes in the document in this menu.
Like any other menu, a master menu is enclosed in @menu
and
@end menu
and does not appear in the printed output nor in
DocBook output.
The master menu contains entries for the major nodes in the Texinfo file: the nodes for the chapters, chapter-like sections, and the appendices, followed by nodes for the indices.
You may choose to follow these entries with a detailed menu.
This lists other, lower-level nodes, often ordered by chapter.
These items may be a convenience for an inquirer who can go directly
to a particular node when searching for specific information, rather
than going through an intermediate menu. If you use a detailed menu
in your master menu, mark it with the @detailmenu …
@end detailmenu
environment.
Each section in the menu can be introduced by a descriptive line. So long as the line does not begin with an asterisk, it will not be treated as a menu entry. (See Writing a Menu, for more information.)
For example, the master menu for this manual looks like the following (but has many more entries):
@menu * Copying Conditions:: Your rights. * Overview:: Texinfo in brief. ...
* Command and Variable Index:: * General Index::
@detailmenu --- The Detailed Node Listing --- Overview of Texinfo * Reporting Bugs:: ... ...
Beginning a Texinfo File * Sample Beginning:: ... ... @end detailmenu @end menu
The body segment contains all the text of the document. A manual is divided into one or more nodes (see Nodes). The example illustrates a chapter made of three nodes, one for introductory material in the chapter, and two sections. The introductory material contains an enumerated list.
@node First Chapter @chapter First Chapter @cindex chapter, first This is the first chapter. @cindex index entry, another Here is a numbered list. @enumerate @item This is the first item. @item This is the second item. @end enumerate @node First Section @section First Section First section of first chapter. @node Second Section @section Second Section Second section of first chapter.
In the Info output, the ‘First Chapter’ node will contain a menu listing the two sections in the chapter. Similarly, when this node is output in its own HTML file, it will contain a table of contents for the chapter.
Here is what the contents of this chapter will look like:
1. First Chapter ¶
This is the first chapter.
Here is a numbered list.
- This is the first item.
- This is the second item.
1.1 First Section ¶
First section of first chapter.
1.2 Second Section ¶
Second section of first chapter.
(In the Info and HTML output, the chapter would also be split into nodes.)
The end of a Texinfo file should include commands to create indices
(see Printing Indices and Menus), and the @bye
command to mark
the last line to be processed. For example:
@node Index @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye
A @bye
command terminates Texinfo processing. It should be on
a line by itself. Anything following @bye
is completely
ignored.
A node is a region of text that begins at a @node
command, and continues until the next @node
command.
To specify a node, write a @node
command at the beginning of
a line, and follow it with the name of the node.
Info readers display one node at a time, and provide commands for the
user to move to related nodes. The HTML output can be similarly navigated.
Nodes are used as the targets of cross-references. Cross-references,
such as the one at the end of this sentence, are made with @xref
and related commands; see Cross-references. Cross-references can
be sprinkled throughout the text. Other @-commands may also
be the target of cross-references (see @anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets, see Floats).
Normally, you put a node command immediately before each chapter
structuring command—for example, an @section
or
@subsection
line. (See Chapter Structuring.)
You should do this even if you do not intend to format the file for Info.
This is because printed output uses both @node
names and
chapter-structuring names in the output for cross-references. The only
time you are likely to use the chapter structuring commands without also
using nodes is if you are writing a document that contains no cross
references and will only be printed, not transformed into Info, HTML, or
other formats.
@node
Line@node
Line Requirements@top
Sectioning Command@node
Line ¶Write @node
at the beginning of a line followed by the name of
the node, like this:
@node node-name
After you have inserted a @node
line, you should immediately
write the @-command for the associated chapter or section (if any)
and insert its name.
You may optionally follow the node name argument to @node
with up to three optional arguments on the rest of the same line,
separating the arguments with commas. These are the names of the
‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers, in that order. Hence,
the template for a fully-written-out node line with ‘Next’, ‘Previous’,
and ‘Up’ pointers looks like this:
@node node-name, next, previous, up
The node-name argument must be present, but the others are
optional. If you wish to specify some but not others, just insert
commas as needed, as in: ‘@node mynode,,,uppernode’.
Any spaces before or after each name on the @node
line are
ignored. However, if your Texinfo document is hierarchically organized,
as virtually all are, we recommend leaving off all the pointers and
letting texi2any
determine them.
The texi2any
program automatically determines node pointers
for a hierarchically organized document. For it to do this, each
@node
command should be followed immediately by a sectioning
command such as @chapter
or @section
(except that
comment lines may intervene). Finally, you must follow the ‘Top’
@node
line with a line beginning with @top
to mark
the top-level node in the file. See The @top
Sectioning Command.
Even when you explicitly specify all pointers, you cannot write the nodes in the Texinfo source file in an arbitrary order. You must write the nodes in the order you wish them to appear in the output. For Info format one can imagine that the order may not matter, but it matters for the other formats.
In most cases, you will want to take advantage of the pointer creation feature, and not redundantly specify node pointers that the programs can determine. However, Texinfo documents are not required to be organized hierarchically or in fact to contain sectioning commands at all (for example, if you never intend the document to be printed), so node pointers may still be specified explicitly, in full generality.
If you are using GNU Emacs, and want explicit pointers, you can use the update node commands provided by Texinfo mode to insert the names of the pointers. (See Updating Nodes and Menus.)
Alternatively, you can insert the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers yourself. If you do this in Emacs, you may find it helpful to use the Texinfo mode keyboard command C-c C-c n. This command inserts ‘@node’ and a comment line listing the names of the pointers in their proper order. The comment line helps you keep track of which arguments are for which pointers.
The name of a node identifies the node. For all the details of node
names, see @node
Line Requirements).
Here are some suggestions for node names:
In the Info file, the file name, node name, and pointer names are all inserted on one line, which may run into the right edge of the window. (This does not cause a problem with Info, but is ugly.)
Because node names are used in cross-references, it is not desirable to
casually change them once published. When you delete or rename a node, it is
usually a good idea to define an @anchor
with the old name.
That way, references from other manuals, from mail archives, and so on
are not invalidated. See @anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets.
The pointers from a given node enable you to reach other nodes and consist simply of the names of those nodes.
Normally, a node’s ‘Up’ pointer contains the name of the node whose menu mentions that node. The node’s ‘Next’ pointer contains the name of the node that follows the present node in that menu and its ‘Previous’ pointer contains the name of the node that precedes it in that menu. When a node’s ‘Previous’ node is the same as its ‘Up’ node, both pointers name the same node.
Usually, the first node of a Texinfo file is the ‘Top’ node, and its ‘Up’ pointer points to the dir file, which contains the main menu for all of Info.
@node
Line Requirements ¶Names used with @node
have several requirements:
This means, for example, that if you end every chapter with a summary, you must name each summary node differently. You cannot just call them all “Summary”. You may, however, duplicate the titles of chapters, sections, and the like. Thus you can end each chapter with a section called “Summary”, so long as the node names for those sections are all different.
Node names, anchor names (see @anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets),
and float labels (see @float
[type][,label]: Floating Material) must all be unique.
@TeX{}
in a node name results in the TeX logo being
output, as it would be in normal text. Cross-references should
use @TeX{}
just as the node name does.
Some commands do not make sense in node names; for instance,
environments (e.g., @quotation
), commands that read a whole
line as their argument (e.g., @sp
), and plenty of others.
For the complete list of commands that are allowed, and their
expansion for HTML identifiers and file names, see HTML Cross-reference Command Expansion.
(not)allowed
, since this syntax is used to
specify an external manual.
texi2any
quotes problematic node names and labels by default,
but some Info readers do not recognize this syntax. Node name and label
quoting causes DEL
characters (‘CTRL-?’, character number 127,
often rendered as ‘^?’) to appear around the name. To remove
node names and labels quoting, you can set the customization variable
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_QUOTE
to ‘0’ (see Other Customization Variables).
texi2any
warns about such problematic usage in node names,
menu items, and cross-references. If you don’t want to see the
warnings, you can set the customization variable
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
to ‘0’ (see Other Customization Variables).
If you insist on using these characters in node names, in order not
to confuse the Texinfo processors you must still escape those characters,
by using either special insertions (see Inserting ‘,’ with @comma{}
) or @asis
(see @asis
). For example:
@node foo@asis{::}bar@comma{} baz
As an example of avoiding the special characters, the following is a section title in this manual:
@section @code{@@unnumbered}, @code{@@appendix}: Chapters with...
But the corresponding node name lacks the commas and the subtitle:
@node @code{@@unnumbered @@appendix}
@node foo bar @node foo bar, @node foo bar , @node foo bar, @node foo bar ,
all define the same node, namely ‘foo bar’. In menu entries, a single internal space should be used in node names or some versions of some Info readers will not find the node.
The first node of a Texinfo file is the Top node, except in an included file (see Include Files). The Top node should contain a short summary and a master menu. See The ‘Top’ Node and Master Menu for more information on the Top node contents and examples. Straight text before the Top node outside of any node should be avoided. Such text, if present, is not output for DocBook.
Here is a description of the node pointers to be used in the Top node:
Usually, all Info files are available through a single virtual Info tree, constructed from multiple directories. In this case, use ‘(dir)’ as the parent of the Top node; this specifies the top-level node in the dir file, which contains the main menu for the Info system as a whole. (Each directory with Info files is intended to contain a file named dir.)
That’s fine for Info, but for HTML output, one might well want the Up
link from the Top node to go to some specific place.
For example, for GNU the natural place would be
http://www.gnu.org/manual/ (a web page collecting links to most
GNU manuals), better specified as just /manual/
if the manual
will be installed on www.gnu.org
. This can be specified with
the TOP_NODE_UP_URL
customization variable (see HTML Customization Variables), as in
$ texi2any --html -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL=/manual/ ...
See Installing an Info File, for more information about installing an Info file in the info directory.
It is usually best to leave the pointers off entirely and let the tools implicitly define them, with this simple result:
@node Top
@top
Sectioning Command ¶The @top
command is a special sectioning command that you
should only use after a ‘@node Top’ line at the beginning of a
Texinfo file.
It produces the same sort of output as @unnumbered
(see @unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other Labeling). In LaTeX \part*
is used.
@top
is ignored when raising or lowering sections. That is,
it is never lowered and nothing can be raised to it
(see Raise/lower Sections: @raisesections
and @lowersections
).
It used to be conventional to wrap the ‘Top’ node
in an @ifnottex
conditional so that it would not appear in
printed output (see Conditionally Visible Text). Thus, a Top node often looked
like this:
@ifnottex @node Top @top your-manual-title very-high-level-summary @end ifnottex
This is no longer necessary, as the ‘Top’ node is now never output for printed output. The ‘Top’ node is not output for DocBook either.
Nodes can contain menus, which contain the names of child nodes within the parent node; for example, a node corresponding to a chapter would have a menu of the sections in that chapter. The menus allow the user to move to the child nodes in the Info output.
In addition, nodes contain node pointers that name other nodes. The ‘Next’ and ‘Previous’ pointers link nodes at the same sectioning level into a chain. As you might imagine, the ‘Next’ pointer links to the next node, and the ‘Previous’ pointer links to the previous node. In general, ‘Next’ and ‘Previous’ refer to nodes at the same hierarchical level in the manual, not necessarily to the next node within the Texinfo file. In the Texinfo file, the subsequent node may be at a lower level—a section-level node most often follows a chapter-level node, for example. Thus, for example, all the nodes that are at the level of sections within a chapter are linked together, and the order in this chain is the same as the order of the children in the menu of the parent chapter. Each child node records the parent node name as its ‘Up’ pointer.
Since the ‘Top’ node is the only node at that level, ‘Next’ refers to the first following node, which is almost always a chapter or chapter-level node. This is an exception to the rule of ‘Next’ being at the same hierarchical level.
The Info and HTML output for each node includes links to the
‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ nodes. The HTML also uses
the accesskey
attribute with the values ‘n’, ‘p’, and
‘u’ respectively. This allows people using web browsers to
follow the navigation using (typically) M-letter, e.g.,
M-n for the ‘Next’ node, from anywhere within the node.
Node pointers and menus provide structure for Info files just as
chapters, sections, subsections, and the like provide structure for
printed books. The two structures are theoretically distinct; in
practice, however, the tree structure of printed books is essentially
always used for the node and menu structure also, as this leads to a
document which is easy to follow.
Typically, the sectioning structure and the node structure are completely parallel, with one node for each chapter, section, etc., and with the nodes following the same hierarchical arrangement as the sectioning. Thus, if a node is at the logical level of a chapter, its child nodes are at the level of sections; similarly, the child nodes of sections are at the level of subsections.
It is technically possible to create Texinfo documents with only one structure or the other, or for the two structures not to be parallel, or for either the sectioning or node structure to be different from the conventional structure. To the best of our knowledge, however, all the Texinfo manuals currently in general use do follow the conventional parallel structure.
Here is a diagram that illustrates a Texinfo file with three chapters, each of which contains two sections.
The “root” is at the top of the diagram and the “leaves” are at the bottom. This is how such a diagram is drawn conventionally; it illustrates an upside-down tree. For this reason, the root node is called the ‘Top’ node, and ‘Up’ node pointers carry you closer to the root.
Top | ------------------------------------- | | | Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 | | | -------- -------- -------- | | | | | | Section Section Section Section Section Section 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
Using explicit pointers (not recommended, but shown for purposes of the example), the fully-written command to start Chapter 2 would be this:
@node Chapter 2, Chapter 3, Chapter 1, Top @comment node-name, next, previous, up
This @node
line says that the name of this node is
“Chapter 2”, the name of the ‘Next’ node is “Chapter 3”, the
name of the ‘Previous’ node is “Chapter 1”, and the name of the
‘Up’ node is “Top”. You can (and should) omit writing out these
node names if your document is hierarchically organized, but the
pointer relationships still obtain.
To go to Sections 2.1 and 2.2 using Info, you need a menu inside Chapter 2. (See Menus.) You would write the menu just before the beginning of Section 2.1, like this:
@menu * Sect. 2.1:: Description of this section. * Sect. 2.2:: Description. @end menu
The automatic pointers for the node for Sect. 2.1 correspond to:
@node Sect. 2.1, Sect. 2.2, , Chapter 2 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
Note that no ‘Prev’ pointer is generated, since there is no other node at the same hierarchical level before Sect. 2.1.
Using explicit pointers, the node for Sect. 2.1 could be written like this:
@node Sect. 2.1, Sect. 2.2, Chapter 2, Chapter 2 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
With automatic pointers, the ‘Next’ and ‘Previous’ pointers of a node lead to other nodes at the same level—from chapter to chapter or from section to section. As shown, when using explicit pointers, the pointers can also lead somewhere else, here, for example, the ‘Previous’ pointer points up. An ‘Up’ pointer usually leads to a node at the level above (closer to the ‘Top’ node; and a ‘Menu’ leads to nodes at a level below (closer to ‘leaves’). (A cross-reference can point to a node at any level; see Cross-references.)
Technically, explicit node pointers can carry you to any node, regardless of the structure of the document; even to nodes in a different Info file. However, it would be very confusing for readers to have the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’ and ‘Up’ pointers lead to nodes that do not correspond, even loosely, to the next, previous and up node.
A @node
command and a chapter structuring command are
conventionally used together, in that order, often followed by
indexing commands. (As shown in the example above, you may follow the
@node
line with a comment line, e.g., to show which pointer is
which if explicit pointers are used.) The Texinfo processors use this
construct to determine the relationships between nodes and sectioning
commands.
Here is the beginning of the chapter in this manual called “Ending a
Texinfo File”. This shows a @node
line followed by a
@chapter
line, and then by indexing lines.
@node Ending a File @chapter Ending a Texinfo File @cindex Ending a Texinfo file @cindex Texinfo file ending @cindex File ending
You can provide a short description of the purpose of a node by using
the @nodedescription
command following the @node
line.
Such a description might elaborate on or extend the information in the
node name itself.
You can also use a @nodedescriptionblock
environment to
provide a node description. This may be useful for longer descriptions.
texi2any
uses the content you provide with these commands
when outputing menus for Info output format (and, optionally,
for HTML). texi2any
uses the description after a menu
entry for the node if it is generating the menu automatically, or
if no description for the menu entry was provided in an explicit
@menu
block. (See Menus).
Here is an example of using these commands:
@node Tools @chapter Tools This chapter is on different tools you can use. @node Screwdrivers @nodedescription Flathead and Phillips. @section Screwdrivers This section is about screwdrivers. @node Drills @nodedescriptionblock Making holes in things with power screwdrivers, drill drivers, combi drills, impact drivers, hammer drills, breakers and demolition drills. @end nodedescriptionblock @section Drills This section is about drills.
In Info output, texi2any
would output the ‘Tools’ node with
a menu as follows:
* Menu: * Screwdrivers:: Flathead and Phillips. * Drills:: Making holes in things with power screwdrivers, drill drivers, combi drills, impact drivers, hammer drills, breakers and demolition drills.
Menus contain pointers to subordinate nodes. In Info output,
you use menus to go to such nodes. texi2any
can output menus in
HTML output, but does not do so by default
(see Other Customization Variables, under FORMAT_MENU
).
Menus have no role in printed manuals or other output formats.
Menus are automatically generated by texi2any
when outputting
Info for nodes followed by a sectioning command, without an explicit
@menu
block, and with automatic pointers.
It is often more convenient to let texi2any
generate
menus for you, as you do not then have the burden of updating menu
blocks in your Texinfo source when you add, remove, or relocate nodes.
In the usual case of a hierarchically organized manual with sectioning
commands associated with nodes, and with node pointers left out, you
should only write menus if you want exact control over the contents
and formatting of menus in Info.
A menu consists of a @menu
command on a line by itself,
followed by menu entry lines or menu comment lines, and then followed
by an @end menu
command on a line by itself.
A menu looks like this:
@menu Larger Units of Text * Files:: All about handling files. * Multiples: Buffers. Multiple buffers; editing several files at once. @end menu
In a menu, every line that begins with an ‘* ’ is a menu entry. (Note the space after the asterisk.)
A line that does not start with an ‘* ’ may also appear in a menu. Such a line is not a menu entry but rather a menu comment line that appears in the Info file. In the example above, the line ‘Larger Units of Text’ is such a menu comment line; the two lines starting with ‘* ’ are menu entries.
Technically, menus can carry you to any node, regardless of the
structure of the document; even to nodes in a different Info file.
However, the texi2any
implicit pointer creation feature
(see Writing a @node
Line) and GNU Emacs Texinfo mode updating commands
work only to create menus of subordinate nodes in a hierarchically
structured document. In a hierarchically structured document, it is
much better to use cross-references to refer to arbitrary nodes.
In Info, a user selects a node with the m (Info-menu
)
command. The menu entry name is what the user types after the m
command.
In the HTML output, the accesskey
attribute is used with the
values ‘1’…‘9’ for the first nine entries. This
allows people using web browsers to follow the first menu entries
using (typically) M-digit, e.g., M-1 for the first
entry.
A menu looks like this in Texinfo:
@menu * menu entry name: Node name. A short description. * Node name:: This form is preferred. @end menu
This produces:
* Menu: * menu entry name: Node name. A short description. * Node name:: This form is preferred.
Here is an example as you might see it in a Texinfo file:
@menu Larger Units of Text * Files:: All about handling files. * Multiples: Buffers. Multiple buffers; editing several files at once. @end menu
This produces:
* Menu: Larger Units of Text * Files:: All about handling files. * Multiples: Buffers. Multiple buffers; editing several files at once.
In this example, the menu has two entries. ‘Files’ is both a menu entry name and the name of the node referred to by that name. ‘Multiples’ is the menu entry name; it refers to the node named ‘Buffers’. The line ‘Larger Units of Text’ is a comment; it appears in the menu, but is not an entry.
Since no file name is specified with either ‘Files’ or ‘Buffers’, they must be the names of nodes in the same Info file (see Referring to Other Info Files).
There may be at most one menu in a node. A menu is conventionally
located at the end of a node, without any regular text or additional
commands between the @end menu
and the beginning of the next
node.
This convention is useful, since a reader who uses the menu could easily miss any such text. Also, any such post-menu text will be considered part of the menu in Info output (which has no marker for the end of a menu). Thus, a line beginning with ‘* ’ will likely be incorrectly handled.
It’s usually best if a node with a menu does not contain much text. If you find yourself with a lot of text before a menu, we generally recommend moving all but a couple of paragraphs into a new subnode. Otherwise, it is easy for readers to miss the menu.
A menu entry has three parts, only the second of which is required:
The template for a generic menu entry looks like this (but see the next section for one more possibility):
* menu-entry-name: node-name. description
Follow the menu entry name with a single colon, and follow the node name with tab, comma, newline, or the two characters period and space (‘. ’).
The third part of a menu entry is a descriptive phrase or sentence. Menu entry names and node names are often short; the description explains to the reader what the node is about. A useful description complements the node name rather than repeats it. The description, which is optional, can spread over multiple lines; if it does, some authors prefer to indent the second line while others prefer to align it with the first (and all others). It’s up to you. An empty line, or the next menu entry, ends a description.
Space characters in a menu are preserved as-is in the Info output; this
allows you to format the menu as you wish.
Unfortunately you must type
node names without any extra spaces or some versions of some Info
readers will not find the node (see @node
Line Requirements).
texi2any
warns and protect names when the text of a menu item
(and node names and cross-references) contains a problematic construct that
could interfere with its parsing in Info. See Info Node Names Constraints.
When the menu entry name and node name are the same, you can write the name immediately after the asterisk and space at the beginning of the line and follow the name with two colons.
For example, write
* Name:: description
instead of
* Name: Name. description
We recommend using the node name for the menu entry name whenever possible, since it reduces visual clutter in the menu.
You can create a menu entry that enables a reader in Info to go to a node in another Info file by writing the file name in parentheses just before the node name. Some examples:
@menu * first-entry-name:(filename)nodename. description * (filename)second-node:: description @end menu
For example, to refer directly to the ‘Outlining’ and ‘Rebinding’ nodes in the Emacs Manual, you could write a menu like this:
@menu * Outlining: (emacs)Outline Mode. The major mode for editing outlines. * (emacs)Rebinding:: How to redefine the meaning of a key. @end menu
If you do not list the node name, but only name the file, then Info presumes that you are referring to the ‘Top’ node. Examples:
* Info: (info). Documentation browsing system. * (emacs):: The extensible, self-documenting text editor.
The GNU Emacs Texinfo mode menu updating commands only work with nodes within the current buffer, so you cannot use them to create menus that refer to other files. You must write such menus by hand. See Updating Nodes and Menus.
Texinfo’s chapter structuring commands divide a document into a hierarchy of chapters, sections, subsections, and subsubsections. These commands generate large headings in the text, like the one above. They also provide information for generating the table of contents (see Generating a Table of Contents).
Normally you put a @node
command immediately before each
chapter structuring command. See Nodes.
@chapter
: Chapter Structuring@unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other Labeling@majorheading
, @chapheading
: Chapter-level Headings@section
: Sections Below Chapters@unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
@subsection
: Subsections Below Sections@subsection
-like Commands@subsubsection
and Other Subsub Commands@part
: Groups of Chapters@raisesections
and @lowersections
A Texinfo file is usually structured like a book with chapters, sections, subsections, and the like. This structure can be visualized as a tree (or rather as an upside-down tree) with the root at the top and the levels corresponding to chapters, sections, subsection, and subsubsections.
Here is a diagram that shows a Texinfo file with three chapters, each with two sections.
Top | ------------------------------------- | | | Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 | | | -------- -------- -------- | | | | | | Section Section Section Section Section Section 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
In a Texinfo file that has this structure, the beginning of Chapter 2 would be written like this:
@node Chapter 2 @chapter Chapter 2
For purposes of example, here is how it would be written with explicit node pointers:
@node Chapter 2, Chapter 3, Chapter 1, Top @chapter Chapter 2
The chapter structuring commands are described in the sections that
follow; the @node
command is described in
the previous chapter (see Nodes).
The chapter structuring commands fall into four groups, each of which contains structuring commands at the levels of chapters, sections, subsections, and subsubsections:
@chapter
-like commands and @appendix
-like commands
produce numbered or lettered entries both in the body of a document and
in its table of contents.
@unnumbered
-like commands produce unnumbered entries
both in the body of a document and in its table of contents. The
@top
command, which has a special use, is a member of this
group (see The @top
Sectioning Command). An @unnumbered
section
is a normal part of the document structure.
@heading
-like commands produce simple unnumbered
headings that do not appear in a table of contents, are not associated
with nodes, and cannot be cross-referenced. These heading commands
never start a new page.
In printed output, the chapter structuring commands produce headings
in the document. When a @setchapternewpage
command says to do so, the
@chapter
, @unnumbered
, and @appendix
commands
start new pages in the printed manual; the @heading
commands
do not. See @setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before Chapters.
In Info and plain text output, the command causes the title to appear on a line by itself, with a line of an ASCII character (‘*’, ‘=’, …) inserted underneath. For example, the “Chapter Structuring” heading could be:
5 Chapter Structuring *********************
The underlining character is the same for all the commands at the
same level. For instance, it is the same for the chapter-level commands
@chapter
, @apppendix
, @unnumbered
and
@chapheading
.
In HTML, the chapter-level commands produce an <h2>
-level
header by default (controlled by the CHAPTER_HEADER_LEVEL
customization variable, see Other Customization Variables).
The heading element level is adjusted for the other commands.
In the DocBook output, the appropriate level of element is used.
The produced element includes all following sections up to the next command
at the same or higher level.
For example, a <chapter>
element is produced for @chapter
,
and contains any sections or subsections in the chapter.
Here is a summary:
No new page | |||
Numbered | Unnumbered | Lettered/numbered | Unnumbered |
In contents | In contents | In contents | Not in contents |
@top | @majorheading | ||
@chapter | @unnumbered | @appendix | @chapheading |
@section | @unnumberedsec | @appendixsec | @heading |
@subsection | @unnumberedsubsec | @appendixsubsec | @subheading |
@subsubsection | @unnumberedsubsubsec | @appendixsubsubsec | @subsubheading |
@chapter
: Chapter Structuring ¶@chapter
identifies a chapter in the document–the highest
level of the normal document structuring hierarchy. Write the command
at the beginning of a line and follow it on the same line by the title
of the chapter. The chapter is numbered automatically, starting
from 1.
For example, the present chapter in this manual is entitled
“Chapter Structuring”; the @chapter
line
looks like this:
@chapter Chapter Structuring
@unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other Labeling ¶Use the @unnumbered
command to start a chapter-level element
that appears without chapter numbers of any kind. Use the
@appendix
command to start an appendix that is labeled by
letter (‘A’, ‘B’, …) instead of by number; appendices are also
at the chapter level of structuring.
Write an @appendix
or @unnumbered
command at the
beginning of a line and follow it on the same line by the title,
just as with @chapter
.
Texinfo also provides a command @centerchap
, which is analogous
to @unnumbered
, but centers its argument in the printed and HTML
outputs. This kind of stylistic choice is not usually offered by
Texinfo.
You are recommended not to use this command, as
it may be removed in future releases of Texinfo.
With @unnumbered
, if the name of the associated node is one of
these English words (case-insensitive):
Acknowledgements Colophon Dedication Preface
then the DocBook output uses corresponding special tags
(<preface>
, etc.) instead of the default <chapter>
.
The argument to @unnumbered
itself can be anything, and is
output as the element title as usual.
@majorheading
, @chapheading
: Chapter-level Headings ¶The @majorheading
and @chapheading
commands produce
chapter-like headings in the body of a document.
However, neither command produces an entry in the table of contents, and neither command causes TeX to start a new page in a printed manual.
In TeX, a @majorheading
command generates a larger vertical
whitespace before the heading than a @chapheading
command but
is otherwise the same.
In other output formats, the @majorheading
and @chapheading
commands produce a similar output to @chapter
. The difference is
the lack of numbering and the lack of any association with nodes.
See @chapter
: Chapter Structuring.
@section
: Sections Below Chapters ¶An @section
command identifies a section within a chapter
unit, whether created with @chapter
, @unnumbered
, or
@appendix
, following the numbering scheme of the chapter-level
command. Thus, within a @chapter
chapter numbered ‘1’, the
sections are numbered ‘1.1’, ‘1.2’, etc.; within an @appendix
“chapter” labeled ‘A’, the sections are numbered ‘A.1’, ‘A.2’, etc.;
within an @unnumbered
chapter, the section gets no number.
To make a section, write the @section
command at the
beginning of a line and follow it on the same line by the section
title. For example:
@section This is a section
Section titles are listed in the table of contents.
@unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
¶The @unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, and @heading
commands are, respectively, the unnumbered, appendix-like, and
heading-like equivalents of the @section
command (see the
previous section).
@unnumberedsec
and @appendixsec
do not need to be used
in ordinary circumstances, because @section
may also be used
within @unnumbered
and @appendix
chapters; again, see
the previous section.
@unnumberedsec
The @unnumberedsec
command may be used within an unnumbered
chapter or within a regular chapter or appendix to produce an
unnumbered section.
@appendixsec
¶@appendixsection
@appendixsection
is a longer spelling of the
@appendixsec
command; the two are synonymous.
Conventionally, the @appendixsec
or @appendixsection
command is used only within appendices.
@heading
You may use the @heading
command (almost) anywhere for a
section-style heading that will not appear in the table of contents.
The @heading
-series commands can appear inside most
environments, for example, though pathological and useless locations
such as an argument to another command, etc., are not allowed.
@subsection
: Subsections Below Sections ¶Subsections are to sections as sections are to chapters;
see @section
: Sections Below Chapters. For example:
@subsection This is a subsection
Subsection titles are listed in the table of contents.
@subsection
-like Commands ¶The @unnumberedsubsec
, @appendixsubsec
, and
@subheading
commands are, respectively, the unnumbered,
appendix-like, and heading-like equivalents of the @subsection
command. (See @subsection
: Subsections Below Sections.)
@unnumberedsubsec
and @appendixsubsec
do not need to
be used in ordinary circumstances, because @subsection
may
also be used within sections of @unnumbered
and
@appendix
chapters (see @section
: Sections Below Chapters).
An @subheading
command produces a heading like that of a
subsection except that it is not numbered and does not appear in the
table of contents. Similarly, an @unnumberedsubsec
command
produces an unnumbered heading like that of a subsection and an
@appendixsubsec
command produces a subsection-like heading
labeled with a letter and numbers; both of these commands produce
headings that appear in the table of contents.
@subsubsection
and Other Subsub Commands ¶The fourth and lowest level sectioning commands in Texinfo are the ‘subsub’ commands. They are:
@subsubsection
Subsubsections are to subsections as subsections are to sections.
(See @subsection
: Subsections Below Sections.) Subsubsection titles appear in the
table of contents.
@unnumberedsubsubsec
Unnumbered subsubsection titles appear in the table of contents, but lack numbers. Otherwise, unnumbered subsubsections are the same as subsubsections.
@appendixsubsubsec
Conventionally, appendix commands are used only for appendices and are lettered and numbered appropriately. They also appear in the table of contents.
@subsubheading
The @subsubheading
command may be used anywhere that you want
a small heading that will not appear in the table of contents.
As with subsections, @unnumberedsubsubsec
and
@appendixsubsubsec
do not need to be used in ordinary
circumstances, because @subsubsection
may also be used within
subsections of @unnumbered
and @appendix
chapters
(see @section
: Sections Below Chapters).
@part
: Groups of Chapters ¶The final sectioning command is @part
, to mark a part of
a manual, that is, a group of chapters or (rarely) appendices. This
behaves quite differently from the other sectioning commands, to fit
with the way such “parts” are conventionally used in books.
No @node
command is associated with @part
. Just write
the command on a line by itself, including the part title, at the
place in the document you want to mark off as starting that part. For
example:
@part Part I:@* The beginning
As can be inferred from this example, no automatic numbering or
labeling of the @part
text is done. The text is taken as-is.
Because parts are not associated with nodes, no general text can
follow the @part
line. To produce the intended output, it
must be followed by a chapter-level command (including its node).
Thus, to continue the example:
@part Part I:@* The beginning @node Introduction @chapter Introduction ...
In the TeX output, the @part
text is included in both the
normal and short tables of contents (see Generating a Table of Contents), without a page
number (since that is the normal convention). In addition, a “part
page” is output in the body of the document, with just the
@part
text. In the example above, the @*
causes a
line break on the part page (but is replaced with a space in the
tables of contents). This part page is always forced to be on an odd
(right-hand) page, regardless of the chapter pagination
(see @setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before Chapters). In the LaTeX output,
the @part
is output as \part
.
In the HTML output, the @part
text is similarly included in
the tables of contents, and a heading is included in the main document
text, as part of the following chapter or appendix node.
In the DocBook output, the <part>
element includes all
the following chapters, up to the next <part>
. A <part>
containing chapters is also closed at an appendix.
In the Info and plain text output, @part
has no effect.
@part
is ignored when raising or lowering sections (see next
section). That is, it is never lowered and nothing can be raised to it.
@raisesections
and @lowersections
¶The @raisesections
and @lowersections
commands
implicitly raise and lower the hierarchical level of following
chapters, sections and the other sectioning commands (excluding parts).
That is, the @raisesections
command changes sections to
chapters, subsections to sections, and so on. Conversely, the
@lowersections
command changes chapters to sections, sections
to subsections, and so on. Thus, a @lowersections
command
cancels a @raisesections
command, and vice versa.
As a practical matter, you generally only want to raise or lower large
chunks, usually in external files.
You can use @lowersections
to include text written as an outer
or standalone Texinfo file in another Texinfo file as an inner,
included file (see Include Files). Typical usage looks like this:
@lowersections @include somefile.texi @raisesections
(Without the @raisesections
, all the subsequent
sections in the main file would also be lowered.)
If the included file being lowered has a @top
node, you’ll
need to conditionalize its inclusion with a flag (see @set
and @value
).
Any menus in the final result have to take the raising and lowering
into account, so arbitrarily sprinkling @raisesections
and
@lowersections
commands throughout the document will likely
lead to errors (unless the menus in your document are all generated
automatically).
Repeated use of the commands continues to raise or lower the
hierarchical level a step at a time. An attempt to raise above
‘chapter’ reproduces chapter commands; an attempt to lower below
‘subsubsection’ reproduces subsubsection commands. Also, lowered
subsubsections and raised chapters will not work with
texi2any
’s feature of implicitly determining node pointers,
since the menu structure cannot be represented correctly.
Write each @raisesections
and @lowersections
command
on a line of its own.
Cross-references are used to refer the reader to other parts of the same or different Texinfo files.
Use cross-references to provide access to information that is too detailed for the current context, or incidental to it. An online help system or a reference manual is not like a novel; few read such documents in sequence from beginning to end. Instead, people look up what they need. For this reason, such creations should contain many cross-references to help readers find other information that they may not have read.
In a printed manual, a cross-reference results in a page reference,
unless it is to another manual altogether, in which case the
cross-reference names that manual. In Info, a cross-reference results
in an entry that you can follow using the Info ‘f’ command.
(See Following cross-references in Info.) In HTML, a
cross-reference results in an hyperlink. In DocBook, the <link>
element is used for cross-references unless it is to another manual,
in which case the cross-reference names that manual.
The various cross-reference commands use nodes, anchors
(see @anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets) or float labels (see @float
[type][,label]: Floating Material) to define
cross-reference locations. When TeX generates a DVI file, it records each
cross-reference location page number and uses the page numbers in making
references. Thus, even if you are writing a manual that will only be printed,
and not used online, you must nonetheless write @node
lines (or
@anchor
anchors) in order to name the places to which you make
cross-references.
@xref
with One Argument@xref
with Two Arguments@xref
with Three Arguments@xref
with Four and Five Arguments@xref
@ref
@pxref
@anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets@link
: Plain, unadorned hyperlink@inforef
: Cross-references to Info-only Material@url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
@cite
{reference}There are three different cross-reference commands:
@xref
Used to start a sentence with an Info cross-reference saying ‘*Note name: node.’ or with ‘See …’ in other output formats.
@ref
Used within or, more often, at the end of a sentence; produces an Info cross-reference saying ‘*note name: node.’, and just the reference in other output formats, without the preceding ‘See’.
@pxref
Used within parentheses, at the end of a sentence, or otherwise before punctuation, to make a reference. Its output starts with a lowercase ‘*note’ in Info, and with a lowercase ‘see’ in the other output formats. (‘p’ is for ‘parenthesis’.)
Additionally, there are commands to produce references to documents
outside the Texinfo system. The @cite
command is used
to make references to books and manuals. @url
produces
a URL, for example a reference to a page on the World
Wide Web.
A cross-reference command requires only one argument, which is the name of the node to which it refers. A cross-reference command may contain up to four additional arguments. The template for a full five argument cross-reference looks like this:
@xref{node-name, online-label, printed-label, manual-name, printed-manual-title}
The five possible arguments for a cross-reference are:
@node
to define the node (see Writing a @node
Line),
@anchor
(see @anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets), or @float
(see @float
[type][,label]: Floating Material) with a label.
This argument is required (except for reference to whole manuals).
Write a node name in a cross-reference in exactly the same way as in
the @node
line, including the same capitalization; otherwise, the
processors may not find the reference.
Whitespace before and after the commas separating these arguments is
ignored. To include a comma in one of the arguments, use
@comma{}
(see Inserting ‘,’ with @comma{}
).
Cross-references with one, two, three, four, and five arguments are described separately in following sections.
When processing with TeX, a comma is automatically inserted after the page number for cross-references to within the same manual, unless the closing brace of the argument is followed by non-whitespace (such as a comma or period). This gives you the choice of whether to have a comma there in other output formats. For example,
@xref{Another Section} for more info
with TeX produces ‘See Another Section, page ppp, for more info’, and in the Info output produces ‘*Note Another Section:: for more info’.
If an unwanted comma is added, follow the argument with a command such as ‘@:’. For example, ‘@xref{Hurricanes}@: --- for the details’ produces
See Hurricanes, page ppp — for the details
instead of ‘See Hurricanes, page ppp, — for the details’.
texi2any
warns and protect names when the text of a cross-reference
(and node names and menu items) contains a problematic construct that could
interfere with its parsing in Info. See Info Node Names Constraints.
@xref
with One Argument ¶The simplest form of @xref
takes one argument, the name of
another node in the same Texinfo file.
For example,
@xref{Tropical Storms}.
produces
*Note Tropical Storms::.
in Info and
See Section 3.1 [Tropical Storms], page 24.
in a printed manual.
@xref
with Two Arguments ¶With two arguments, the second is used as a label for the online output.
The template is like this:
@xref{node-name, online-label}.
For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, Lightning}.
produces:
*Note Lightning: Electrical Effects.
in Info and
See Section 5.2 [Electrical Effects], page 57.
in a printed manual, where the node name is printed.
The second argument to cross-references shares constraints with node names. The potentially problematic character in this context is the colon. See Info Node Names Constraints.
@xref
with Three Arguments ¶A third argument replaces the node name in the printed output. The third argument should be the name of the section in the printed output, or else state the topic discussed by that section.
The template is like this:
@xref{node-name, online-label, printed-label}.
For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, Lightning, Thunder and Lightning}, for details.
produces
*Note Lightning: Electrical Effects, for details.
in Info and
See Section 5.2 [Thunder and Lightning], page 57, for details.
in a printed manual.
If a third argument is given and the second one is empty, then the third argument serves for both. (Note how two commas, side by side, mark the empty second argument.)
@xref{Electrical Effects, , Thunder and Lightning}, for details.
produces
*Note Thunder and Lightning: Electrical Effects, for details.
in Info and
See Section 5.2 [Thunder and Lightning], page 57, for details.
in a printed manual.
The third argument to cross-references shares constraints with node names. The potentially problematic character in this context is the colon. See Info Node Names Constraints.
As a practical matter, it is often best to write cross-references with just the first argument if the node name and the section title are the same (or nearly so), and with the first and third arguments only if the node name and title are different.
Texinfo offers a setting to use the section title instead of node names by default in cross-references (an explicitly specified third argument still takes precedence):
@xrefautomaticsectiontitle on
Typically this line would be given near the beginning of the document
and used for the whole manual. But you can turn it off if you want
(@xrefautomaticsectiontitle off
), for example, if you’re
including some other sub-document that doesn’t have suitable section
names. This setting also applies to node headers in HTML, if
@xrefautomaticsectiontitle
is on, the sections names are used
in node headers instead of the node names when possible.
@xref
with Four and Five Arguments ¶In a cross-reference, a fourth argument specifies the name of another manual, different from the file in which the reference appears, and a fifth argument specifies its title as a printed manual.
The full template is:
@xref{node-name, online-label, printed-label, manual-name, printed-manual-title}.
For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, Lightning, Thunder and Lightning, weather, An Introduction to Meteorology}.
produces this output in Info:
*Note Lightning: (weather)Electrical Effects.
As you can see, the name of the manual is enclosed in parentheses and precedes the name of the node. In HTML, the manual name and the node name are used to construct the hyperlink URL (see HTML Cross-references), while the link text is based on the label.
In a printed manual, the reference looks like this:
See section “Thunder and Lightning” in An Introduction to Meteorology.
The title of the printed manual is typeset like @cite
; and the
reference lacks a page number since the page a reference refers when
that reference is to another manual cannot be known.
Next case: often, you will leave out the second argument when you use
the long version of @xref
. In this case, the third argument,
the topic description, will be used as the cross-reference name in
online formats. For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, , Thunder and Lightning, weather, An Introduction to Meteorology}.
produces
*Note Thunder and Lightning: (weather)Electrical Effects.
in Info and
See section “Thunder and Lightning” in An Introduction to Meteorology.
in a printed manual.
Next case: If the node name and the section title are the same in the other manual, you may also leave out the section title. In this case, the node name is used in both instances. For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects,,, weather, An Introduction to Meteorology}.
produces
*Note (weather)Electrical Effects::.
in Info and
See section “Electrical Effects” in An Introduction to Meteorology.
in a printed manual.
In general, there is no reason to have a manual name argument without a printed manual argument, unless no printed manual is generated. You may also want to refer to another manual file that is within a single printed manual—when multiple Texinfo files are incorporated into the same printed manual but can create separate output files in other output formats. In this case, you need to specify only the fourth argument, and not the fifth. If the printed manual title argument is missing, the manual name will be used instead in printed output.
A printed manual title argument without an online manual argument is of little use unless only a printed manual is generated from the Texinfo source. The result in online formats depends on the format, and can be, for example, an empty manual name or a reference to the printed manual formatted in a similar way to the printed output.
Finally, it’s also allowed to leave out all the arguments except the fourth and fifth, to refer to another manual as a whole. See the next section.
Ordinarily, you must always name a node in a cross-reference. However, it’s not unusual to want to refer to another manual as a whole, rather than a particular section within it. In this case, giving any section name is an unnecessary distraction.
So, with cross-references to other manuals (see @xref
with Four and Five Arguments), if the first argument is either ‘Top’ (capitalized
just that way) or omitted entirely, and the third argument is omitted,
the printed output includes no node or section name. (The Info output
includes ‘Top’ if it was given.) For example,
@xref{Top,,, make, The GNU Make Manual}.
produces
*Note (make)Top::.
and
See The GNU Make Manual.
Info readers will go to the Top node of the manual whether or not the ‘Top’ node is explicitly specified.
It’s also possible (and is historical practice) to refer to a whole
manual by specifying the ‘Top’ node and an appropriate entry for the
third argument to the @xref
command. Using this idiom, to
make a cross-reference to The GNU Make Manual, you would write:
@xref{Top,, Overview, make, The GNU Make Manual}.
which produces
*Note Overview: (make)Top.
in Info and
See section “Overview” in The GNU Make Manual.
in a printed manual.
In this example, ‘Top’ is the name of the first node, and ‘Overview’ is the name of the first section of the manual. There is no widely-used convention for naming the first section in a printed manual, this is just what the Make manual happens to use. This arbitrariness of the first name is a principal reason why omitting the third argument in whole-manual cross-references is preferable.
@xref
¶The @xref
command generates a cross-reference for the
beginning of a sentence. Examples of using @xref
are
in previous sections.
@ref
¶@ref
is nearly the same as @xref
except that it does
not generate a ‘See’ in the output, just the reference itself.
This makes it useful as the last part of a sentence.
For example,
For more information, @pxref{This}, and @ref{That}.
produces in Info:
For more information, *note This::, and *note That::.
and in printed output:
For more information, see Section 1.1 [This], page 1, and Section 1.2 [That], page 2.
The @ref
command can tempt writers to express themselves in a
manner that is suitable for a printed manual but looks awkward in the
Info format. Bear in mind that your audience could be using both the
printed and other output formats such as Info. For example:
Sea surges are described in @ref{Hurricanes}.
looks ok in the printed output:
Sea surges are described in Section 6.7 [Hurricanes], page 72.
but is awkward to read in Info, “note” being a verb:
Sea surges are described in *note Hurricanes::.
@pxref
¶The parenthetical reference command, @pxref
, is nearly the
same as @xref
, but it is best used within parentheses.
The command differs from @xref
in that the reference is
typeset with a lowercase ‘see’ rather than an uppercase ‘See’.
In Info, ‘*note’ is output.
With one argument, a parenthetical cross-reference looks like this:
... storms cause flooding (@pxref{Hurricanes}) ...
which produces
... storms cause flooding (*note Hurricanes::) ...
in Info and
… storms cause flooding (see Section 6.7 [Hurricanes], page 72) …
in a printed manual.
In past versions of Texinfo, it was not allowed to write punctuation
after a @pxref
, so it could be used only before a
right parenthesis. This is no longer the case.
The effect of ‘@pxref{node-name}’ is similar to that of
‘see @ref{node-name}’. However, in many circumstances the
latter is preferable, as this makes it clear in the Info output that
the word “see” should be present.
@anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets ¶An anchor is a position in your document, labelled so that
cross-references can refer to it, just as they can to nodes. You
create an anchor with the @anchor
command, and give the label
as a normal brace-delimited argument. For example:
This marks the @anchor{x-spot}spot. ... @xref{x-spot,,the spot}.
produces:
This marks the spot. ... See [the spot], page 1.
As you can see, the @anchor
command itself produces no output.
This example defines an anchor ‘x-spot’ just before the word ‘spot’.
You can refer to it later with an @xref
or other cross
reference command, as shown (see Cross-references).
It is best to put @anchor
commands just before the position you
wish to refer to; that way, the reader’s eye is led on to the correct
text when they jump to the anchor. You can put the @anchor
command on a line by itself if that helps readability of the source.
Whitespace (including newlines) is ignored after @anchor
.
Anchor names, node names and float labels may not conflict. Anchors,
nodes and float labels are
given similar treatment in some ways; for example, the
goto-node
command takes either an anchor name or a node name as
an argument. (See Go to node in Info.). Anchors names and float
labels could also appear in menus (see Menus) and node direction
pointers (see Writing a @node
Line), although this is not recommended.
Anchor names share the same constraints as nodes on the characters that can be included (see Info Node Names Constraints).
Because of this duality, when you delete or rename a node, it is
usually a good idea to define an @anchor
with the old name.
That way, any links to the old node, whether from other Texinfo
manuals or general web pages, keep working.
@link
: Plain, unadorned hyperlink ¶@link
produces a plain hyperlink in output formats that
support it, including in HTML, DocBook, LaTeX and online PDF.
The template is:
@link{node-name, label, manual-name}
node-name is the name of the target node or anchor. Either or both of label and manual-name can be omitted. label, if given, is the text to use for the link. manual-name is the name of the external manual that the target appears within; if not given, the reference is to the current manual.
@link
has similar output to @ref
, except that it does
produce any extra text around the link label in Info or printed output
that would mark it as a cross-reference.
Be careful about using @link
to produce links that are
necessary for a user to move around a manual, as these links will do
nothing in these output formats. @link
is best used to add
convenience links that are nonetheless not essential for a reader
to understand the text of the manual. For example, you might use
@link
in a code sample to reference documentation of a symbol
in a programming library.
@inforef
: Cross-references to Info-only Material ¶@inforef
is used for making cross-references to Info
documents—even from a printed manual. This was originally
used for Info files that were not generated from any Texinfo source.
The command is now obsolete and should not be used. In addition
to having little use, similar output can be obtained with
@xref
, @ref
or @pxref
with the Info
file name as the fourth argument and no fifth argument.
The command takes either two or three arguments, in the following order:
The template is:
@inforef{node-name, cross-reference-name, info-file-name}
@url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
¶@url
produces a reference to a uniform resource locator
(URL). It takes one mandatory argument, the URL, and two optional
arguments which control the text that is displayed. In HTML and PDF
output, @url
produces a link you can follow. (To merely
indicate a URL without creating a link people can follow, use
@indicateurl
, see @indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator}.)
@uref
is a synonym for @url
.
(Originally, @url
had the meaning of @indicateurl
and @uref
was required to produce a working link, but
in practice @url
was almost always misused. So we’ve changed
the meaning.)
The second argument, if specified, is the text to display (the default is the URL itself); in output formats other than HTML, the URL is output in addition to this text.
The third argument, if specified, is the text to display, but in this case the URL is not output in any format. This is useful when the text is already sufficiently referential, as in a man page. Also, if the third argument is given, the second argument is ignored.
@url
Examples ¶First, here is an example of the simplest form of @url
, with
just one argument. The given URL is both the target and the visible
text of the link:
The official GNU ftp site is @url{http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu}.
produces:
The official GNU ftp site is http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu.
@url
¶Here is an example of the two-argument form:
The official @url{http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu, GNU ftp site} holds programs and texts.
which produces:
The official GNU ftp site holds programs and texts.
The HTML output is this:
The official <a href="http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu">GNU ftp site</a> holds programs and texts.
In other formats, the output is like this:
The official GNU ftp site (http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu) holds programs and texts.
@url
¶Finally, an example of the three-argument form:
The @url{/man.cgi/1/ls,,ls} program ...
which, except for HTML, produces:
The ls program ...
but with HTML:
The <a href="/man.cgi/1/ls">ls</a> program ...
By the way, some people prefer to display URLs in the unambiguous format:
<URL:http://host/path>
You can use this form in the input file if you wish. We feel it’s not necessary to include the ‘<URL:’ and ‘>’ in the output, since to be useful any software that tries to detect URLs in text already has to detect them without the ‘<URL:’.
TeX allows line breaking within URLs at only a few characters (which are special in URLs): ‘&’, ‘.’, ‘#’, ‘?’, and ‘/’ (but not between two ‘/’ characters). A tiny amount of stretchable space is also inserted around these characters to help with line breaking.
For HTML output, modern browsers will also do line breaking within
displayed URLs. If you need to allow breaks at other characters you
can insert @/
as needed (see @*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line Breaks).
By default, in TeX any such breaks at special characters will occur
after the character. Some people prefer such breaks to happen before
the special character. This can be controlled with the
@urefbreakstyle
command (this command has effect only in
TeX):
@urefbreakstyle how
where the argument how is one of these words:
(the default) Potentially break after the special characters.
Potentially break before the special characters.
Do not consider breaking at the special characters at all; any potential breaks must be manually inserted.
@url
PDF Output Format ¶If the ultimate purpose of a PDF is only to be viewed online, perhaps
similar to HTML in some inchoate way, you may not want the URLs to be
included in the visible text (just as URLs are not visible to readers
of web pages). Texinfo provides a PDF-specific option for this, which
must be used inside @tex
:
@tex \global\urefurlonlylinktrue @end tex
The result is that @url{http://www.gnu.org, GNU}
has the
visible output of just ‘GNU’, with a link target of
http://www.gnu.org. Ordinarily, the visible output would
include both the label and the url: ‘GNU (http://www.gnu.org)’.
This option only has effect when the PDF output is produced with the
pdfTeX program, not with other ways of getting from Texinfo to PDF
(e.g., TeX to DVI to PDF). Consequently, it is ok to specify this
option unconditionally within @tex
, as shown above. It is
ignored when DVI is being produced.
@cite
{reference} ¶Use the @cite
command for the name of a book that lacks a
companion Info file. For example, we could refer to A Book.
The command selects a slanted font in the printed
manual, and generates quotation marks in the Info file.
If a book is written in Texinfo, it is better to use a cross-reference
command since a reader can easily follow such a reference in Info.
See @xref
.
By default, URLs and cross-reference links are printed in black in PDF
output. Very occasionally, however, you may want to highlight such
“live” links with a different color, as is commonly done on web
pages. Texinfo provides a PDF-specific option for specifying these
colors, which must be used inside @tex
:
@tex \global\def\linkcolor{1 0 0} % red \global\def\urlcolor{0 1 0} % green @end tex
\urlcolor
changes the color of @url
output (both the
actual URL and any textual label), while \linkcolor
changes the
color for cross-references to nodes, etc. They are independent.
The three given values must be numbers between 0 and 1, specifying the amount of red, green, and blue respectively.
These definitions only have an effect when the PDF output is produced
with the pdfTeX program, not with other ways of getting from
Texinfo to PDF (e.g., TeX to DVI to PDF). Consequently, it is ok
to specify this option unconditionally within @tex
, as shown
above. It is ignored when DVI is being produced.
We do not recommend colorizing just for fun; unless you have a specific reason to use colors, best to skip it.
In Texinfo, you can mark words and phrases in a variety of ways. The Texinfo processors use this information to determine how to highlight the text. You can specify, for example, whether a word or phrase is a defining occurrence, a metasyntactic variable, or a symbol used in a program. Also, you can emphasize text, in several different ways.
Texinfo has commands for indicating just what kind of object a piece
of text refers to. For example, email addresses are marked by
@email
; that way, the result can be a live link to send email
when the output format supports it. If the email address was simply
marked as “print in a typewriter font”, that would not be possible.
@code
{sample-code}@kbd
{keyboard-characters}@key
{key-name}@samp
{text}@verb
{chartextchar}@var
{metasyntactic-variable}@env
{environment-variable}@file
{file-name}@command
{command-name}@option
{option-name}@dfn
{term}@abbr
{abbreviation[, meaning]}@acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}@indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator}@email
{email-address[, displayed-text]}The commands serve a variety of purposes:
@code{sample-code}
Indicate text that is a literal example of a piece of a program.
See @code
{sample-code}.
@kbd{keyboard-characters}
Indicate keyboard input. See @kbd
{keyboard-characters}.
@key{key-name}
Indicate the conventional name for a key on a keyboard.
See @key
{key-name}.
@samp{text}
Indicate text that is a literal example of a sequence of characters.
See @samp
{text}.
@verb{text}
Write a verbatim sequence of characters.
See @verb
{chartextchar}.
@var{metasyntactic-variable}
Indicate a metasyntactic variable. See @var
{metasyntactic-variable}.
@env{environment-variable}
Indicate an environment variable. See @env
{environment-variable}.
@file{file-name}
Indicate the name of a file. See @file
{file-name}.
@command{command-name}
Indicate the name of a command.
See @command
{command-name}.
@option{option}
Indicate a command-line option.
See @option
{option-name}.
@dfn{term}
Indicate the introductory or defining use of a term.
See @dfn
{term}.
@cite{reference}
Indicate the name of a book. See @cite
{reference}.
@abbr{abbreviation}
Indicate an abbreviation, such as ‘Comput.’.
@acronym{acronym}
Indicate an acronym. See @acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}.
@indicateurl{uniform-resource-locator}
Indicate an example (that is, nonfunctional) uniform resource locator.
See @indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator}. (Use @url
(see @url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
) for
live URLs.)
@email{email-address[, displayed-text]}
Indicate an electronic mail address. See @email
{email-address[, displayed-text]}.
@code
{sample-code} ¶Use the @code
command to indicate text that is a piece of a
program and which consists of entire syntactic tokens. Enclose the
text in braces.
Thus, you should use @code
for an expression in a program, for
the name of a variable or function used in a program, or for a
keyword in a programming language.
Use @code
for command names in languages that resemble
programming languages, such as Texinfo. For example, @code
and
@samp
are produced by writing ‘@code{@@code}’ and
‘@code{@@samp}’ in the Texinfo source, respectively.
It is incorrect to alter the case of a word inside a @code
command when it appears at the beginning of a sentence. Most computer
languages are case sensitive. In C, for example, Printf
is
different from the identifier printf
, and most likely is a
misspelling of it. Even in languages which are not case sensitive, it
is confusing to a human reader to see identifiers spelled in different
ways. Pick one spelling and always use that. If you do not want to
start a sentence with a command name written all in lowercase, you
should rearrange the sentence.
The @code
argument is typeset in a typewriter (monospace) font.
where the output format allows this. For example,
The function returns @code{nil}.
produces this:
The function returns
nil
.
Here are some cases for which it is preferable not to use @code
:
ls
(use @command
).
TEXINPUTS
(use @env
).
@option
).
@samp
rather than @code
. In this case, the rule is to
choose the more pleasing format.
goto-char
Emacs Lisp function, you should use
@samp
.
@code
when you are explaining what letters
or printable symbols can be used in the names of functions. (Use
@samp
.) Also, you should not use @code
to mark text
that is considered input to programs unless the input is written in a
language that is like a programming language. For example, you should
not use @code
for the keystroke commands of GNU Emacs (use
@kbd
instead) although you may use @code
for the names
of the Emacs Lisp functions that the keystroke commands invoke.
By default, TeX will consider breaking lines at ‘-’ and
‘_’ characters within @code
and related commands. This
can be controlled with @allowcodebreaks
(see @allowcodebreaks
: Control Line Breaks in @code
). In the HTML output breaking
lines is up to the browser’s behavior. For Info, it seems better
never to make such breaks.
For Info and plaintext, quotation characters are usually output around
the output of the @code
command and related commands
(e.g., @kbd
, @command
) except
in typewriter-like contexts such as the @example
environment
(see @example
: Example Text) and @code
itself, etc.
To control which quoting characters are inserted by
texi2any
in the output of ‘@code’, etc., see the
OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL
and CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL
customization
variables (see Other Customization Variables).
@kbd
{keyboard-characters} ¶Use the @kbd
command for characters of input to be typed by
users. For example, to refer to the characters M-a, write:
@kbd{M-a}
and to refer to the characters M-x shell, write:
@kbd{M-x shell}
By default, the @kbd
command produces a different font (slanted
typewriter instead of normal typewriter, where the output format allows),
so users can distinguish the characters that they are supposed
to type from those that the computer outputs.
Since the usage of @kbd
varies from manual to manual, you can
control the font switching with the @kbdinputstyle
command.
This command has no effect on Info output. Write this command at the
beginning of a line with a single word as an argument, one of the
following:
Always use the same font for @kbd
as @code
.
Use the distinguishing font for @kbd
only in @example
and similar environments.
(the default) Always use the distinguishing font for @kbd
.
You can embed another @-command inside the braces of a @kbd
command. Here, for example, is the way to describe a command that
would be described more verbosely as “press the ‘r’ key and then
press the RETURN key”:
@kbd{r @key{RET}}
This produces: r RET. (The present manual uses the
default for @kbdinputstyle
.)
You also use the @kbd
command if you are spelling out the letters
you type; for example:
To give the @code{logout} command, type the characters @kbd{l o g o u t @key{RET}}.
This produces:
To give the
logout
command, type the characters l o g o u t RET.
(Also, this example shows that you can add spaces for clarity. If you explicitly want to mention a space character as one of the characters of input, write @key{SPC} for it.)
@key
{key-name} ¶Use the @key
command for the conventional name for a key on a
keyboard, as in:
@key{RET}
You can use the @key
command within the argument of an
@kbd
command when the sequence of characters to be typed
includes one or more keys that are described by name.
For example, to produce C-x ESC and M-TAB you would type:
@kbd{C-x @key{ESC}} @kbd{M-@key{TAB}}
Here is a list of the recommended names for keys:
SPC
Space
RET
Return
LFD
Linefeed (however, since most keyboards nowadays do not have a Linefeed key, it might be better to call this character C-j)
TAB
Tab
BS
Backspace
ESC
Escape
DELETE
Delete
SHIFT
Shift
CTRL
Control
META
Meta
There are subtleties to handling words like ‘meta’ or ‘ctrl’ that are
names of modifier keys. When mentioning a character in which the
modifier key is used, such as Meta-a, use the @kbd
command
alone; do not use the @key
command; but when you are referring
to the modifier key in isolation, use the @key
command. For
example, write ‘@kbd{Meta-a}’ to produce Meta-a and
‘@key{META}’ to produce META.
@samp
{text} ¶Use the @samp
command to indicate text that is a literal example
or ‘sample’ of a sequence of characters in a file, string, pattern, etc.
Enclose the text in braces. The argument appears within single
quotation marks; in addition, it is printed in a fixed-width font.
To match @samp{foo} at the end of the line, use the regexp @samp{foo$}.
produces
To match ‘foo’ at the end of the line, use the regexp ‘foo$’.
Any time you are referring to single characters, you should use
@samp
unless @kbd
or @key
is more appropriate.
Also, you may use @samp
for entire statements in C and for entire
shell commands—in this case, @samp
often looks better than
@code
. Basically, @samp
is a catchall for whatever is
not covered by @code
, @kbd
, @key
,
@command
, etc.
Only include punctuation marks within braces if they are part of the string you are specifying. Write punctuation marks outside the braces if those punctuation marks are part of the English text that surrounds the string. In the following sentence, for example, the commas and period are outside of the braces:
In English, the vowels are @samp{a}, @samp{e}, @samp{i}, @samp{o}, @samp{u}, and sometimes @samp{y}.
This produces:
In English, the vowels are ‘a’, ‘e’, ‘i’, ‘o’, ‘u’, and sometimes ‘y’.
@verb
{chartextchar} ¶Use the @verb
command to print a verbatim sequence of
characters.
Like LaTeX’s \verb
command, the verbatim text can be quoted using
any unique delimiter character. Enclose the verbatim text, including the
delimiters, in braces. Text is printed in a fixed-width font:
How many @verb{|@|}-escapes does one need to print this @verb{.@a @b.@c.} string or @verb{+@'e?`{}!`\+} this?
produces
How many@
-escapes does one need to print this@a @b.@c
string or@'e?`{}!`\
this?
This is in contrast to @samp
(see the previous section),
@code
, and similar commands; in those cases, the argument is
normal Texinfo text, where the three characters @{}
are
special, as usual. With @verb
, nothing is special except the
delimiter character you choose.
The delimiter character itself may appear inside the verbatim text, as shown above. As another example, ‘@verb{...}’ prints a single (fixed-width) period.
It is not reliable to use @verb
inside other Texinfo
constructs. In particular, it does not work to use @verb
in
anything related to cross-referencing, such as section titles or
figure captions.
@var
{metasyntactic-variable} ¶Use the @var
command to indicate metasyntactic variables. A
metasyntactic variable is something that stands for another
piece of text. For example, you should use a metasyntactic variable
in the documentation of a function to describe the arguments that are
passed to that function.
Do not use @var
for the names of normal variables in computer
programs. These are specific names, so @code
is correct for
them. For example, the Emacs Lisp variable texinfo-tex-command
is not a metasyntactic variable; it is properly formatted using @code
.
Do not use @var
for environment variables either; @env
is correct for them (see the next section).
The effect of @var
in the Info file is to change the case of
the argument to all uppercase. In the printed manual, the argument
is output in slanted type.
4
For example,
To delete file @var{filename}, type @samp{rm @var{filename}}.
produces
To delete file filename, type ‘rm filename’.
(Note that @var
may appear inside @code
,
@samp
, @file
, etc.)
Write a metasyntactic variable all in lowercase without spaces, and use hyphens to make it more readable. Thus, the Texinfo source for the illustration of how to begin a Texinfo manual looks like this:
\input texinfo @@settitle @var{name-of-manual}
This produces:
\input texinfo @settitle name-of-manual
In some documentation styles, metasyntactic variables are shown with angle brackets, for example:
..., type rm <filename>
However, that is not the style that Texinfo uses.
@env
{environment-variable} ¶Use the @env
command to indicate environment variables, as
used by many operating systems, including GNU. Do not use it for
metasyntactic variables; use @var
for those (see the
previous section).
@env
is equivalent to @code
in its effects.
For example:
The @env{PATH} environment variable ...
produces
The
PATH
environment variable …
@file
{file-name} ¶Use the @file
command to indicate text that is the name of a
file, buffer, or directory, or is the name of a node in Info. You can
also use the command for file name suffixes. Do not use @file
for symbols in a programming language; use @code
.
@file
is equivalent to code
in its effects. For
example,
The @file{.el} files are in the @file{/usr/local/emacs/lisp} directory.
produces
The .el files are in the /usr/local/emacs/lisp directory.
@command
{command-name} ¶Use the @command
command to indicate command names, such as
ls
or cc
.
@command
is equivalent to @code
in its effects.
For example:
The command @command{ls} lists directory contents.
produces
The command
ls
lists directory contents.
You should write the name of a program in the ordinary text font, rather
than using @command
, if you regard it as a new English word,
such as ‘Emacs’ or ‘Bison’.
When writing an entire shell command invocation, as in ‘ls -l’,
you should use either @samp
or @code
at your discretion.
@option
{option-name} ¶Use the @option
command to indicate a command-line option; for
example, -l or --version or
--output=filename.
@option
is equivalent to @code
in its effects.
For example:
The option @option{-l} produces a long listing.
produces
The option -l produces a long listing.
@dfn
{term} ¶Use the @dfn
command to identify the introductory or defining
use of a technical term. Use the command only in passages whose
purpose is to introduce a term which will be used again or which the
reader ought to know. Mere passing mention of a term for the first
time does not deserve @dfn
. The command selects a slanted font
in the printed manual, and generates double quotation marks in the Info
file. For example:
Getting rid of a file is called @dfn{deleting} it.
produces
Getting rid of a file is called deleting it.
As a general rule, a sentence containing the defining occurrence of a term should be a definition of the term. The sentence does not need to say explicitly that it is a definition, but it should contain the information of a definition—it should make the meaning clear.
@abbr
{abbreviation[, meaning]} ¶You can use the @abbr
command for general abbreviations. The
abbreviation is given as the single argument in braces, as in
‘@abbr{Comput.}’. As a matter of style, or for particular
abbreviations, you may prefer to omit periods, as in
‘@abbr{Mr} Stallman’.
@abbr
accepts an optional second argument, intended to be used
for the meaning of the abbreviation.
If the abbreviation ends with a lowercase letter and a period, and is
not at the end of a sentence, and has no second argument, remember to
use the @.
command (see Ending a Sentence) to get the
correct spacing. However, you do not have to use @.
within
the abbreviation itself; Texinfo automatically assumes periods within
the abbreviation do not end a sentence.
In output formats with an appropriate tag, such as HTML and DocBook, this tag is used. Otherwise, the first argument is printed as-is; if the second argument is present, it is printed in parentheses after the abbreviation. For instance:
@abbr{Comput. J., Computer Journal}
produces:
Comput. J. (Computer Journal)
For abbreviations consisting of all capital letters, you may prefer to
use the @acronym
command instead. See the next section for
more on the usage of these two commands.
@acronym
{acronym[, meaning]} ¶You can use the @acronym
command for abbreviations written in
all capital letters, such as ‘NASA’. The abbreviation is
given as the single argument in braces, as in
‘@acronym{NASA}’. As a matter of style, or for particular
acronyms, you may prefer to use periods, as in
‘@acronym{N.A.S.A.}’.
@acronym
accepts an optional second argument, intended to be
used for the meaning of the acronym.
If the acronym is at the end of a sentence, and if there is no second
argument, remember to use the @.
or similar command
(see Ending a Sentence) to get the correct spacing.
In TeX, the acronym is printed in slightly smaller font. In the Info output, the argument is printed as-is. In either format, and in LaTeX output, if the second argument is present, it is printed in parentheses after the acronym. In HTML and DocBook the appropriate tag is used.
For instance (since GNU is a recursive acronym, we use
@acronym
recursively):
@acronym{GNU, @acronym{GNU}'s Not Unix}
produces:
GNU (GNU’s Not Unix)
In some circumstances, it is conventional to print family names in all
capitals. Don’t use @acronym
for this, since a name is not an
acronym. Use @sc
instead (see @sc
{text}: The Small Caps Font).
@abbr
and @acronym
are closely related commands: they
both signal to the reader that a shortened form is being used, and
possibly give a meaning. When choosing whether to use these two
commands, please bear the following in mind.
@acronym
for all sequences of uppercase
letters. Furthermore, it looks strange for some acronyms to be in the
normal font size and others to be smaller. Thus, a simpler approach
you may wish to consider is to avoid @acronym
and just typeset
everything as normal text in all capitals: ‘GNU’, producing the
output ‘GNU’.
@indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator} ¶Use the @indicateurl
command to indicate a uniform resource
locator on the World Wide Web. This is purely for markup purposes and
does not produce a link you can follow (use the @url
or
@uref
command for that, see @url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
).
@indicateurl
is useful for URLs which do not actually exist.
For example:
For example, the URL might be @indicateurl{http://example.org/path}.
which produces:
For example, the URL might be ‘http://example.org/path
’.
The output from @indicateurl
is usually like that of
@samp
(see @samp
{text}).
@email
{email-address[, displayed-text]} ¶Use the @email
command to indicate an electronic mail address.
It takes one mandatory argument, the address, and one optional argument, the
text to display (the default is the address itself).
In Info, the address is shown in angle brackets, preceded by the text
to display if any. In printed output, the angle brackets are omitted. In
HTML and DocBook output, @email
produces a ‘mailto’ link.
In HTML, a ‘mailto’ link usually brings up a mail composition window.
For example:
Send bug reports to @email{bug-texinfo@@gnu.org}, suggestions to the @email{bug-texinfo@@gnu.org, same place}.
produces
Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org, suggestions to the same place.
Usually, Texinfo changes the font to mark words in the text according
to the category the words belong to; an example is the @code
command. Most often, this is the best way to mark words. However,
sometimes you will want to emphasize text without indicating a
category. Texinfo has two commands to do this. Also, Texinfo has
several commands that specify the font in which text will be output.
These commands have no effect in Info and only one of them, the
@r
command, has any regular use.
@emph
{text} and @strong
{text} ¶The @emph
and @strong
commands are for emphasis;
@strong
is stronger. In printed output, @emph
produces
italics and @strong
produces bold.
In the Info output, @emph
surrounds the text with underscores
(‘_’), and @strong
puts asterisks around the text.
For example,
@strong{Caution:} @samp{rm * .[^.]*} removes @emph{all} files in the directory.
produces the following:
Caution: ‘rm * .[^.]*’ removes all files in the directory.
The @strong
command is seldom used except to mark what is, in
effect, a typographical element, such as the word ‘Caution’ in the
preceding example.
Caution: Do not use
@strong
with the word ‘Note’ followed by a space; Info will mistake the combination for a cross-reference. Use a phrase such as Please notice or Caution instead, or the optional argument to@quotation
—‘Note’ is allowable there.
@sc
{text}: The Small Caps Font ¶Use the ‘@sc’ command to set text in A SMALL CAPS FONT (where possible). Write the text you want to be in small caps between braces in lowercase, like this:
Richard @sc{Stallman} a commencé le projet GNU.
This produces:
Richard STALLMAN a commencé le projet GNU.
As shown here, we recommend reserving @sc
for special cases
where you want typographic small caps; family names are one such,
especially in languages other than English, though there are no
hard-and-fast rules about such things.
TeX typesets any uppercase letters between the braces of an
@sc
command in full-size capitals; only lowercase letters are
printed in the small caps font. In the Info output, the argument to
@sc
is printed in all uppercase. In HTML, the argument is
uppercased and the output marked with the <small>
tag to reduce
the font size, since HTML cannot easily represent true small caps.
In LaTeX, a command setting small caps fonts is output.
Overall, we recommend using standard upper- and lowercase letters wherever possible.
Texinfo provides one command to change the size of the main body font
in printed output for a document: @fonttextsize
. It has no
effect in other output. It takes a single argument on the remainder
of the line, which must be either ‘10’ or ‘11’. For
example:
@fonttextsize 10
The effect is to reduce the body font to a 10pt size (the
default is 11pt). Fonts for other elements, such as sections
and chapters, are reduced accordingly. This should only be used in
conjunction with @smallbook
(see @smallbook
: Printing “Small” Books) or
similar, since 10pt fonts on standard paper (8.5x11 or A4) are
too small. One reason to use this command is to save pages, and hence
printing cost, for physical books.
Texinfo does not at present have commands to switch the font family to use, or more general size-changing commands.
Texinfo also provides a number of font commands that specify font changes in the printed manual and (where possible) in the HTML and DocBook output. They have no effect in Info. All the commands apply to a following argument surrounded by braces.
@b
¶selects bold face;
@i
¶selects an italic font;
@r
¶selects a roman font, which is the usual font in which text is printed. It may or may not be seriffed.
@sansserif
¶selects a sans serif font;
@slanted
¶selects a slanted font;
@t
¶selects the fixed-width
, typewriter-style font used by @code
;
The @r
command can be useful in example-like environments, to
write comments in the standard roman font instead of the fixed-width
font. This looks better in printed output.
For example,
@lisp (+ 2 2) ; @r{Add two plus two.} @end lisp
produces
(+ 2 2) ; Add two plus two.
The @t
command can occasionally be useful for producing output in
a typewriter font where that is supported, but no distinction with
quotation marks is needed in Info or plain text. (Compare @t{foo}
producing foo
with @code{foo}
producing foo
.) Here
are some possible reasons for using @t
instead of @code
:
In general, the other font commands are unlikely to be useful; they exist primarily to make it possible to document the functionality of specific font effects, such as in TeX and related packages.
Quotations and examples are blocks of text consisting of one or more whole paragraphs that are set off from the bulk of the text and treated differently. They are usually indented in the output.
In Texinfo, you always begin a quotation or example by writing an
@-command at the beginning of a line by itself, and end it by writing
an @end
command that is also at the beginning of a line by
itself. For instance, you begin an example by writing
@example
by itself at the beginning of a line and end the
example by writing @end example
on a line by itself, at the
beginning of that line, and with only one space between the
@end
and the example
.
@quotation
: Block Quotations@indentedblock
: Indented text blocks@example
: Example Text@verbatim
: Literal Text@lisp
: Marking a Lisp Example@display
: Examples Using the Text Font@format
: Examples Using the Full Line Width@exdent
: Undoing a Line’s Indentation@flushleft
and @flushright
@raggedright
: Ragged Right Text@noindent
: Omitting Indentation@indent
: Forcing Indentation@cartouche
: Rounded Rectangles@small…
Block CommandsHere is a summary of commands that enclose blocks of text, also known as environments. They’re explained further in the following sections.
@quotation
Indicate text that is quoted. The text is filled, indented (from both margins), and printed in a roman font by default.
@indentedblock
Like @quotation
, but the text is indented only on the left.
@example
Illustrate code, commands, and the like. The text is printed in a fixed-width font, and indented but not filled.
@lisp
Like @example
, but specifically for illustrating Lisp code. The
text is printed in a fixed-width font, and indented but not filled.
@verbatim
Mark a piece of text that is to be printed verbatim; no character
substitutions are made and all commands are ignored, until the next
@end verbatim
. The text is printed in a fixed-width font,
and not indented or filled. Extra spaces and blank lines are
significant, and tabs are expanded.
@display
Display illustrative text. The text is indented but not filled, and no font is selected (so, by default, the font is roman).
@format
Like @display
(the text is not filled and no font is
selected), but the text is not indented.
@smallquotation
@smallindentedblock
@smallexample
@smalllisp
@smalldisplay
@smallformat
These @small...
commands are just like their non-small
counterparts, except that they output text in a smaller font size,
where possible.
@flushleft
@flushright
Text is not filled, but is set flush with the left or right margin, respectively.
@raggedright
Text is filled, but only justified on the left, leaving the right margin ragged.
@cartouche
Highlight text, often an example or quotation, by drawing a box with rounded corners around it.
The @exdent
command is used within the above constructs to
undo the indentation of a line.
The @noindent
command may be used after one of the above
constructs (or at the beginning of any paragraph) to prevent the
following text from being indented as a new paragraph.
@quotation
: Block Quotations ¶The text of a quotation is processed like normal text (regular font, text is filled) except that:
@author
command may be given to specify the author of the
quotation.
This is an example of text written between a
@quotation
command and an@end quotation
command. A@quotation
command is most often used to indicate text that is excerpted from another (real or hypothetical) printed work.
Write a @quotation
command as text on a line by itself. This
line will disappear from the output. Mark the end of the quotation
with a line beginning with and containing only @end quotation
.
The @end quotation
line will likewise disappear from the
output.
@quotation
takes one optional argument, given on the remainder
of the line. This text, if present, is included at the beginning of
the quotation in bold or otherwise emphasized, and followed with a
‘:’. For example:
@quotation Note This is a foo. @end quotation
produces
Note: This is a foo.
If the @quotation
argument is one of these English words
(case-insensitive):
Caution Important Note Tip Warning
then the DocBook output uses corresponding special tags
(<note>
, etc.) instead of the default <blockquote>
.
If the author of the quotation is specified in the @quotation
block with the @author
command, a line with the author name is
displayed after the quotation:
@quotation People sometimes ask me if it is a sin in the Church of Emacs to use vi. Using a free version of vi is not a sin; it is a penance. So happy hacking. @author Richard Stallman @end quotation
produces
People sometimes ask me if it is a sin in the Church of Emacs to use vi. Using a free version of vi is not a sin; it is a penance. So happy hacking.
@indentedblock
: Indented text blocks ¶The @indentedblock
environment is similar to
@quotation
, except that text is only indented on the left (and
there is no optional argument for an author). Thus, the text font
remains unchanged, and text is gathered and filled as usual, but the
left margin is increased. For example:
This is an example of text written between an
@indentedblock
command and an@end indentedblock
command. The@indentedblock
environment can contain any text or other commands desired.
This is written in the Texinfo source as:
@indentedblock This is an example ... @end indentedblock
@example
: Example Text ¶The @example
environment is used to indicate
computer input or output that is not part of the running text. If you
want to embed code fragments within sentences, use the @code
command or its relatives instead (see @code
{sample-code}).
Write an @example
command at the beginning of a line by
itself. Mark the end of the block with @end example
.
For example,
@example cp foo @var{dest1}; \ cp foo @var{dest2} @end example
produces
cp foo dest1; \ cp foo dest2
The output uses a fixed-width font and is indented. Each line
in the input file is a line in the output; that is, the source
text is not filled. Extra spaces and blank lines are significant.
Texinfo commands are expanded; if you want the output to be
the input verbatim, use the @verbatim
environment instead
(see @verbatim
: Literal Text).
Examples are often, logically speaking, “in the middle” of a
paragraph, and the text that continues afterwards should not be
indented, as in the example above. The @noindent
command
prevents a piece of text from being indented as if it were a new
paragraph (see @noindent
: Omitting Indentation).
If you wish to use the normal roman font for a code comment, you can
use the @r
command (see Fonts for Printing).
You may optionally give arguments to the @example
command,
separated by commas if there is more than one. In the HTML output,
any such arguments are output as class names, prefixed by the string
‘user-’. This may be useful for adding syntax highlighting to
manuals for code samples.
We recommend that when you give multiple arguments to @example
, you
use the first argument to specify the language of the code (e.g.
‘C’, ‘lisp’, ‘Cplusplus’). You may find uses for other
arguments, such as providing a formatting hint or marking code samples
for extraction and further processing, but for now nothing definitive
is recommended. Perhaps this will change in future Texinfo releases.
Caution: Do not use tabs in the lines of an example! (Or anywhere else in Texinfo, except in verbatim environments.) TeX treats tabs as single spaces, and that is not what they look like.
@verbatim
: Literal Text ¶Use the @verbatim
environment for printing of text that may
contain special characters or commands that should not be interpreted,
such as computer input or output (@example
interprets its text
as regular Texinfo commands). This is especially useful for including automatically
generated files in a Texinfo manual.
In general, the output will be just the same as the input. No character substitutions are made, e.g., all spaces and blank lines are significant, including tabs. The text is typeset in a fixed-width font, and not indented or filled.
Write a @verbatim
command at the beginning of a line by
itself. This line will disappear from the output. Mark the end of
the verbatim block with an @end verbatim
command, also written
at the beginning of a line by itself. The @end verbatim
will
also disappear from the output.
For example:
@verbatim { <tab>@command with strange characters: @'e expand<tab>me } @end verbatim
(where <tab> stands for a literal tab character). This produces:
{ @command with strange characters: @'e expand me }
Since the lines containing @verbatim
and @end verbatim
produce no output, typically you should put a blank line before the
@verbatim
and another blank line after the @end
verbatim
. Blank lines between the beginning @verbatim
and
the ending @end verbatim
will appear in the output.
You can get a “small” verbatim by enclosing the @verbatim
in
an @smallformat
environment, as shown here:
@smallformat @verbatim ... still verbatim, but in a smaller font ... @end verbatim @end smallformat
Finally, a word of warning: it is not reliable to use
@verbatim
inside other Texinfo constructs.
See also @verbatiminclude
file: Include a File Verbatim.
@lisp
: Marking a Lisp Example ¶The @lisp
command was used for Lisp code:
@lisp Example lisp code @end lisp
This is now synonymous with the following:
@example lisp Example lisp code @end example
Use @lisp
to preserve information regarding the nature of
the example. This is useful, for example, if you write a function
that evaluates only and all the Lisp code in a Texinfo file. Then you
can use the Texinfo file as a Lisp library.
@display
: Examples Using the Text Font ¶The @display
command begins another kind of environment, where
the font is left unchanged, not switched to typewriter as with
@example
. Each line of input still produces a line of output,
and the output is still indented.
This is an example of text written between a@display
command and an@end display
command. The@display
command indents the text, but does not fill it.
@format
: Examples Using the Full Line Width ¶The @format
command is similar to @display
, except it
leaves the text unindented. Like @display
, it does not select
the fixed-width font. Thus,
@format This is an example of text written between a @code{@@format} command and an @code{@@end format} command. As you can see from this example, the @code{@@format} command does not fill the text. @end format
produces
This is an example of text written between a@format
command and an@end format
command. As you can see from this example, the@format
command does not fill the text.
@exdent
: Undoing a Line’s Indentation ¶The @exdent
command removes any indentation a line might have.
The command is written at the beginning of a line and applies only to
the text that follows the command that is on the same line. Do not use
braces around the text. The text on an @exdent
line is also
printed in the roman font where the output format allows this.
@exdent
is usually used within examples. Thus,
@example This line follows an @@example command. @exdent This line is exdented. This line follows the exdented line. The @@end example comes on the next line. @end example
produces
This line follows an @example command.
This line is exdented.
This line follows the exdented line. The @end example comes on the next line.
In practice, the @exdent
command is rarely used. Usually, you
un-indent text by ending the example and returning the page to its
normal width.
@exdent
does not have an effect in all output formats.
@flushleft
and @flushright
¶The @flushleft
and @flushright
commands line up the
ends of lines on the left and right margins of a page,
but do not fill the text. The commands are written on lines of their
own, without braces. The @flushleft
and @flushright
commands are ended by @end flushleft
and @end
flushright
commands on lines of their own.
For example,
@flushleft This text is written flushleft. @end flushleft
produces
This text is written flushleft.
@flushright
produces the type of indentation often used in the
return address of letters. For example,
@flushright Here is an example of text written flushright. The @code{@flushright} command right justifies every line but leaves the left end ragged. @end flushright
produces
Here is an example of text written
flushright. The @flushright
command
right justifies every line but leaves the
left end ragged.
@raggedright
: Ragged Right Text ¶The @raggedright
fills text as usual, but the text is only
justified on the left; the right margin is ragged. The command is
written on a line of its own, without braces. The
@raggedright
command is ended by @end raggedright
on a
line of its own. This command only has an effect in output
formats where text is justified on the left, but
not in output formats where text is always set ragged right, such as
Info or HTML.
The @raggedright
command can be useful with paragraphs
containing lists of commands with long names, when it is known in
advance that justifying the text on both margins will make the
paragraph look bad.
An example (from elsewhere in this manual):
@raggedright Commands for double and single angle quotation marks: @code{@@guillemetleft@{@}}, @code{@@guillemetright@{@}}, @code{@@guillemotleft@{@}}, @code{@@guillemotright@{@}}, @code{@@guilsinglleft@{@}}, @code{@@guilsinglright@{@}}. @end raggedright
produces
Commands for double and single angle quotation marks:
@guillemetleft{}
, @guillemetright{}
,
@guillemotleft{}
, @guillemotright{}
,
@guilsinglleft{}
, @guilsinglright{}
.
@noindent
: Omitting Indentation ¶An example or other inclusion can break a paragraph into segments.
Ordinarily, the formatters indent text that follows an example as a new
paragraph. You can prevent this on a case-by-case basis by writing
@noindent
at the beginning of a line, preceding the continuation
text. You can also disable indentation for all paragraphs globally with
@paragraphindent
(see @paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation).
Here is an example showing how to eliminate the normal indentation of
the text after an @example
, a common situation:
@example This is an example @end example @noindent This line is not indented. As you can see, the beginning of the line is fully flush left with the line that follows after it.
produces:
This is an example
This line is not indented. As you can see, the beginning of the line is fully flush left with the line that follows after it.
The standard usage of @noindent
is just as above: at the
beginning of what would otherwise be a paragraph, to eliminate the
indentation that normally happens there. It can either be followed by
text or be on a line by itself. There is no reason to use it
in other contexts, such as in the middle of a paragraph or inside an
environment (see Quotations and Examples).
You can control the number of blank lines in the Info file output by
adjusting the input as desired: a line containing just
@noindent
does not generate a blank line, and neither does an
@end
line for an environment.
Do not put braces after a @noindent
command; they are not
used, since @noindent
is a command used outside of paragraphs
(see @-Command Syntax).
@indent
: Forcing Indentation ¶To complement the @noindent
command (see the previous
section), Texinfo provides the @indent
command to force a
paragraph to be indented. For instance, this paragraph (the first in
this section) is indented using an @indent
command.
And indeed, the first paragraph of a section is the most likely place
to use @indent
, to override the normal behavior of no
indentation there (see @paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation). It can either be
followed by text or be on a line by itself.
As a special case, when @indent
is used in an environment
where text is not filled, it produces a paragraph indentation space in
the TeX output. (These environments are where a line of input
produces a line of output, such as @example
and
@display
; for a summary of all environments, see Block Enclosing Commands.)
Do not put braces after an @indent
command; they are not used,
since @indent
is a command used outside of paragraphs
(see @-Command Syntax).
@cartouche
: Rounded Rectangles ¶Where the output format allows, the @cartouche
command draws a box
with rounded corners around its contents. In HTML, a normal rectangle is
drawn. You can use this command to isolate a portion of the manual from the
main flow. You can also further highlight an example or quotation
with @cartouche
.
For instance, you could write a manual in which one type of example is surrounded by a cartouche for emphasis. For example,
@cartouche @example % pwd /usr/local/share/emacs @end example @end cartouche
surrounds the two-line example with a box with rounded corners, in the printed manual.
The output from the example looks like this (if you’re reading this in
Info, you’ll see the @cartouche
had no effect):
% pwd /usr/local/share/emacs |
@cartouche
takes one optional argument, given on the remainder
of the line. This text, if present, is the cartouche title. It is
output in bold or otherwise emphasized at the beginning of the cartouche,
and is centered in some output formats.
The following example illustrates a cartouche with a title:
@cartouche Important Text explaining something important out of the main flow of the text. @end cartouche
The cartouche with a title looks like this:
Important |
---|
Text explaining something important out of the main flow of the text. |
A cartouche is output on a single page in printed output, similarly to
@group
(see @group
: Prevent Page Breaks).
@small…
Block Commands ¶In addition to the regular @example
and similar commands,
Texinfo has “small” example-style commands. These are
@smallquotation
, @smallindentedblock
,
@smalldisplay
, @smallexample
, @smallformat
,
and @smalllisp
.
In most output formats, the @small…
commands are
equivalent to their non-small companion commands.
In printed output, however, the @small…
commands typeset text in
a smaller font than the non-small example commands. Thus, for
instance, code examples can contain longer lines and still fit on a
page without needing to be rewritten.
Mark the end of a @small…
block with a corresponding
@end small…
. For example, pair @smallexample
with
@end smallexample
.
Here is an example of the font used by the @smallexample
command (in most output formats, the output will be the same as usual):
... to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
The @small…
commands use the same font style as their
normal counterparts: @smallexample
and @smalllisp
use
a fixed-width font, and everything else uses the regular font.
They also have the same behavior in other respects—whether filling
is done and whether margins are narrowed.
As a general rule, it’s better to just use the regular
commands (such as @example
instead of @smallexample
),
unless you have a good reason for it.
Texinfo has several ways of making lists and tables. Lists can be bulleted or numbered; two-column tables can highlight the items in the first column; multi-column tables are also supported.
@itemize
: Making an Itemized List@enumerate
: Making a Numbered or Lettered List@multitable
: Multi-column TablesTexinfo automatically indents the text in lists or tables, and numbers an enumerated list. This last feature is useful if you modify the list, since you do not need to renumber it yourself.
Numbered lists and tables begin with the appropriate @-command at the
beginning of a line, and end with the corresponding @end
command on a line by itself. The table and itemized-list commands
also require that you write formatting information on the same line as
the beginning @-command.
Begin an enumerated list, for example, with an @enumerate
command and end the list with an @end enumerate
command.
Begin an itemized list with an @itemize
command, followed on
the same line by a formatting command such as @bullet
, and end
the list with an @end itemize
command.
Precede each element of a list with an @item
or @itemx
command.
Here is an itemized list of the different kinds of table and lists:
Here is an enumerated list with the same items:
And here is a two-column table with the same items and their @-commands:
@itemize
Itemized lists with and without bullets.
@enumerate
Enumerated lists, using numbers or letters.
@table
@ftable
@vtable
Two-column tables, optionally with indexing.
@itemize
: Making an Itemized List ¶The @itemize
command produces a sequence of “items”, each
starting with a bullet or other mark inside the left margin, and
generally indented.
Begin an itemized list by writing @itemize
at the beginning of
a line. Follow the command, on the same line, with a character or a
Texinfo command that generates a mark. Usually, you will use
@bullet
after @itemize
, but you can use
@minus
, or any command or character that results in a single
character in the Info file. (When you write the mark command such as
@bullet
after an @itemize
command, you may omit the
‘{}’.) If you don’t specify a mark command, the default is
@bullet
. If you don’t want any mark at all, but still want
logical items, use @w{}
(in this case the braces are
required).
After the @itemize
, write your items, each starting with
@item
. Text can follow on the same line as the @item
.
The text of an item can continue for more than one paragraph.
There should be at least one @item
inside the @itemize
environment. If none are present, texi2any
gives a warning.
If you just want indented text and not a list of items, use
@indentedblock
; see @indentedblock
: Indented text blocks.
Index entries and comments that are given before an @item
including the first, are automatically moved (internally) to after the
@item
, so the output is as expected. Historically this has
been a common practice.
Usually, you should put a blank line between items. This puts a blank line in the Info file. (TeX inserts the proper vertical space in any case.) Except when the entries are very brief, these blank lines make the list look better.
Here is an example of the use of @itemize
, followed by the
output it produces. @bullet
produces an ‘*’ in Info and
a round dot in other output formats.
@itemize @bullet @item Some text for foo. @item Some text for bar. @end itemize
This produces:
- Some text for foo.
- Some text for bar.
Itemized lists may be embedded within other itemized lists. Here is a list marked with dashes embedded in a list marked with bullets:
@itemize @bullet @item First item. @itemize @minus @item Inner item. @item Second inner item. @end itemize @item Second outer item. @end itemize
This produces:
- First item.
- Inner item.
- Second inner item.
- Second outer item.
@enumerate
: Making a Numbered or Lettered List ¶@enumerate
is like @itemize
(see @itemize
: Making an Itemized List),
except that the labels on the items are successive integers or letters
instead of bullets.
Write the @enumerate
command at the beginning of a line. The
command does not require an argument, but accepts either a number or a
letter as an option. Without an argument, @enumerate
starts the
list with the number ‘1’. With a numeric argument, such as
‘3’, the command starts the list with that number. With an upper-
or lowercase letter, such as ‘a’ or ‘A’, the command starts
the list with that letter.
Write the text of the enumerated list in the same way as an itemized
list: write a line starting with @item
at the beginning of
each item in the enumeration. It is ok to have text following the
@item
, and the text for an item can continue for several
paragraphs.
You should put a blank line between entries in the list. This generally makes it easier to read the Info file.
Here is an example of @enumerate
without an argument:
@enumerate @item Underlying causes. @item Proximate causes. @end enumerate
This produces:
Here is an example with an argument of 3:
@enumerate 3 @item Predisposing causes. @item Precipitating causes. @item Perpetuating causes. @end enumerate
This produces:
Here is a summary:
@enumerate
Without an argument, produce a numbered list, with the first item numbered 1.
@enumerate unsigned-integer
With an (unsigned) numeric argument, start a numbered list with that number. You can use this to continue a list that you interrupted with other text.
@enumerate upper-case-letter
With an uppercase letter as argument, start a list in which each item is marked by a letter, beginning with that uppercase letter.
@enumerate lower-case-letter
With a lowercase letter as argument, start a list in which each item is marked by a letter, beginning with that lowercase letter.
You can also nest enumerated lists, as in an outline.
@table
is similar to @itemize
(see @itemize
: Making an Itemized List), but allows you to specify a name or
heading line for each item. The @table
command is used to
produce two-column tables, and is especially useful for glossaries,
explanatory exhibits, and command-line option summaries.
@table
Command ¶Use the @table
command to produce a two-column table. This
command is typically used when you have a list of items and a brief text
with each one, such as a list of definitions.
Write the @table
command at the beginning of a line, after a
blank line, and follow it on the same line with an argument that is an
‘indicating’ command, such as @code
, @samp
,
@var
, @option
, or @kbd
(see Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.).
This command will be applied to the text in the first column. For
example, @table @code
will cause the text in the first column
to be output as if it had been the argument to a @code
command.
You may use the @asis
command as an argument to
@table
. @asis
is a command that does nothing: if you
use this command after @table
, the first column entries are
output without added highlighting (“as is”).
The @table
command works with other commands besides those
explicitly mentioned here. However, you can only use predefined
Texinfo commands that take an argument in braces. You cannot
reliably use a new command defined with @macro
, although an
@alias
(for a suitable predefined command) is acceptable.
See Defining New Texinfo Commands.
Begin each table entry with an @item
command at the beginning
of a line. Write the text for the first column on the same line as the
@item
command. Write the text for the second column on the line
following the @item
line and on subsequent lines. You may
write as many lines of supporting text as you wish, even several
paragraphs. But only the text on the same line as the @item
will be placed in the first column (including any footnotes).
You do not need to type anything for an empty second column.
Normally, you should put a blank line between table entries. This puts a blank line in the Info file, which looks better unless the entries are very brief.
End the table with a line consisting of @end table
.
Follow the end of the table by a blank line for consistent formatting
across output formats.
For example, the following table highlights the text in the first
column with the @samp
command:
@table @samp @item foo This is the text for @samp{foo}. @item bar Text for @samp{bar}. @end table
This produces:
This is the text for ‘foo’.
Text for ‘bar’.
If you want to list two or more named items with a single block of
text, use the @itemx
command. (See @itemx
: Second and Subsequent Items.)
The @table
command (see Using the @table
Command) is not supported
inside @display
. Since @display
is line-oriented, it
doesn’t make sense to use them together. If you want to indent a
table, try @quotation
(see @quotation
: Block Quotations) or
@indentedblock
(see @indentedblock
: Indented text blocks).
@ftable
and @vtable
¶The @ftable
and @vtable
commands are the same as the
@table
command except that @ftable
automatically enters
each of the items in the first column of the table into the index of
functions and @vtable
automatically enters each of the items in
the first column of the table into the index of variables. This
simplifies the task of creating indices. Only the items on the same
line as the @item
or @itemx
commands are indexed, and
they are indexed in exactly the form that they appear on that line.
See Indices, for more information about indices.
Begin a two-column table using @ftable
or @vtable
by
writing the @-command at the beginning of a line, followed on the same
line by an argument that is a Texinfo command such as @code
,
exactly as you would for a @table
command; and end the table
with an @end ftable
or @end vtable
command on a line by
itself.
See the example for @table
in the previous section.
@itemx
: Second and Subsequent Items ¶Use the @itemx
command inside a table when you have two or more
first column entries for the same item, each of which should appear on a
line of its own.
Use @item
for the first entry, and @itemx
for all
subsequent entries; @itemx
must always follow an @item
command, with no blank line intervening.
The @itemx
command works exactly like @item
except that
it does not generate extra vertical space above the first column text in some
output formats. If you have multiple consecutive @itemx
commands, do
not insert any blank lines between them.
For example,
@table @code @item upcase @itemx downcase These two functions accept a character or a string as argument, and return the corresponding uppercase (lowercase) character or string. @end table
This produces:
upcase
downcase
These two functions accept a character or a string as argument, and return the corresponding uppercase (lowercase) character or string.
(Note also that this example illustrates multi-line supporting text in a two-column table.)
@multitable
: Multi-column Tables ¶@multitable
allows you to construct tables with any number of
columns, with each column having any width you like.
You define the column widths on the @multitable
line itself, and
write each row of the actual table following an @item
command,
with columns separated by a @tab
command. Finally, @end
multitable
completes the table. Details in the sections below.
You can define the column widths for a multitable in two ways: as
fractions of the line length; or with a prototype row. Mixing the two
methods is not supported. In either case, the widths are defined
entirely on the same line as the @multitable
command.
@columnfractions
and the decimal numbers (presumably less than
1; a leading zero is allowed and ignored) after the
@multitable
command, as in:
@multitable @columnfractions .33 .33 .33
The fractions need not add up exactly to 1.0, as these do not. This allows you to produce tables that do not need the full line length.
When using @columnfractions
, the leftmost column may appear
slightly wider than you might expect, relative to the other columns.
This is due to spacing between columns being included in the width of
the other columns.
@multitable
command. For example:
@multitable {some text for column one} {for column two}
The first column will then have the width of the typeset ‘some text for column one’, and the second column the width of ‘for column two’.
The prototype entries need not appear in the table itself.
Although we used simple text in this example, the prototype entries can
contain Texinfo commands; markup commands such as @code
are
particularly likely to be useful.
Prototype rows have no effect in HTML output.
After the @multitable
command defining the column widths (see
the previous section), you begin each row in the body of a multitable
with @item
, and separate the column entries with @tab
.
Line breaks are not special within the table body, and you may break
input lines in your source file as necessary.
You can also use @headitem
instead of @item
to produce
a heading row. The TeX output for such a row is in bold, and
the HTML and DocBook output uses the <thead>
tag. In Info, the
heading row is followed by a separator line made of dashes (‘-’
characters).
The command @headitemfont
can be used in templates when the
entries in a @headitem
row need to be used in a template. It
is a synonym for @b
, but using @headitemfont
avoids
any dependency on that particular font style, in case we provide a way
to change it in the future.
Here is a complete example of a multi-column table (the text is from The GNU Emacs Manual, see Splitting Windows in The GNU Emacs Manual):
@multitable @columnfractions .15 .45 .4 @headitem Key @tab Command @tab Description @item C-x 2 @tab @code{split-window-vertically} @tab Split the selected window into two windows, with one above the other. @item C-x 3 @tab @code{split-window-horizontally} @tab Split the selected window into two windows positioned side by side. @item C-Mouse-2 @tab @tab In the mode line or scroll bar of a window, split that window. @end multitable
produces:
Key | Command | Description |
---|---|---|
C-x 2 | split-window-vertically | Split the selected window into two windows, with one above the other. |
C-x 3 | split-window-horizontally | Split the selected window into two windows positioned side by side. |
C-Mouse-2 | In the mode line or scroll bar of a window, split that window. |
The commands in this chapter allow you to write text that is specially displayed (output format permitting), outside of the normal document flow.
One set of such commands is for creating “floats”, that is, figures, tables, and the like, set off from the main text, possibly numbered, captioned, and/or referred to from elsewhere in the document. Images are often included in these displays.
Another group of commands is for creating footnotes in Texinfo.
A float is a display which is set off from the main text. It is typically labeled as being a “Figure”, “Table”, “Example”, or some similar type.
A float is so-named because, in principle, it can be moved to the
bottom or top of the current page, or to a following page, in the
printed output. (Floating does not make sense in other output
formats.) In every output format except for LaTeX, however,
this floating is unfortunately not yet implemented. Instead, the
floating material is simply output at the current location, more
or less as if it were an @group
(see @group
: Prevent Page Breaks).
@float
[type][,label]: Floating Material@caption
& @shortcaption
@listoffloats
: Tables of Contents for Floats@float
[type][,label]: Floating Material ¶To produce floating material, enclose the material you want to be
displayed separate between @float
and @end float
commands, on lines by themselves.
Floating material often uses @image
to display an
already-existing graphic (see Inserting Images), or @multitable
to
display a table (see @multitable
: Multi-column Tables). However, the contents
of the float can be anything. Here’s an example with simple text:
@float Figure,fig:ex1 This is an example float. @end float
And the output:
This is an example float.
Figure 9.1
As shown in the example, @float
takes two arguments (separated
by a comma), type and label. Both are optional.
Specifies the sort of float this is; typically a word such as “Figure”, “Table”, etc. If this is not given, and label is, any cross-referencing will simply use a bare number.
Specifies a cross-reference label for this float. If given, this
float is automatically given a number, and will appear in any
@listoffloats
output (see @listoffloats
: Tables of Contents for Floats). Cross
references to label are allowed. For example,
‘see @ref{fig:ex1}’ will produce see Figure 9.1.
On the other hand, if label is not given, then the float will
not be numbered and consequently will not appear in the
@listoffloats
output or be cross-referenceable.
Ordinarily, you specify both type and label, to get a labeled and numbered float.
In the LaTeX output, code loading the float
package is
output in the preamble if @float
are present.
A @float
with type ‘figure’ or ‘table’
(case insensitive) is already defined by the package. Other
float types lead to the definition of a new float environment,
with names based on the @float
type with anything else
than letters and ‘-’ removed.
In Texinfo, all floats are numbered in the same way: with the chapter number (or appendix letter), a period, and the float number, which simply counts 1, 2, 3, …, and is reset at each chapter. Each float type is counted independently.
Floats within an @unnumbered
, or outside of any chapter, are
simply numbered consecutively from 1.
These numbering conventions are not, at present, changeable.
@listoffloats
: Tables of Contents for Floats ¶You can write a @listoffloats
command to generate a list of
floats for a given float type (see @float
[type][,label]: Floating Material), analogous to
the document’s overall table of contents. Typically, it is written in
its own @unnumbered
node to provide a heading and structure,
rather like @printindex
(see Printing Indices and Menus).
@listoffloats
takes one optional argument, the float type.
Here’s an example:
@node List of Figures @unnumbered List of Figures @listoffloats Figure
Without any argument, @listoffloats
generates a list of
floats for which no float type was specified, i.e., no first argument to the
@float
command (see @float
[type][,label]: Floating Material).
Here’s what the output from @listoffloats
looks like, given the example figure earlier in this chapter:
Usually, each line in the list of floats contains the float type (if any),
the float number, and the caption, if any—the @shortcaption
argument, if it was specified, else the @caption
argument.
The page number may also be included, depending on output format.
Unnumbered floats (those without cross-reference labels) are omitted from the list of floats.
The formatting of @listoffloats
depends on the output
format. In Info, for example, a @listoffloats
is formatted
as a menu.
In LaTeX output, \listoffigures
is output for
the ‘figure’ (case insensitive) float type, \listoftables
is output
for the ‘table’ (case insensitive) float type. For other float types, a
specific \listof
command is output.
You can insert an image given in an external file with the
@image
command. Although images can be used anywhere,
including the middle of a paragraph, we describe them in this chapter
since they are most often part of a displayed figure or example.
Here is the synopsis of the @image
command:
@image{filename[, width[, height[, alttext[, extension]]]]}
The filename argument is mandatory, and must not have an extension, because the different processors support different formats:
@verbatim
). The Info output
may also include a reference to filename.png or
filename.jpg. (See below.)
@image
is used for the file extension,
if it is specified and the file is found. Any leading period should
be included in extension. For example:
@image{foo,,,,.xpm}
If you want to install image files for use by Info readers too, we
recommend putting them in a subdirectory like ‘foo-figures’
for a package foo. Copying the files into
$(infodir)/foo-figures/
should be done in your
Makefile
.
The width and height arguments are described in the next section.
If an image is the first thing in a paragraph and followed by
more text, then you should precede the @image
command with
@indent
or @noindent
to indicate the beginning of
paragraph formatting. This is especially important for TeX output
to get correct paragraph indentation.
Use @center
to center an image
(see @titlefont
, @center
, and @sp
).
For HTML output, the alt attribute for
inline images is set to the optional alttext (fourth) argument to
@image
, if supplied. If not supplied, the full file name of
the image being displayed is used. The alttext is
processed as Texinfo text, so special characters such as ‘"’ and
‘<’ and ‘&’ are escaped in the HTML output; also, you can
get an empty alt
string with @-
(a command that
produces no output; see @-
and @hyphenation
: Hyphenation in Printed Output).
For Info output, the alttext string is also processed as Texinfo text and output. In this case, ‘\’ is escaped as ‘\\’ and ‘"’ as ‘\"’; no other escapes are done.
In Info output, a reference to the binary image file is written (trying filename suffixed with extension, .extension, .png, or .jpg, in that order) if one exists. The .txt file is also literally included, if one exists. This way, Info readers which can display images (such as the Emacs Info browser, running under X) can do so, whereas Info readers which can only use text (such as the standalone Info reader) can display the textual version.
The optional width and height arguments to the
@image
command (see the previous section) specify the size to
which to scale the image. They are only taken into account in printed
output.
In TeX, if neither is specified, the image is presented in its natural size (given in the file); if only one is specified, the other is scaled proportionately; and if both are specified, both are respected, thus likely distorting the original image by changing its aspect ratio.
The width and height may be specified using any valid TeX dimension, namely:
point (72.27pt = 1in)
pica (1pc = 12pt)
big point (72bp = 1in)
inch
centimeter (2.54cm = 1in)
millimeter (10mm = 1cm)
didôt point (1157dd = 1238pt)
cicero (1cc = 12dd)
scaled point (65536sp = 1pt)
For example, the following will scale a file ridt.eps to one inch vertically, with the width scaled proportionately:
@image{ridt,,1in}
For @image
to work with TeX, the file epsf.tex must be
installed somewhere that TeX can find it. (The standard location is
texmf/tex/generic/dvips/epsf.tex, where texmf is a
root of your TeX directory tree.) This file is included in the
Texinfo distribution and is also available from
ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex, among other places.
@image
can be used within a line as well as for displayed
figures. Therefore, if you intend it to be displayed, be sure to leave
a blank line before the command, or the output will run into the
preceding text.
Image scaling is presently implemented only in printed output, not in any other sort of output.
A footnote is for a reference that documents or elucidates the primary text.5
Footnotes are distracting; use them sparingly at most, and it is best to avoid them completely. Standard bibliographical references are usually better placed in a bibliography at the end of a document instead of in footnotes throughout.
In Texinfo, footnotes are created with the @footnote
command.
This command is followed immediately by a left brace, then by the text
of the footnote, and then by a terminating right brace. Footnotes may
be of any length (they will be broken across pages if necessary), but
are usually short. The template is:
ordinary text@footnote{text of footnote}
As shown here, the @footnote
command should come right after the
text being footnoted, with no intervening space; otherwise, the footnote
marker might end up starting a line.
For example, this clause is followed by a sample footnote6; in the Texinfo source, it looks like this:
...a sample footnote@footnote{Here is the sample footnote.}; in the Texinfo source...
As you can see, this source includes two punctuation marks next to each other; in this case, ‘.};’ is the sequence. This is normal (the first ends the footnote and the second belongs to the sentence being footnoted), so don’t worry that it looks odd. (Another style, perfectly acceptable, is to put the footnote after punctuation belonging to the sentence, as in ‘;@footnote{...’.)
In printed output formats, the reference mark for a footnote is a small, superscripted number; the text of the footnote appears at the bottom of the page, below a horizontal line.
In Info, the reference mark for a footnote is a pair of parentheses with the footnote number between them, like this: ‘(1)’. The reference mark is followed by a cross-reference link to the footnote text if footnotes are put in separate nodes (see Footnote Styles).
In the HTML output, footnote references are generally marked with a small, superscripted number which is rendered as a hypertext link to the footnote text.
Footnotes cannot be nested, and cannot appear in section headings of any kind or other “unusual” places.
A final tip: footnotes in the argument of an @item
command for
an @table
must be entirely on the same line as the
@item
(as usual). See Making a Two-column Table.
Online formats have two footnote styles, which determine where the text of the footnote is located, the ‘end’ and ‘separate’ footnote style.
For Info, in the ‘end’ node style, all the footnotes for a single node are placed at the end of that node. The footnotes are separated from the rest of the node by a line of dashes with the word ‘Footnotes’ within it. Each footnote begins with an ‘(n)’ reference mark.
Here is an example of the Info output for a single footnote in the end-of-node style:
--------- Footnotes --------- (1) Here is a sample footnote.
In HTML, when the footnote style is ‘end’, or if the output is not split, footnotes are put at the end of each output file.
For Info, in the ‘separate’ node style, all the footnotes for a single node are placed in an automatically constructed node of their own. In this style, a “footnote reference” follows each ‘(n)’ reference mark in the body of the node. The footnote reference is actually a cross-reference which you use to reach the footnote node.
The name of the node with the footnotes is constructed by appending ‘-Footnotes’ to the name of the node that contains the footnotes. (Consequently, the footnotes’ node for the Footnotes node is Footnotes-Footnotes!) The footnotes’ node has an ‘Up’ node pointer that leads back to its parent node.
Here is how the first footnote in this manual looks after being formatted for Info in the separate node style:
File: texinfo.info Node: Overview-Footnotes, Up: Overview (1) The first syllable of "Texinfo" is pronounced like "speck", not "hex". ...
In HTML, when the footnote style is ‘separate’, and the output is split, footnotes are placed in a separate file.
Unless your document has long and important footnotes (as in, say, Gibbon’s Decline and Fall …), we recommend the ‘end’ style, as it is simpler for readers to follow.
Use the @footnotestyle
command to specify the
footnote style. Write this command at the beginning of a line followed
by an argument, either ‘end’ for the end node style or
‘separate’ for the separate node style.
For example,
@footnotestyle end
or
@footnotestyle separate
Write a @footnotestyle
command in the Texinfo file preamble.
Using Texinfo, you can generate indices without having to sort and collate entries manually. In an index, the entries are listed in alphabetical order, together with information on how to find the discussion of each entry. In a printed manual, this information consists of page numbers. In other formats, links to the index entries location or to the associated nodes are generated.
Texinfo provides several predefined kinds of indices: an index for functions, an index for variables, an index for concepts, and so on. You can combine indices or use them for other than their canonical purpose. Lastly, you can define your own new indices.
Texinfo provides six predefined indices. Here are their nominal meanings, abbreviations, and the corresponding index entry commands:
(@cindex
) Concept index, for general concepts.
(@findex
) Function index, for function and function-like
names (such as entry points of libraries).
(@kindex
) Keystroke index, for keyboard commands.
(@pindex
) Program index, for names of programs.
(@tindex
) Data type index, for type names (such as structures
defined in header files).
(@vindex
) Variable index, for variable names (such as library global
variables).
Not every manual needs all of these, and most manuals use only two or three at most. The present manual, for example, has two indices: a concept index and an @-command index. (The latter is actually the function index but is called a command index in the chapter heading.)
You are not required to use the predefined indices strictly for their
canonical purposes. For example, suppose you wish to index some C
preprocessor macros. You could put them in the function index along
with actual functions, just by writing @findex
commands for
them; then, when you print the “Function Index” as an unnumbered
chapter, you could give it the title ‘Function and Macro Index’ and
all will be consistent for the reader.
On the other hand, it is best not to stray too far from the meaning of the predefined indices. Otherwise, in the event that your text is combined with other text from other manuals, the index entries will not match up. Instead, define your own new index (see Defining New Indices).
We recommend having a single index in the final document whenever
possible, however many source indices you use, since then readers have
only one place to look. Two or more source indices can be combined
into one output index by using the @synindex
or
@syncodeindex
commands (see Combining Indices).
Index entry commands based on the the two letter index names are also
valid, for example @cpindex
can be used instead of @cindex
.
The data to make an index come from many individual indexing commands scattered throughout the Texinfo source file. Each command says to add one entry to a particular index; after formatting, the index will give the current page number or node name as the reference.
An index entry consists of an indexing command at the beginning of a line followed, on the rest of the line, by the entry.
For example, this section begins with the following five entries for the concept index:
@cindex Defining indexing entries @cindex Index entries, defining @cindex Entries for an index @cindex Specifying index entries @cindex Creating index entries
Each predefined index has its own indexing command—@cindex
for the concept index, @findex
for the function index, and so
on, as listed in the previous section.
Index entries should precede the visible material that is being indexed. For instance:
@cindex hello Hello, there!
Among other reasons, that way following indexing links (in whatever context) ends up before the material, where readers want to be, instead of after.
In Info, an index is usually formatted as a menu. Try to avoid using a colon in index entries, as this may confuse some Info readers. See The Parts of a Menu for more information about the structure of a menu entry.
By default, entries for a concept index are printed in a roman
font and entries for the other indices are printed in a typewriter font.
You may change the way part of an entry is printed with the usual
Texinfo commands, such as @file
for
file names (see Marking Text, Words and Phrases), and @r
for the normal roman
font (see Fonts for Printing).
You may specify an explicit sort key for an
index entry using @sortas
following either the index command
or the text of the entry. For example: ‘@findex @sortas{\}
\ @r{(literal \ in @code{@@math})’ sorts the index entry this
produces under backslash.
You may choose to ignore certain characters in index entries
for the purposes of sorting. The characters that you can
currently choose to ignore are ‘\’, ‘-’, ‘<’
and ‘@’, which are ignored by giving as an argument to the
@set
command, respectively, txiindexbackslashignore
,
txiindexhyphenignore
, txiindexlessthanignore
and
txiindexatsignignore
. For example, specifying ‘@set
txiindexbackslashignore’ causes the ‘\mathopsup’ entry in the
index for this manual to be sorted as if it were ‘mathopsup’,
so that it appears among the other entries beginning with ‘M’.
This avoids the need to provide explicit sort keys for index
entries containing these characters.
When using these options, it is possible to get an index entry with
an empty sort key. To avoid this, specify a @sortas
directive
in the index entry. For example:
@set txiindexbackslashignore @findex @sortas{\} \
Texinfo provides several further commands for indexing.
First, you can create multilevel index entries, allowing you
to group many related subtopics under the same higher-level topic.
You do this by separating the parts of such an entry with the
@subentry
command. Such commands might look like this:
@cindex Superhumans @subentry villains @cindex Superhumans @subentry heroes
You may have up to three levels in an entry:
@cindex coffee makers @subentry electric @subentry pink @cindex coffee makers @subentry electric @subentry blue
You can use the @sortas
command mentioned earlier with any or
all of the three parts of an entry to cause them to sort differently
than they would by default.
Second, you may provide an index entry that points to another,
using the @seeentry
(“see entry”) command. For example:
@cindex Indexes @seeentry{Indices}
Such an entry should be unique in your document; the idea is to redirect the reader to the other entry where they will find all the information they are looking for.
Finally, you may provide a “see also” entry using the @seealso
command. These entries go along with regular entries, and are grouped
together with them in the final printed index. For example:
@cindex Coffee @cindex Coffee @subentry With milk and sugar @cindex Coffee @subentry With doughnuts @cindex Coffee @subentry Decaffeinated @cindex Coffee @seealso{Tea}
When using all three of these advanced commands, do not
place a comma between the different parts of the index text. The
texindex
program, which sorts the index entries and
generates the indexing formatting commands, takes care of placing
commas in the correct places for you.
Do not interrupt an index or @subentry
entry by @sortas
or advanced commands with braces; place the commands with braces at
the beginning or at the end of the entry.
These features are the most useful with printed documents, and when translating Texinfo to DocBook.
Concept index entries consist of text. The best way to write an index is to devise entries which are terse yet clear. If you can do this, the index usually looks better if the entries are written just as they would appear in the middle of a sentence, that is, capitalizing only proper names and acronyms that always call for uppercase letters. This is the case convention we use in most GNU manuals’ indices.
If you don’t see how to make an entry terse yet clear, make it longer and clear—not terse and confusing. If many of the entries are several words long, the index may look better if you use a different convention: capitalize the first word of each entry. Whichever case convention you use, use it consistently.
In any event, do not ever capitalize a case-sensitive name such as a C or Lisp function name or a shell command; that would be a spelling error. Entries in indices other than the concept index are symbol names in programming languages, or program names; these names are usually case-sensitive, so likewise use upper- and lowercase as required.
It is a good idea to make index entries unique wherever feasible. That way, people using the printed output or online completion of index entries don’t see undifferentiated lists. Consider this an opportunity to make otherwise-identical index entries be more specific, so readers can more easily find the exact place they are looking for. The advanced indexing features described in Advanced Indexing Commands can help with this, as well.
When you are making index entries, it is good practice to think of the different ways people may look for something. Different people do not think of the same words when they look something up. A helpful index will have items indexed under all the different words that people may use. For example, one reader may think it obvious that the two-letter names for indices should be listed under “Indices, two-letter names”, since “Indices” are the general concept. But another reader may remember the specific concept of two-letter names and search for the entry listed as “Two letter names for indices”. A good index will have both entries and will help both readers.
Like typesetting, the construction of an index is a skilled art, the subtleties of which may not be appreciated until you need to do it yourself.
@printindex
takes one argument, a two-letter index
abbreviation. You must include the @printindex
command at the
place in the document where you want the index to appear. This does
not happen automatically just because you use @cindex
or other
index-entry generating commands in the Texinfo file; those just cause
the raw data for the index to be accumulated.
You should precede the @printindex
command with
a suitable section or chapter command (usually @appendix
or
@unnumbered
) to supply the chapter heading and put the index
into the table of contents. Precede the chapter heading with an
@node
line as usual.
For example:
@node Variable Index @unnumbered Variable Index @printindex vr
@node Concept Index @unnumbered Concept Index @printindex cp
The text ‘Index’ needs to appear in the name of the node containing the index for the index to be found by Info readers.
If you have more than one index, we recommend placing the concept index last.
Other details of index output in output formats:
texindex
(see Formatting and Printing with TeX)
to sort the raw data to produce a sorted index file. The sorted index
file is what is actually used to print the index.
@printindex
reads the corresponding sorted index file and produces
a traditional two-column index, with index terms and page numbers.
@printindex
produces a special menu containing
the line number of the entry, relative to the start of the node. Info
readers can use this to go to the exact line of an entry, not just the
containing node. (Older Info readers will just go to the node.)
Here’s an example:
* First index entry: Top. (line 7)
@printindex
formatting is usually similar to a
menu in Info, showing the line number of each entry relative to the start of
the file.
@printindex
produces links to the index
entries.
Sometimes you will want to combine two disparate indices such as functions and concepts, perhaps because you have few enough entries that a separate index would look silly.
You could put functions into the concept index by writing
@cindex
commands for them instead of @findex
commands,
and produce a consistent manual by printing the concept index with the
title ‘Function and Concept Index’ and not printing the ‘Function
Index’ at all; but this is not a robust procedure. It works only if
your document is never included as part of another document that is
designed to have a separate function index; if your document were to
be included with such a document, the functions from your document and
those from the other would not end up together. Also, to make your
function names appear in the right font in the concept index, you
would need to enclose every one of them between the braces of
@code
.
@syncodeindex
: Combining Indices Using @code
¶When you want to combine functions and concepts into one index, you
should index the functions with @findex
and index the concepts
with @cindex
, and use the @syncodeindex
command to
redirect the function index entries into the concept index.
The @syncodeindex
command takes two arguments; they are the name
of the index to redirect, and the name of the index to redirect it to.
The template looks like this:
@syncodeindex from to
For this purpose, the indices are given two-letter names:
Concept index
Function index
Key index
Program index
Data type index
Variable index
Write a @syncodeindex
command before or shortly after the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file. For example,
to merge a function index with a concept index, write the
following:
@syncodeindex fn cp
This causes all entries designated for the function index to merge in with the concept index instead.
To merge both a variable index and a function index into a concept index, write the following:
@syncodeindex vr cp @syncodeindex fn cp
The @syncodeindex
command puts all the entries from the ‘from’
index (the redirected index) into the @code
font, overriding
whatever default font is used by the index to which the entries are
now directed. This way, if you direct function names from a function
index into a concept index, all the function names are printed in the
@code
font as you would expect.
@synindex
: Combining Indices ¶The @synindex
command is nearly the same as the
@syncodeindex
command, except that it does not put the ‘from’
index entries into the @code
font; rather it puts them in the
roman font. Thus, you use @synindex
when you merge a concept
index into a function index.
See Printing Indices and Menus, for information about printing an index at the end of a book or creating an index menu in an Info file.
In addition to the predefined indices (see Predefined Indices),
you may use the @defindex
and @defcodeindex
commands
to define new indices. These commands create new indexing @-commands
with which you mark index entries. The @defindex
command is
used like this:
@defindex name
New index names are usually two-letter words, such as ‘au’. For example:
@defindex au
This defines a new index, called the ‘au’ index. At the same
time, it creates a new indexing command, @auindex
, that you
can use to make index entries. Use this new indexing command just as
you would use a predefined indexing command.
For example, here is a section heading followed by a concept index entry and two ‘au’ index entries.
@section Cognitive Semantics @cindex kinesthetic image schemas @auindex Johnson, Mark @auindex Lakoff, George
(Evidently, ‘au’ serves here as an abbreviation for “author”.)
Texinfo constructs the new indexing command by concatenating the name
of the index with ‘index’; thus, defining an ‘xy’ index
leads to the automatic creation of an @xyindex
command.
Use the @printindex
command to print the index, as you do with
the predefined indices. For example:
@node Author Index @unnumbered Author Index @printindex au
The @defcodeindex
command is like the @defindex
command,
except that, in the printed output, it prints entries in an
@code
font by default instead of in a roman font.
You should define new indices before the end-of-header line of a
Texinfo file, and (of course) before any @synindex
or
@syncodeindex
commands (see Texinfo File Header).
As mentioned earlier (see Predefined Indices), we recommend having a single index in the final document whenever possible (no matter how many source indices you use), since then readers have only one place to look.
When creating an index, TeX creates a file whose extension is the
name of the index (see Names of index files). Therefore you
should avoid using index names that collide with extensions used for
other purposes, such as ‘.aux’ or ‘.xml’.
texi2any
already reports an error if a new index conflicts
well-known extension name.
Texinfo provides several commands for inserting characters that have special meaning in Texinfo, such as braces, and for other graphic elements that do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
@sub
and @sup
: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts@math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics@U
‘@’ and curly braces are the basic special characters in Texinfo. To insert these characters so they appear in text, you must put an ‘@’ in front of these characters to prevent Texinfo from misinterpreting them. Alphabetic commands are also provided.
The other characters (comma, backslash, hash, ampersand) are special only in restricted contexts, as explained in the respective sections.
@@
and @atchar{}
@{ @}
and @l rbracechar{}
@comma{}
@backslashchar{}
@hashchar{}
@&
and @ampchar{}
@@
and @atchar{}
¶@@
produces a single ‘@’ character in the output. Do
not put braces after an @@
command.
@atchar{}
also produces a single ‘@’ character in the
output. It does need following braces, as usual for alphabetic
commands. In inline conditionals (see Inline Conditionals: @inline
, @inlineifelse
, @inlineraw
), it
can be necessary to avoid using the literal ‘@’ character in the
source (and may be clearer in other contexts).
@{ @}
and @l rbracechar{}
¶@{
produces a single ‘{’ in the output, and @}
produces a single ‘}’. Do not put braces after either an
@{
or an @}
command.
@lbracechar{}
and @rbracechar{}
also produce
single ‘{’ and ‘}’ characters in the output. They do need
following braces, as usual for alphabetic commands. In inline
conditionals (see Inline Conditionals: @inline
, @inlineifelse
, @inlineraw
), it can be
necessary to avoid using literal brace characters in the source (and
may be clearer in other contexts).
@comma{}
¶Ordinarily, a comma ‘,’ is a normal character that can be simply typed in your input where you need it.
However, Texinfo uses the comma as a special character only in one
context: to separate arguments to those Texinfo commands, such as
@node
(see @node
Line Requirements),
@acronym
(see @acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}) and @xref
(see Cross-references), as well as user-defined macros
(see Defining Macros), which take more than one argument.
Since a comma character would confuse Texinfo’s parsing for these commands, you must use the command ‘@comma{}’ instead if you want to pass an actual comma. Here are some examples:
@acronym{ABC, A Bizarre @comma{}} @xref{Comma,, The @comma{} symbol} @mymac{One argument@comma{} containing a comma}
Although ‘@comma{}’ can be used nearly anywhere, there is no need for it anywhere except in this unusual case.
(Incidentally, the name ‘@comma’ lacks the ‘char’ suffix used in its companion commands only for historical reasons. It didn’t seem important enough to define a synonym.)
@backslashchar{}
¶Ordinarily, a backslash ‘\’ is a normal character in Texinfo that can be simply typed in your input where you need it. The result is to typeset the backslash from the typewriter font.
However, Texinfo uses the backslash as a special character in one restricted context: to delimit formal arguments in the bodies of user-defined macros (see Defining Macros).
Due to the vagaries of macro argument parsing, it is more reliable to
pass an alphabetic command that produces a backslash instead of using
a literal \. Hence @backslashchar{}
. Here is an example
macro call:
@mymac{One argument@backslashchar{} with a backslash}
Texinfo documents may also use \ as a command character inside
@math
(see @math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics). In this case, @\
or
\backslash
produce a “math” backslash (from the math symbol
font), while @backslashchar{}
produces a typewriter
backslash as usual.
Although ‘@backslashchar{}’ can be used nearly anywhere, there is no need for it except in these unusual cases.
@hashchar{}
¶Ordinarily, a hash ‘#’ is a normal character in Texinfo that can be simply typed in your input where you need it. The result is to typeset the hash character from the current font.
This character has many other names, varying by locale, such as “number sign”, “pound”, and “octothorp”. It is also sometimes called “sharp” or “sharp sign” since it vaguely resembles the musical symbol by that name. In situations where Texinfo is used, “hash” is the most common in our experience.
However, Texinfo uses the hash character as a special character in one
restricted context: to introduce the so-called #line
directive
and variants (see External Macro Processors: Line Directives).
So, in order to typeset an actual hash character in such a place (for
example, in a program that needs documentation about #line
),
it’s necessary to use @hashchar{}
or some other construct.
Here’s an example:
@hashchar{} 10 "example.c"
Although ‘@hashchar{}’ can be used nearly anywhere, there is no need for it anywhere except this unusual case.
@&
and @ampchar{}
¶Ordinarily, an ampersand ‘&’ is a normal character in Texinfo that can be simply typed in your input where you need it. The result is to typeset the ampersand character.
However, the ampersand character is treated specially in just one restricted context. In the argument to a definition command (see Definition Commands), an ampersand followed by a series of letters may be typeset specially when processing with TeX 7 (see Conventions for Writing Definitions). For example:
@defun foo integer1 &optional integer2 &rest integers @code{foo} described here. @end defun
may have ‘&optional’ and ‘&rest’ formatted in bold, even without any @-command involved.
So, in order to typeset an ampersand in such a context,
it’s necessary to use @&
or some other construct.
Here’s an example of a C++ function taking a reference as a parameter:
@deftypefn Function int foo (const std::vector<int>@& @var{bar}) Documentation of @code{foo}. @end deftypefn
This gives the output
int
foo (const std::vector<int>& bar)
¶Documentation of foo
.
Although ‘@&’ and ‘@ampchar{}’ can be used nearly anywhere, there is no need for them anywhere except this unusual case.
As explained in the early section on general Texinfo input conventions
(see General Syntactic Conventions), Texinfo source files use the ASCII character
`
(96 decimal) to produce a left quote (‘), and ASCII '
(39 decimal) to produce a right quote (’). Doubling these input
characters (``
and ''
) produces double quotes (“ and
”). These are the conventions used by TeX.
In examples of computer code, however, `
and '
produce
typical renderings for these ASCII characters: the backtick character
(standalone grave accent) and undirected single quote respectively.
In the past, directed glyphs
were used by default in TeX output. Texinfo provides these commands
to choose between these alternate renderings:
@codequoteundirected on-off
¶Set to ‘off’ to output the '
character in code environments
as the right curly single quote.
@codequotebacktick on-off
Set to ‘off’ to output the `
character in code environments
as the left curly single quote.
If you want these settings for only part of the document,
@codequote... on
will restore the normal behavior, as in
@codequoteundirected on
.
These settings affect @code
, @example
, @kbd
,
@samp
, @verb
, and @verbatim
. See Highlighting Commands are Useful.
Unfortunately, some document viewers will mangle the directed
quote characters when copying and pasting. (The free PDF reader
xpdf
works fine, but other PDF readers, both free and
nonfree, have problems.)
This feature can also be controlled by using @set
and @clear
on the corresponding variables
txicodequoteundirected
and txicodequotebacktick
.
The following sections describe commands that control spacing of various kinds within and after sentences.
@frenchspacing
val: Control Sentence Spacing@dmn
{dimension}: Format a DimensionOrdinarily, multiple whitespace characters (space, tab, and newline) are collapsed into a single space.
Occasionally, you may want to produce several consecutive spaces,
either for purposes of example (e.g., what your program does with
multiple spaces as input), or merely for purposes of appearance in
headings or lists. Texinfo supports three commands:
@SPACE
, @TAB
, and @NL
, all
of which insert a single space into the output. (Here,
@SPACE
represents an ‘@’ character followed by a
space, i.e., ‘@ ’, TAB represents an actual tab character,
and @NL
represents an ‘@’ character and end-of-line,
i.e., when ‘@’ is the last character on a line.)
For example,
Spacey@ @ @ @ example.
produces
Spacey example.
Do not follow any of these commands with braces.
To produce a non-breakable space, see @tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable Space.
When a period, exclamation point or question mark is at the end of a sentence, slightly more space is inserted after it in a typeset manual.
Usually, Texinfo can determine automatically when a period ends a
sentence. However, special commands are needed in some circumstances.
Use the @:
command after a period, question mark, exclamation
mark or colon that should not be followed by extra space. This is
necessary in the following situations:
@:
should be used after the right parenthesis. Similarly for
right brackets and right quotes (both single and double).
For example:
‘foo vs.@: bar (or?)@: baz’,
The first line below shows the output, and for comparison, the second line shows the spacing when the ‘@:’ commands were not used.
foo vs. bar (or?) baz
foo vs. bar (or?) baz
It may help you to remember what @:
does by imagining that it
stands for an invisible lower-case character that stops a word ending in
a period.
A few Texinfo commands force normal interword spacing, so that you
don’t have to insert @:
where you otherwise would. These are
the code-like highlighting commands, @var
, @abbr
, and
@acronym
(see Highlighting Commands are Useful). For example, in
‘@code{foo. bar}’ the period is not considered to be the end of a
sentence, and no extra space is inserted.
@:
has no effect on the HTML or DocBook output.
As mentioned above, Texinfo normally inserts additional space after the end of a sentence. It uses the same heuristic for this as TeX: a sentence ends with a period, exclamation point, or question mark, either preceded or followed by optional closing punctuation, and then whitespace, and not preceded by a capital letter.
Use @.
instead of a period, @!
instead of an
exclamation point, and @?
instead of a question mark at the
end of a sentence that does end with a capital letter. Do not put
braces after any of these commands. For example:
Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W@. Also, give it to R.J.C@. Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W. Also, give it to R.J.C.
The output follows. In printed output and Info, you can see the desired extra whitespace after the ‘W’ in the first line.
Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W. Also, give it to R.J.C.
Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W. Also, give it to R.J.C.
In other output formats, @.
is equivalent to a simple ‘.’;
likewise for @!
and @?
.
The “closing punctuation” mentioned above is defined as a right parenthesis (‘)’, right bracket (‘]’), or right quote, either single or double (‘'’ and ‘''’; the many possible additional Unicode right quotes are not included). These characters can be thought of as invisible with respect to whether a given period ends a sentence. (This is the same rule as TeX.) For instance, the periods in ‘foo.) Bar’ and ‘foo.'' Bar’ do end sentences.
The meanings of @:
and @.
, etc. in Texinfo are
designed to work well with the Emacs sentence motion commands
(see Sentences in The GNU Emacs Manual). It may help to
imagine that the ‘@’ in ‘@.’, etc., is an invisible
lower-case letter ‘a’ which makes an upper-case letter before it
immaterial for the purposes of deciding whether the period ends the
sentence.
A few Texinfo commands are not considered as being an abbreviation,
even though they may end with a capital letter when expanded, so that
you don’t have to insert @.
and companions. Notably, this is
the case for code-like highlighting commands, @var
arguments
ending with a capital letter, @LaTeX
, and @TeX
. For
example, that sentence ended with ‘... @code{@@TeX}.’;
@.
was not needed. Similarly, in
... @var{VARNAME}. Text
the period after VARNAME ends
the sentence; there is no need to use @.
.
@frenchspacing
val: Control Sentence Spacing ¶In American typography, it is traditional and correct to put extra space at the end of a sentence. This is the default in Texinfo (implemented in Info and printed output, not in other output formats). In French typography (and others), this extra space is wrong; all spaces are uniform.
Therefore Texinfo provides the @frenchspacing
command to
control the spacing after punctuation. It reads the rest of the line
as its argument, which must be the single word ‘on’ or ‘off’
(always these words, regardless of the language of the document).
Here is an example:
@frenchspacing on This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. French spacing. @frenchspacing off This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. Non-French spacing.
produces:
This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. French spacing.
This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. Non-French spacing.
@frenchspacing
also affects the output after @.
,
@!
, and @?
(see Ending a Sentence).
@frenchspacing
has no effect on the HTML or DocBook output.
@dmn
{dimension}: Format a Dimension ¶You can use the @dmn
command to format a dimension with just enough
space for proper typesetting inserted in printed output. In other output
formats, the formatting commands insert no space at all.
To use the @dmn
command, write the number and then follow it
immediately, with no intervening space, by @dmn
, and then by
the dimension within braces. For example,
A4 paper is 8.27@dmn{in} wide.
produces
A4 paper is 8.27in wide.
Not everyone uses this style. Some people prefer ‘8.27 in.’ or
‘8.27 inches’. In these cases, however, you need to use
@tie
(see @tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable Space) or @w
(see @w
{text}: Prevent Line Breaks)
so that no line break can occur between the number and the dimension.
Also, if you write a period after an abbreviation within a sentence
(as with the ‘in.’ above), you should write ‘@:’ after the
period to avoid inserting extra whitespace in printed output, as shown
here. See Not Ending a Sentence.
Here is a table with the commands Texinfo provides for inserting
floating accents. They all need an argument, the character to accent,
which can either be given in braces as usual (@'{e}
), or, as
a special case, the braces can be omitted, in which case the argument
is the next character (@'e
). This is to make the source as
convenient as possible to type and read, since accented characters are
very common in some languages.
If the command is alphabetic, such as @dotaccent
, then there
must be a space between the command name and argument if braces are
not used. If the command is non-alphabetic, such as @'
, then
there must not be a space; the argument is the very next
character.
Exception: the argument to @tieaccent
must be enclosed in
braces (since it is two characters instead of one).
In Info and plain text output, accent constructs are output as the true
accented characters if the document encoding supports the required characters,
unless the option --disable-encoding is given to texi2any
(see @documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding). ASCII transliterations are used if the
encoded characters are not output.
Command | Output | What |
---|---|---|
@"o | ö | umlaut accent |
@'o | ó | acute accent |
@,{c} | ç | cedilla accent |
@=o | ō | macron/overbar accent |
@^o | ô | circumflex accent |
@`o | ò | grave accent |
@~o | õ | tilde accent |
@dotaccent{o} | ȯ | overdot accent |
@H{o} | ő | long Hungarian umlaut |
@ogonek{a} | ą | ogonek |
@ringaccent{o} | o̊ | ring accent |
@tieaccent{oo} | o͡o | tie-after accent |
@u{o} | ŏ | breve accent |
@ubaraccent{o} | o̲ | underbar accent |
@udotaccent{o} | ọ | underdot accent |
@v{o} | ǒ | caron/hacek/check accent |
This table lists the Texinfo commands for inserting other characters commonly used in languages other than English.
@exclamdown{} | ¡ | upside-down ! |
@questiondown{} | ¿ | upside-down ? |
@aa{} @AA{} | å Å | a,A with circle |
@ae{} @AE{} | æ Æ | ae,AE ligatures |
@dh{} @DH{} | ð Ð | Icelandic eth |
@dotless{i} | ı | dotless i |
@dotless{j} | ȷ | dotless j |
@l{} @L{} | ł Ł | suppressed-L,l |
@o{} @O{} | ø Ø | O,o with slash |
@oe{} @OE{} | œ Œ | oe,OE ligatures |
@ordf{} @ordm{} | ª º | Spanish ordinals |
@ss{} | ß | es-zet or sharp S |
@th{} @TH{} | þ Þ | Icelandic thorn |
Use doubled single-quote characters to begin and end quotations:
``…''
. Two single quotes
are converted to left- and right-hand doubled quotation marks,
“like this”.
You may occasionally need to produce two consecutive single quotes;
for example, in documenting a computer language such as Maxima where
''
is a valid command. You can do this with the input
'@w{}'
; the empty @w
command stops the combination into
the double-quote characters.
The left quote character (`
, ASCII code 96) used in Texinfo is a
grave accent in ANSI and ISO character set standards. We use it as a
quote character because that is how TeX is set up, by default.
Texinfo supports several other quotation marks used in languages other than English. Below is a table with the commands Texinfo provides for inserting quotation marks.
Command | Glyph | Unicode name (point) |
---|---|---|
@quotedblleft{} `` | “ | Left double quotation mark (U+201C) |
@quotedblright{} '' | ” | Right double quotation mark (U+201D) |
@quoteleft{} ` | ‘ | Left single quotation mark (U+2018) |
@quoteright{} ' | ’ | Right single quotation mark (U+2019) |
@quotedblbase{} | „ | Double low-9 quotation mark (U+201E) |
@quotesinglbase{} | ‚ | Single low-9 quotation mark (U+201A) |
@guillemetleft{} | « | Left-pointing double angle quotation mark (U+00AB) |
@guillemetright{} | » | Right-pointing double angle quotation mark (U+00BB) |
@guilsinglleft{} | ‹ | Single left-pointing angle quotation mark (U+2039) |
@guilsinglright{} | › | Single right-pointing angle quotation mark (U+203A) |
For the double angle quotation marks, Adobe and LaTeX glyph names
are also supported: @guillemotleft
and
@guillemotright
. These names are incorrect; a
“guillemot” is a bird species (a type of auk).
The standard TeX fonts support the usual quotation marks used in English (the ones produced with single and doubled ASCII single quotes). For the other quotation marks, TeX uses European Computer Modern (EC) fonts (ecrm1000 and other variants). These fonts are freely available, of course; you can download them from http://ctan.org/pkg/ec, among other places.
The free EC fonts are bitmap fonts created with Metafont. Especially for on-line viewing, Type 1 (vector) versions of the fonts are preferable; these are available in the CM-Super font package (http://ctan.org/pkg/cm-super).
Both distributions include installation instructions.
Traditions for quotation mark usage vary to a great extent between
languages (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quotation_mark).
Texinfo does not provide commands or configurations for typesetting
quotation marks according to the numerous traditions. Therefore, you
have to choose the commands appropriate for the language of your
manual. Sometimes aliases (see ‘@alias new=existing’) can simplify the
usage and make the source code more readable. For example, in German,
@quotedblbase
is used for the left double quote, and the right
double quote is the glyph produced by @quotedblleft
, which is
counterintuitive. Thus, in this case the following aliases would be
convenient:
@alias lgqq = quotedblbase @alias rgqq = quotedblleft
@sub
and @sup
: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts ¶You can insert subscripts and superscripts with the @sub
and @sup
commands. For example:
here@sub{below}@sup{above}
produces:
herebelowabove
In Info and plain text, @sub{text}
is currently output
as ‘_{text}’ and @sup{text}
as
‘^{text}’, including the literal braces (to mark the
beginning and end of the “script” text to the reader).
When the output format (and display program) permit (printed output, HTML), the superscript is set above the subscript when both commands are given consecutively.
For subscripts and superscripts in mathematical expressions, it is better to use TeX’s ‘_’ and ‘^’ characters. See the next section.
@math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics ¶You can write a mathematical expression, equation or formula using
the @math
command. Write the TeX math notation between
braces, like this:
@math{\partial_\alpha \partial^\alpha A^\beta = \mu_0 J^\beta}
@math
is formatted inline when used inside a paragraph,
like \partial_\alpha \partial^\alpha A^\beta = \mu_0 J^\beta in
this example.
The @math
command has no special effect on the Info
output, merely outputting the contents verbatim.
For printed output, @math
switches into TeX “math mode”.
In that context, ‘\’ must be used instead of ‘@’
for plain TeX math control sequences for symbols, functions,
and so on.
By default, the HTML output is only emphasized.
texi2any
provides three options for displaying properly
formatted mathematics for HTML. You can select these with the
HTML_MATH
variable (see HTML Customization Variables).
With HTML_MATH
set to ‘l2h’, texi2any
attempts
to use the latex2html
program to produce image files for
mathematical material. With the ‘t4h’ setting, texi2any
attempts to use the tex4ht
program. With the ‘mathjax’
setting, texi2any
inserts references in the output files
to MathJax scripts to format the material. The MathJax option
requires JavaScript to be enabled in the browser to work. See also
MathJax Customization Variables, latex2html
Customization Variables and tex4ht
Customization Variables.
For displayed equations, you can use the @displaymath
command. Example:
@displaymath f(x) = {1\over\sigma\sqrt{2\pi}} e^{-{1\over2}\left({x-\mu\over\sigma}\right)^2} @end displaymath
which produces:
In general, the contents of @math
or @displaymath
should be plain TeX only, with no interspersed Texinfo commands.
If you do use any Texinfo commands, then you should mark these with
‘@’ as usual, rather than ‘\’ (e.g. ‘@var’ rather than
‘\var’), but we do not guarantee which Texinfo commands will work.
Although @sub
and @sup
may work inside math mode in
some contexts, it is better to use TeX’s ‘_’ and ‘^’
characters to denote subscripts and superscripts within mathematical
expressions.
LaTeX-specific code will only work when the output format is LaTeX,
and with the HTML_MATH
options (although tex4ht
needs
T4H_MATH_CONVERSION
to be set to ‘latex’;
see tex4ht
Customization Variables).
Due to the conflict with Texinfo’s @sup
command, you can access
the plain TeX command \sup
as \mathopsup
instead,
in the unlikely occurrence that you want to do this (but only when
processing with TeX, not when outputting LaTeX nor with any of the
HTML_MATH
options).
Texinfo has support for a few additional glyphs that are commonly used
in printed text but not available in ASCII. Of course, there are
many thousands more. It is possible to use Unicode characters as-is
as far as texi2any
is concerned, but TeX is not so lucky.
@TeX
{} (TeX) and @LaTeX
{} (LaTeX)@copyright{}
(©)@registeredsymbol{}
(®)@dots
(…) and @enddots
(...)@bullet
(•)@euro
(€): Euro Currency Symbol@pounds
(£): Pounds Sterling@textdegree
(°): Degrees Symbol@minus
(−): Inserting a Minus Sign@geq
(≥) and @leq
(≤): Inserting Relations@TeX
{} (TeX) and @LaTeX
{} (LaTeX) ¶Use the @TeX{}
command to generate ‘TeX’. In a printed
manual, this is a special logo that is different from three ordinary
letters. In other output formats, it just looks like ‘TeX’.
Similarly, use the @LaTeX{}
command to generate ‘LaTeX’,
which is even more special in printed manuals (and different from the
incorrect La@TeX{}
. In other output formats, the result is just
‘LaTeX’.
The spelling of these commands is unusual for Texinfo, in that they use both uppercase and lowercase letters.
@copyright{}
(©) ¶Use the @copyright{}
command to generate the copyright
symbol, ‘©’. Where possible, this is a ‘c’ inside a
circle; otherwise this is ‘(C)’.
Legally, it’s not necessary to use the copyright symbol; the English word ‘Copyright’ suffices, according to international treaty.
@registeredsymbol{}
(®) ¶Use the @registeredsymbol{}
command to generate the
registered symbol, ‘®’. Where possible, this is an
‘R’ inside a circle; otherwise this is ‘(R)’.
@dots
(…) and @enddots
(...) ¶An ellipsis (a sequence of dots) would be spaced wrong when
typeset as a string of periods, so a special command is used in
Texinfo: use the @dots{}
command to generate a normal
ellipsis, which is three dots in a row, appropriately spaced …
like so. To emphasize: do not simply write three periods in the input
file; that could work in some output formats, but would produce the
wrong amount of space between the periods in printed manuals.
The @enddots{}
command generates an end-of-sentence
ellipsis, which also has three dots, but with different spacing
afterwards, ... Look closely to see the difference.
Here is an ellipsis: … Here are three periods in a row: ...
In printed (and usually HTML) output, the three periods in a row are much closer together than the dots in the ellipsis.
@bullet
(•) ¶Use the @bullet{}
command to generate a large round dot, or
the closest possible thing to one. An asterisk can also be used.
Here is a bullet: •
When you use @bullet
in @itemize
, you do not need to
type the braces, because @itemize
supplies them.
(see @itemize
: Making an Itemized List).
@euro
(€): Euro Currency Symbol ¶Use the @euro{}
command to generate ‘€’. Where
possible, this is the symbol for the Euro currency. Otherwise, the
word ‘Euro’ is used.
The Euro symbol does not exist in the standard TeX fonts (which
were designed before the Euro was legislated into existence).
Therefore, TeX uses an additional font, named feymr10
(along
with other variables). It is freely available, of course; you can
download it from http://ctan.org/pkg/eurosym, among other
places. The distribution includes installation instructions.
@pounds
(£): Pounds Sterling ¶Use the @pounds{}
command to generate ‘£’. Where
possible, this is the symbol for the pounds sterling British currency.
Otherwise, it is ‘#’.
@textdegree
(°): Degrees Symbol ¶Use the @textdegree{}
command to generate ‘°’.
Where possible, this is the normal symbol for degrees. Otherwise,
it is an ‘o’.
@minus
(−): Inserting a Minus Sign ¶Use the @minus{}
command to generate a minus sign.
Where the character encoding and font used in the output allow it,
the symbol is the customary length for a minus sign—a little longer
than a hyphen, shorter than an em-dash:
‘−’ is a minus sign generated with ‘@minus{}’, ‘-’ is a hyphen generated with the character ‘-’, ‘—’ is an em-dash for text.
If you actually want to typeset some math that does a subtraction, it
is better to use @math
, as in @math{a-b}
(see @math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics).
@geq
(≥) and @leq
(≤): Inserting Relations ¶Use the @geq{}
and @leq{}
commands to generate
greater-than-or-equal and less-than-equal-signs, ‘≥’ and
‘≤’. When those symbols are not available, the ASCII sequences
‘>=’ and ‘<=’ are output.
In Texinfo, code is often illustrated in examples that are delimited
by @example
and @end example
. In such examples,
you can indicate the results of evaluation or an expansion using
‘⇒’ or ‘→’. Likewise, there are commands
to insert glyphs to indicate printed output, error messages, equivalence
of expressions, the location of point in an editor, and GUI operation
sequences.
The glyph-insertion commands do not need to be used within an example, but most often they are. All glyph-insertion commands are followed by empty braces.
@result{}
(⇒): Result of an Expression@expansion{}
(→): Indicating an Expansion@print{}
(-|): Indicating Generated Output@error{}
(error→): Indicating an Error Message@equiv{}
(≡): Indicating Equivalence@point{}
(∗): Indicating Point in a BufferHere is a summary of the glyph commands:
@result{}
indicates the result of an expression.
@expansion{}
indicates the results of a macro expansion.
@print{}
indicates printed output.
@error{}
indicates the following text is an error message.
@equiv{}
indicates the exact equivalence of two forms.
@point{}
shows the location of point.
@clicksequence{A @click{} B}
indicates a GUI operation
sequence: first A, then clicking B, or choosing B from a menu, or
otherwise selecting it.
@result{}
(⇒): Result of an Expression ¶Use the @result{}
command to indicate the result of
evaluating an expression.
The @result{}
command is displayed as ‘⇒’,
either a double stemmed arrow or (when that is not available) the
ASCII sequence ‘=>’.
Thus, the following,
(cdr '(1 2 3)) ⇒ (2 3)
may be read as “(cdr '(1 2 3))
evaluates to (2 3)
”.
@expansion{}
(→): Indicating an Expansion ¶When an expression is a macro call, it expands into a new expression.
You can indicate the result of the expansion with the
@expansion{}
command.
The @expansion{}
command is displayed as
‘→’, either a long arrow with a flat base or (when
that is not available) the ASCII sequence ‘==>’.
For example, the following
@example lisp (third '(a b c)) @expansion{} (car (cdr (cdr '(a b c)))) @result{} c @end example
produces
(third '(a b c)) → (car (cdr (cdr '(a b c)))) ⇒ c
which may be read as:
(third '(a b c))
expands to(car (cdr (cdr '(a b c))))
; the result of evaluating the expression isc
.
Often, as in this case, an example looks better if the
@expansion{}
and @result{}
commands are indented.
@print{}
(-|): Indicating Generated Output ¶Sometimes an expression will generate output during its execution.
You can indicate such displayed output with the @print{}
command.
The @print{}
command is displayed as ‘-|’, either
a horizontal dash butting against a vertical bar or (when that is not
available) the ASCII sequence ‘-|’.
In the following example, the printed text is indicated with ‘-|’, and the value of the expression follows on the last line.
(progn (print 'foo) (print 'bar)) -| foo -| bar ⇒ bar
In a Texinfo source file, this example is written as follows:
@example lisp (progn (print 'foo) (print 'bar)) @print{} foo @print{} bar @result{} bar @end example
@error{}
(error→): Indicating an Error Message ¶A piece of code may cause an error when you evaluate it. You can
designate the error message with the @error{}
command.
The @error{}
command is displayed as ‘error→’, either
the word ‘error’ in a box in the printed output, the word error
followed by an arrow in other formats or (when no arrow is available)
‘error-->’.
Thus,
@example lisp (+ 23 'x) @error{} Wrong type argument: integer-or-marker-p, x @end example
produces
(+ 23 'x) error→ Wrong type argument: integer-or-marker-p, x
This indicates that the following error message is printed when you evaluate the expression:
Wrong type argument: integer-or-marker-p, x
The word ‘error→’ itself is not part of the error message.
@equiv{}
(≡): Indicating Equivalence ¶Sometimes two expressions produce identical results. You can indicate
the exact equivalence of two forms with the @equiv{}
command. The @equiv{}
command is displayed as
‘≡’, either a standard mathematical equivalence sign
(three parallel horizontal lines) or (when that is not available) as
the ASCII sequence ‘==’.
Thus,
@example lisp (make-sparse-keymap) @equiv{} (list 'keymap) @end example
produces
(make-sparse-keymap) ≡ (list 'keymap)
This indicates that evaluating (make-sparse-keymap)
produces
identical results to evaluating (list 'keymap)
.
@point{}
(∗): Indicating Point in a Buffer ¶Sometimes you need to show an example of text in an Emacs buffer. In such examples, the convention is to include the entire contents of the buffer in question between two lines of dashes containing the buffer name.
You can use the ‘@point{}’ command to show the location of point in the text in the buffer. (The symbol for point, of course, is not part of the text in the buffer; it indicates the place between two characters where point is located.)
The @point{}
command is displayed as ‘∗’, either
a pointed star or (when that is not available) the ASCII sequence
‘-!-’.
The following example shows the contents of buffer foo before
and after evaluating a Lisp command to insert the word changed
.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the ∗contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(insert "changed ") ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the changed ∗contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
In a Texinfo source file, the example is written like this:
@example ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the @point{}contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (insert "changed ") @result{} nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the changed @point{}contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- @end example
When documenting graphical interfaces, it is necessary to describe
sequences such as ‘Click on ‘File’, then choose ‘Open’, then
…’. Texinfo offers commands @clicksequence
and
click
to represent this, typically used like this:
... @clicksequence{File @click{} Open} ...
which produces:
... File → Open ...
The @click
command produces a right arrow by default; this
glyph is also available independently via the command
@arrow{}
.
You can change the glyph produced by @click
with the command
@clickstyle
, which takes a command name as its single argument
on the rest of the line, much like @itemize
and friends
(see @itemize
: Making an Itemized List). The command should produce a glyph, and
the usual empty braces ‘{}’ are omitted. Here’s an example:
@clickstyle @result ... @clicksequence{File @click{} Open} ...
now produces:
... File ⇒ Open ...
@U
¶The command @U{hex}
inserts a representation of the
Unicode character U+hex. For example, @U{0132}
inserts the Dutch ‘IJ’ ligature (‘IJ’).
The hex value should be at least four hex digits; leading zeros are not added. In general, hex must specify a valid normal Unicode character; e.g., U+10FFFF (the very last code point) is invalid by definition, and thus cannot be inserted this way.
@U
is useful for inserting occasional glyphs for which Texinfo
has no dedicated command, while allowing the Texinfo source to remain
purely 7-bit ASCII for maximum portability.
This command has many limitations—the same limitations as inserting
Unicode characters in UTF-8 or another binary form. First and most
importantly, TeX knows nothing about most of Unicode. Supporting
specific additional glyphs upon request is possible, but it’s not
viable for texinfo.tex to support whole additional scripts
(Japanese, Urdu, …). The @U
command does nothing to
change this. If the specified character is not supported in TeX,
an error is given. LaTeX output has more possibilities regarding
UTF-8, but could require extra code to load fonts and declare
how UTF-8 characters are output. (See @documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding.)
In HTML and DocBook, the output from @U
is always an
entity reference of the form ‘&#xhex;’, as in
‘IJ’ for the example above. This should work even when an
HTML document uses some other encoding (say, Latin 1) and the
given character is not supported in that encoding.
In Info and plain text, if the output encoding is not UTF-8, the output is the ASCII sequence ‘U+hex’, as in the six ASCII characters ‘U+0132’ for the example above.
Line and page breaks can sometimes occur in the ‘wrong’ place in one or another form of output. It’s up to you to ensure that text looks right in all the output formats.
For example, in a printed manual, page breaks may occur awkwardly in the middle of an example; to prevent this, you can hold text together using a grouping command that keeps the text from being split across two pages. Conversely, you may want to force a page break where none would normally occur.
You can use the break, break prevention, or pagination commands to fix problematic line and page breaks.
@*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line Breaks@-
and @hyphenation
: Hyphenation in Printed Output@allowcodebreaks
: Control Line Breaks in @code
@w
{text}: Prevent Line Breaks@tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable Space@sp
n: Insert Blank Lines@page
: Start a New Page@group
: Prevent Page Breaks@need mils
: Prevent Page BreaksThe break commands create or allow line and paragraph breaks:
@*
Force a line break.
@sp n
Skip n blank lines.
@-
Insert a discretionary hyphen.
@hyphenation{hy-phen-a-ted words}
Define hyphen points in hy-phen-a-ted words.
These commands hold text together on a single line:
@w{text}
Prevent text from being split and hyphenated across two lines.
@tie{}
Insert a normal interword space at which a line break may not occur.
The pagination commands apply only to printed output, since other output formats do not have pages.
@page
Start a new page.
@group
Hold text together that must appear on one page.
@need mils
Start a new page if not enough space on this one.
@*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line Breaks ¶The @*
command forces a line break in all output formats.
The @/
command allows a line break (printed manual only).
Here is an example with @*
:
This sentence is broken @*into two lines.
produces
This sentence is broken into two lines.
The @/
command can be useful within long URLs or other
identifiers where TeX can’t find a good place to break. TeX
will automatically break URLs at the natural places (see URL Line Breaking), so only use @/
if you need it. @/
has no
effect on the other output formats.
@-
and @hyphenation
: Hyphenation in Printed Output ¶Although TeX’s hyphenation algorithm is generally pretty good, it does miss useful hyphenation points from time to time. (Or, far more rarely, insert an incorrect hyphenation.) So, for documents with an unusual vocabulary or when fine-tuning for a printed edition, you may wish to specify hyphenation points explicitly. Texinfo supports two commands for this:
@-
Insert a discretionary hyphen, i.e., a place where a word can be
broken across lines with a hyphen. This is especially useful when you
notice that an overfull hbox is due to TeX missing a hyphenation
(see Overfull “hboxes”). TeX will not insert any hyphenation
points itself into a word containing @-
.
@hyphenation{hy-phen-a-ted words}
Give hyphenation points for certain words. For example:
@hyphenation{man-u-script man-u-scripts}
As shown, you put a ‘-’ at each hyphenation point. TeX only uses the specified hyphenation points when the words match exactly, so give all necessary variants, such as plurals.
Non-printed output is not hyphenated, so none of these commands have any effect in other output formats.
@allowcodebreaks
: Control Line Breaks in @code
¶Ordinarily, TeX considers breaking lines at ‘-’ and ‘_’
characters within @code
and related commands
(see @code
{sample-code}), more or less as if they were “empty”
hyphenation points.
This is necessary since many manuals, especially for Lisp-family
languages, must document very long identifiers. On the other hand,
some manuals don’t have this problem, and you may not wish to allow a
line break at the underscore in, for example, SIZE_MAX
, or even
worse, after any of the four underscores in __typeof__
.
So Texinfo provides this command:
@allowcodebreaks false
to prevent from breaking at ‘-’ or ‘_’ within
@code
. You can go back to allowing such breaks with
@allowcodebreaks true
. Write these commands on lines by
themselves.
These commands can be given anywhere in the document. For example, you may have just one problematic paragraph where you need to turn off the breaks, but want them in general, or vice versa.
This command has no effect except in TeX output.
@w
{text}: Prevent Line Breaks ¶@w{text}
outputs text, while prohibiting line
breaks within text.
Thus, you can use @w
to produce a non-breakable space, fixed at
the width of a normal interword space:
@w{ } @w{ } @w{ } indentation.
produces:
indentation.
The space from @w{ }
, as well as being non-breakable,
also will not stretch or shrink. Sometimes that is what you want, for
instance if you’re doing manual indenting. However, usually you want
a normal interword space that does stretch and shrink (in the printed
output); for that, see the @tie
command in the next section.
In printed output, you can also use the @w
command to prevent
a long name or phrase being automatically hyphenated, for example if
it happens to fall near the end of a line.
You can also use @w
to avoid unwanted keyword expansion in
source control systems. For example, to literally write $Id$
in your document, use @w{$}Id$
. This trick isn’t effective
for output files in some output formats, though.
@tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable Space ¶The @tie{}
command produces a normal interword space at which
a line break may not occur. Always write it with following (empty)
braces, as usual for commands used within a paragraph. Here’s an
example:
@TeX{} was written by Donald E.@tie{}Knuth.
produces:
TeX was written by Donald E. Knuth.
There are two important differences between @tie{}
and
@w{ }
:
@tie{}
will stretch and shrink slightly
along with the normal interword spaces in the paragraph; the space
produced by @w{ }
will not vary.
@tie{}
allows hyphenation of the surrounding words, while
@w{ }
inhibits hyphenation of those words (for TeXnical
reasons, namely that it produces an ‘\hbox’).
@sp
n: Insert Blank Lines ¶A line beginning with and containing only @sp n
generates n blank lines of space. @sp
also
forces a paragraph break. For example,
@sp 2
generates two blank lines.
The @sp
command is most often used in the title page.
@page
: Start a New Page ¶A line containing only @page
starts a new page in a printed
manual. In other formats, without the concept of pages, it starts a
new paragraph. A @page
command is often used in the
@titlepage
section of a Texinfo file to start the copyright
page.
@group
: Prevent Page Breaks ¶The @group
command is used to hold an example
together on one page. Use it inside an
@example
or similar construct to begin an unsplittable vertical
group, which will appear entirely on one page in the printed output.
Terminate the group by a line containing only @end group
.
This command has an effect in TeX output only.
The @group
and @end group
commands need to be inside the
@example
and @end example
commands, thus:
@example @group ... @end group @end example
Although @group
would make sense conceptually in a wide
variety of contexts, its current implementation works only
within @example
and variants, and within @display
,
@format
, @flushleft
and @flushright
.
See Quotations and Examples. (What all these commands have in
common is that each line of input produces a line of output.)
@need mils
: Prevent Page Breaks ¶A line containing only @need n
starts a new page in a
printed manual if fewer than n mils (thousandths of an inch)
remain on the current page. Do not use braces around the argument
n. The @need
command has no effect on other output
formats since they are not paginated.
This paragraph is preceded by a @need
command that starts a
new page in printed output if fewer than 800 mils (eight-tenths inch)
remain on the page. It looks like this:
@need 800 This paragraph is preceded by ...
The @need
command is useful for preventing orphans: single
lines at the bottoms of printed pages.
The @deffn
command and the other definition commands
enable you to describe functions, variables, macros, commands, user
options, special forms and other entities in a uniform format.
In the output, the name of the entity is shown with any arguments, along with the entity category —‘Function’, ‘Variable’, or whatever. Underneath, the body of the definition is indented. The name of the entity is also entered into the appropriate index.
All the definition commands follow a similar format. This chapter
starts by describing @deffn
before detailing all the other
definition commands.
@deffnx
, et al.: Two or More ‘First’ Lines@deffn category name arguments... body-of-definition @end deffn
The @deffn
command is used for definitions of entities that
resemble functions—entities that may take arguments.
Write the @deffn
command at the beginning of a line
and follow it on the same line by the category of the entity, the name
of the entity itself, and its arguments (if any). Then write the body
of the definition on succeeding lines.
Finally, end the definition with an @end deffn
command
written on a line of its own.
For example,
@deffn Command forward-word count This command moves point forward @var{count} words (or backward if @var{count} is negative). ... @end deffn
produces
- Command: forward-word count ¶
This command moves point forward count words (or backward if count is negative). …
Capitalize the category name like a title. If the name of the category contains spaces, as in the phrase ‘Interactive Command’, enclose it in braces. For example:
@deffn {Interactive Command} isearch-forward ... @end deffn
Otherwise, the second word will be mistaken for the name of the entity. As a general rule, when any of the arguments in the heading line except the last one are more than one word, you need to enclose them in braces. This may also be necessary if the text contains commands, for example, ‘{declaraci@'on}’ if you are writing in Spanish.
The category is output in a different location for different output formats. For example, in the Info file, the category appears at the beginning of the first line of the definition. With TeX output, the category is printed next to the right margin.
@deffn
enters names into the index of functions.
Three predefined, specialized variations of @deffn
(@defun
, @defmac
, and @defspec
) specify the
category for you: “Function”, “Macro”, and “Special Form”
respectively. (In Lisp, a special form is an entity much like a
function.) Similarly, the general @defvr
command is
accompanied by several specialized variations for describing
particular kinds of variables.
The heading line of a definition command can get very long. Therefore, Texinfo has a special syntax allowing them to be continued over multiple lines of the source file: a lone ‘@’ at the end of each line to be continued. Here’s an example:
@defun fn-name @ arg1 arg2 arg3 This is the basic continued defun. @end defun
produces:
This is the basic continued defun.
As you can see, the continued lines are combined, as if they had been typed on one source line.
Although this example only shows a one-line continuation,
continuations may extend over any number of lines, in the same way;
put an @
at the end of each line to be continued.
In general, any number of spaces or tabs before the @
continuation character are collapsed into a single space. There is one
exception: the Texinfo processors will not fully collapse whitespace
around a continuation inside braces. For example:
@deffn {Category @ Name} ...
The output (not shown) has excess space between ‘Category’
and ‘Name’. To avoid this, elide the unwanted whitespace in your
input, or put the continuation @
outside braces.
@
does not function as a continuation character in any
other context. Ordinarily, ‘@’ followed by a whitespace
character (space, tab, newline) produces a normal interword space
(see Multiple Spaces).
Some entities take optional or repeated arguments. One convention for indicating these uses square brackets and ellipses: an argument enclosed within square brackets is optional, and an argument followed by an ellipsis is optional and may be repeated more than once.
Thus, [optional-arg] means that optional-arg is optional
and repeated-args…
stands for zero or more
arguments. Parentheses are used when several arguments are grouped
into additional levels of list structure in Lisp.
Here is the definition line of an example of an imaginary (complicated) special form:
- Special Form: foobar (var [from to [inc]]) body… ¶
In this example, the arguments from and to are optional, but must both be present or both absent. If they are present, inc may optionally be specified as well. These arguments are grouped with the argument var into a list, to distinguish them from body, which includes all remaining elements of the form.
In a Texinfo source file, this @defspec
line is written like
this:
@defspec foobar (var [from to [inc]]) body@dots{}
As a matter of style or as demanded by the syntax of a programming language,
you may wish to omit any space after a name in a definition, occurring
before an opening bracket. To do this, set the ‘txidefnamenospace’
flag (see @set
and @value
). For example, this input
@set txidefnamenospace @deffn Builtin index (string, substring) @dots{} @end deffn
produces the following:
…
@deffnx
, et al.: Two or More ‘First’ Lines ¶To create two or more ‘first’ or header lines for a definition, follow
the first @deffn
line by a line beginning with
@deffnx
.
For example,
@deffn {Interactive Command} isearch-forward @deffnx {Interactive Command} isearch-backward These two search commands are similar except ... @end deffn
produces
These two search commands are similar except …
Each definition command has an ‘x’ form: @defunx
,
@defvrx
, @deftypefunx
, etc.
The ‘x’ forms work similarly to @itemx
(see @itemx
: Second and Subsequent Items).
This section describes all the definition commands of Texinfo.
This section describes the commands for describing functions and similar entities with simple arguments:
@deffn category name arguments…
¶The @deffn
command is the general definition command for
functions, interactive commands, and similar entities that may take
simple arguments. You must choose a term to describe the category of entity
being defined; for example, “Function” could be used if the entity is
a function. The @deffn
command is written at the beginning of a
line and is followed on the same line by the category of entity being
described, the name of this particular entity, and its arguments, if
any. Terminate the definition with @end deffn
on a line of its
own.
For example, here is a definition:
@deffn Command forward-char nchars Move point forward @var{nchars} characters. @end deffn
This shows a rather terse definition for a “command” named
forward-char
with one argument, nchars.
Where the output format allows, @deffn
uses a typewriter font
for name, and a slanted font for the rest of the arguments,
as would be produced by @var
.
Within the text of the description, write an argument name
explicitly with @var
to refer to the value of the argument.
In the example above, we used ‘@var{nchars}’ in this way.
In the extremely unusual case when an argument name contains
‘--’, or another character sequence which is treated specially
(see General Syntactic Conventions), use @code
around the special
characters. This avoids the conversion to typographic en-dashes and
em-dashes.
@defun name arguments…
¶The @defun
command is the definition command for functions
with simple arguments. @defun
is equivalent to
‘@deffn Function …’. Terminate the definition with
@end defun
on a line of its own.
@defmac name arguments…
¶The @defmac
command is the definition command for macros.
@defmac
is equivalent to ‘@deffn Macro …’ and
works like @defun
.
@defspec name arguments…
¶The @defspec
command is the definition command for special
forms. (In Lisp, a special form is an entity much like a function;
see Special Forms in GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.)
@defspec
is equivalent to ‘@deffn {Special Form}
…’ and works like @defun
.
All these commands create entries in the index of functions.
The @deftypefn
command and its variants are generic commands
for describing functions. They are particularly suitable for languages in
which you must declare types of variables and functions, such as C and C++.
@deftypefn category data-type name arguments…
¶The @deftypefn
command is the general definition command for
functions and similar entities that may take arguments and that could
be typed. The @deftypefn
command is written at the beginning of
a line and is followed on the same line by the category of entity
being described, information on the returned value, the name of this
particular entity, and its arguments, if any.
For example,
@deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar @ (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) ... @end deftypefn
produces:
- Library Function:
int
foobar(int foo, float bar)
¶…
This means that foobar
is a “library function” that returns an
int
, and its arguments are foo (an int
) and
bar (a float
). ‘Library Function’ has to be
enclosed in braces to make it a single argument.
When using @deftypefn
command and variations,
you should mark parameter names with
@var
to distinguish these from data type names, keywords, and
other parts of the literal syntax of the programming language.
Where the output format allows,
all output on the definition line is in a typewriter font by default.
@var
uses an appropriate font where it occurs.
If you are describing a procedure in a language that has packages,
such as Ada, you might consider using @deftypefn
in the
following manner:
@deftypefn stacks private push @ (@var{s}:in out stack; @ @var{n}:in integer) ... @end deftypefn
(In these examples the @deftypefn
arguments are shown using
continuations (see Definition Command Continuation Lines), but could be on a
single line.)
In this instance, the procedure is classified as belonging to the
package stacks
rather than classified as a ‘procedure’ and its
data type is described as private
. (The name of the procedure
is push
, and its arguments are s and n.) Output:
private
push (s:in out stack; n:in integer)
¶…
@deftypefn
and variants could be used when it is convenient to
interpret the arguments list as literal computer code, marking
argument names with @var
.
It is not necessary for any type names to appear,
and you can give an empty return type as ‘{}’.
The information on return values may be used to name the return variables. For example, in Perl, returned scalars may be given the $result and $status name in the following manner:
@deftypefn {Sub} {(@var{$result}, @var{$status} =)} @ process (@var{$input}) ... Set @var{$status} to 0 in case of failure ... @end deftypefn
to get output like
($result, $status) =
process ($input)
¶… Set $status to 0 in case of failure …
@deftypefn
creates an entry in the index of functions for
name.
@deftypefun data-type name arguments…
¶The @deftypefun
command is the specialized definition command
for functions. The command is equivalent to ‘@deftypefn Function
…’.
@deftypefun
creates an entry in the index of functions for
name.
Ordinarily, the return type is printed on the same line as the
function name and arguments, as shown above. In source code, GNU
style for typed functions is to put the return type on a line by itself.
So Texinfo provides an option to do that: @deftypefnnewline on
.
This affects the generic functions only—not untyped functions with
simple arguments such as @deffn
, not typed
variables, etc. Specifically, it affects the commands in this
section, and the analogous commands for object-oriented languages,
namely @deftypeop
and @deftypemethod
(see Object-Oriented Methods).
Specifying @deftypefnnewline off
reverts to the default.
Here are the commands for defining variables and similar entities:
@defvr category name
¶The @defvr
command is a general definition command for
something like a variable—an entity that records a value. You must
choose a term to describe the category of entity being defined; for
example, “Variable” could be used if the entity is a variable.
Write the @defvr
command at the beginning of a line and
follow it on the same line by the category of the entity and the
name of the entity.
We recommend capitalizing the category name like a title. If the name of the category contains spaces, as in the name “User Option”, enclose it in braces. Otherwise, the second word will be mistaken for the name of the entity. For example,
@defvr {User Option} fill-column This buffer-local variable specifies the maximum width of filled lines. ... @end defvr
Terminate the definition with @end defvr
on a line of its
own.
@defvr
creates an entry in the index of variables for name.
@defvar name
¶The @defvar
command is the definition command for variables.
@defvar
is equivalent to ‘@defvr Variable
…’.
For example:
@defvar kill-ring ... @end defvar
@defvar
creates an entry in the index of variables for
name.
@defopt name
¶The @defopt
command is the definition command for user
options, i.e., variables intended for users to change according to
taste; Emacs has many such (see Variables in The GNU Emacs
Manual). @defopt
is equivalent to ‘@defvr {User
Option} …’.
Variables in typed languages are handled in a manner similar to
functions in typed languages. See Functions in Typed Languages. The general
definition command @deftypevr
corresponds to
@deftypefn
and the specialized definition command
@deftypevar
corresponds to @deftypefun
.
@deftypevr category data-type name
¶The @deftypevr
command is the general definition command for
something like a variable in a typed language—an entity that records
a value. You must choose a term to describe the category of the
entity being defined; for example, “Variable” could be used if the
entity is a variable.
The @deftypevr
command is written at the beginning of a line
and is followed on the same line by the category of the entity
being described, the data type, and the name of this particular
entity.
For example:
@deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable ... @end deftypevr
produces the following:
- Global Flag:
int
enable ¶…
@deftypevar data-type name
¶The @deftypevar
command is the specialized definition command
for variables in typed languages. @deftypevar
is equivalent
to ‘@deftypevr Variable …’.
These commands create entries in the index of variables.
Here is the command for data types:
@deftp category name attributes…
¶The @deftp
command is the generic definition command for data
types. The command is written at the beginning of a line and is
followed on the same line by the category, by the name of the type
(which is a word like int
or float
), and then by names of
attributes of objects of that type. Thus, you could use this command
for describing int
or float
, in which case you could use
data type
as the category. (A data type is a category of
certain objects for purposes of deciding which operations can be
performed on them.)
In Lisp, for example, pair names a particular data
type, and an object of that type has two slots called the
CAR and the CDR. Here is how you would write the first line
of a definition of pair
.
@deftp {Data type} pair car cdr ... @end deftp
@deftp
creates an entry in the index of data types.
Here are the commands for formatting descriptions about abstract objects, such as are used in object-oriented programming. A class is a defined type of abstract object. An instance of a class is a particular object that has the type of the class. An instance variable is a variable that belongs to the class but for which each instance has its own value.
These commands allow you to define different sorts of variables in object-oriented programming languages.
@defcv category class name
¶The @defcv
command is the general definition command for
variables associated with classes in object-oriented programming. The
@defcv
command is followed by three arguments: the category of
thing being defined, the class to which it belongs, and its
name. For instance:
@defcv {Class Option} Window border-pattern ... @end defcv
produces:
Window
: border-pattern ¶…
@defcv
creates an entry in the index of variables.
@deftypecv category class data-type name
¶The @deftypecv
command is the definition command for typed
class variables in object-oriented programming. It is analogous to
@defcv
with the addition of the data-type parameter to
specify the type of the instance variable.
@deftypecv {Class Option} Window int border-pattern ... @end deftypecv
produces:
Window
: int
border-pattern ¶…
@deftypecv
creates an entry in the index of variables.
@defivar class name
¶The @defivar
command is the definition command for instance
variables in object-oriented programming. @defivar
is
equivalent to ‘@defcv {Instance Variable} …’. For
instance:
@defivar Window border-pattern ... @end defivar
produces:
Window
: border-pattern ¶…
@defivar
creates an entry in the index of variables.
@deftypeivar class data-type name
¶The @deftypeivar
command is the definition command for typed
instance variables in object-oriented programming. It is analogous to
@defivar
with the addition of the data-type parameter to
specify the type of the instance variable.
@deftypeivar Window int border-pattern ... @end deftypeivar
produces:
Window
: int
border-pattern ¶…
@deftypeivar
creates an entry in the index of variables.
These commands allow you to define different sorts of function-like entities resembling methods in object-oriented programming languages. These entities take arguments, as functions do, but are associated with particular classes of objects.
@defop category class name arguments…
¶The @defop
command is the definition command for these
method-like entities with simple arguments.
For example, some systems have constructs called wrappers that
are associated with classes as methods are, but that act more like
macros than like functions. You could use @defop Wrapper
to
describe one of these.
Sometimes it is useful to distinguish methods and operations.
You can think of an operation as the specification for a method.
Thus, a window system might specify that all window classes have a
method named expose
; we would say that this window system
defines an expose
operation on windows in general. Typically,
the operation has a name and also specifies the pattern of arguments;
all methods that implement the operation must accept the same
arguments, since applications that use the operation do so without
knowing which method will implement it.
Often it makes more sense to document operations than methods. For
example, window application developers need to know about the
expose
operation, but need not be concerned with whether a
given class of windows has its own method to implement this operation.
To describe this operation, you would write:
@defop Operation windows expose
The @defop
command is written at the beginning of a line and
is followed on the same line by the overall name of the category of
operation, the name of the class of the operation, the name of the
operation, and its arguments, if any.
@defop
creates an entry, such as ‘expose
on
windows
’, in the index of functions.
@deftypeop category class data-type name arguments…
¶The @deftypeop
command is the generic definition command for
operations in object-oriented programming. It is particularly suitable
for typed object-oriented languages. It is similar to
@defop
with the addition of the data-type parameter to
specify information on the return value of the method, for example the
return type.
@defmethod class name arguments…
¶The @defmethod
command is the definition command for methods
in object-oriented programming. A method is a kind of function that
implements an operation for a particular class of objects and its
subclasses.
@defmethod
is equivalent to ‘@defop Method …’.
The command is written at the beginning of a line and is followed by
the name of the class of the method, the name of the method, and its
arguments, if any.
For example:
@defmethod bar-class
bar-method argument
...
@end defmethod
illustrates the definition for a method called bar-method
of
the class bar-class
. The method takes an argument.
@defmethod
creates an entry in the index of functions.
@deftypemethod class data-type name arguments…
¶The @deftypemethod
command is the definition command for methods
in object-oriented languages, in particular for typed languages
such as C++ and Java. It is similar to the @defmethod
command
with the addition of the data-type parameter to specify information
on the return value of the method, for example the return type.
The commands with information on return values are affected by the
@deftypefnnewline
option (see Functions
in Typed Languages).
Texinfo provides commands for definitions that do not produce automatic index entries.
You create a generic definition environment with ‘@defblock’
paired with ‘@end defblock’. Within this environment, use a
@defline
or @deftypeline
line for each symbol you
document. For example:
@defblock @defline Macro mac (arg1, arg2) Description of mac. @deftypeline Builtin int foo (int @var{bar}) Description of foo. @end defblock
This produces the output:
Description of mac.
int
foo (int bar)
Description of foo.
The syntax of @defline
is similar to that of @deffn
.
The first argument gives a category for the definition. Follow this
with the symbol name, followed by any parameters. You should surround
any arguments containing spaces with braces.
You use @deftypeline
in a similar way to @deftypefn
,
following the category with a data type, and marking any parameters
with @var
. (See Functions in Typed Languages).)
To share the same description for multiple symbols, you can put several
@defline
lines together. For example:
@defblock @defline Function set-var (value) @defline {Settable Variable} var Description of set-var and var. @end defblock
This produces the output:
Description of set-var and var.
It may be useful to define line macros (see Line Macros) in combination with these commands.
A manual need not and should not contain more than one definition for
a given name. An appendix containing a summary should use
@table
rather than the definition commands.
When you write a definition using @deffn
, @defun
, or
one of the other definition commands, please take care to use
arguments that indicate the meaning, as with the count argument
to the forward-word
function. Also, if the name of an argument
contains the name of a type, such as integer, take care that the
argument actually is of that type.
Fonts. As Texinfo is a semantic language, you should nearly never need to specify font styles with explicit font commands in definitions (see Fonts for Printing). However, you may be need to work around problems for particular output formats and/or constructs. Here are some possibilities:
@r{&keyword}
, producing &keyword.
Note such keywords in definition arguments are (at present) rendered in roman in TeX, but this formatting is not done in any other output format.
@var
but avoiding upper-casing its argument in Info output.
In this and the previous point, @r
resets the font from that
being used in the definition line context (slanted or typewriter) to
a roman, upright style.
@t
(or even ‘@r{@t{…’, using @r
to reset font styles) to mark literal syntax
on a definition line where
text would otherwise be output in the slanted roman style.
@code
would be inappropriate here as it adds quotation
marks in Info output.
Some degree of trial and error may be needed to get the result you want. As ever, how nested font commands combine depends on the output format, so should be avoided where possible.
Hopefully, such usages are kept to a minimum. One possibility is to
wrap these in @macro
(see Defining New Texinfo Commands),
allowing these usages to be easily changed in the future.
Here is a definition from Calling Functions in The GNU Emacs
Lisp Reference Manual, using the @defun
command. The name of the
function, apply
, follows immediately after the @defun
command and it is followed, on the same line, by the parameter list.
- Function: apply function &rest arguments ¶
apply
calls function with arguments, just likefuncall
but with one difference: the last of arguments is a list of arguments to give to function, rather than a single argument. We also say that this list is appended to the other arguments.
apply
returns the result of calling function. As withfuncall
, function must either be a Lisp function or a primitive function; special forms and macros do not make sense inapply
.(setq f 'list) ⇒ list (apply f 'x 'y 'z) error→ Wrong type argument: listp, z (apply '+ 1 2 '(3 4)) ⇒ 10 (apply '+ '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ 10 (apply 'append '((a b c) nil (x y z) nil)) ⇒ (a b c x y z)An interesting example of using
apply
is found in the description ofmapcar
.
In the Texinfo source file, this example should look like this:
@defun apply function @r{&rest} arguments @code{apply} calls @var{function} with @var{arguments}, just like @code{funcall} but with one difference: the last of @var{arguments} is a list of arguments to give to @var{function}, rather than a single argument. We also say that this list is @dfn{appended} to the other arguments.
@code{apply} returns the result of calling @var{function}. As with @code{funcall}, @var{function} must either be a Lisp function or a primitive function; special forms and macros do not make sense in @code{apply}.
@example (setq f 'list) @result{} list (apply f 'x 'y 'z) @error{} Wrong type argument: listp, z (apply '+ 1 2 '(3 4)) @result{} 10 (apply '+ '(1 2 3 4)) @result{} 10 (apply 'append '((a b c) nil (x y z) nil)) @result{} (a b c x y z) @end example
An interesting example of using @code{apply} is found in the description of @code{mapcar}. @end defun
In this manual, this function is listed in the Command and Variable
Index under apply
.
Texinfo has some support for writing in languages other than English, although this area still needs considerable work. (If you are the one helping to translate the fixed strings written to documents, see Internationalization of Document Strings.)
For a list of the various accented and special characters Texinfo supports, see Inserting Accents.
@documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document Language ¶The @documentlanguage
command declares the current document
locale. Write it on a line by itself, near the beginning of the file.
@documentlanguage ll[_cc]
Include a two-letter ISO 639-2 language code (ll) following
the command name, optionally followed by an underscore and two-letter
ISO 3166 two-letter country code (cc). If you have a
multilingual document, the intent is to be able to use this command
multiple times, to declare each language change. If the command is
not used at all, the default is en_US
for US English.
As with GNU Gettext (see Gettext), if the country
code is omitted, the main dialect is assumed where possible. For
example, de
is equivalent to de_DE
(German as spoken in
Germany).
For Info and other online output, this command changes the translation
of various document strings such as “see” in cross-references
(see Cross-references), “Function” in defuns (see Definition Commands), and so on. Some strings, such as “Node:”, “Next:”,
“Menu:”, etc., are keywords in Info output, so are not translated
there; they are translated in other output formats.
In DocBook output @documentlanguage
sets the language for
following sections.
For LaTeX, this command causes code to load the ‘babel’ package
to be output in the preamble, and \selectlanguage
to be output.
For TeX, this command causes a file txi-locale.tex to
be read (if it exists). If @documentlanguage
argument
contains the optional ‘_cc’ suffix, this is tried first.
For example, with @documentlanguage de_DE
, TeX first looks
for txi-de_DE.tex, then txi-de.tex.
Such a txi-* file is intended to redefine the various English words used in TeX output, such as ‘Chapter’, ‘See’, and so on. We are aware that individual words like these cannot always be translated in isolation, and that a very different strategy would be required for ideographic (among other) scripts. Help in improving Texinfo’s language support is welcome.
@documentlanguage
also changes TeX’s current hyphenation
patterns, if the TeX program being run has the necessary support
included. This will generally not be the case for tex
itself, but will usually be the case for up-to-date distributions of
the extended TeX programs etex
(DVI output) and
pdftex
(PDF output). texi2dvi
will use the
extended TeXs if they are available (see Format with texi2dvi
).
Since the lists of language codes and country codes are updated relatively frequently, we don’t attempt to list them here. The valid language codes are on the official home page for ISO 639, http://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/. The country codes and the official web site for ISO 3166 can be found via https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166.
@documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding ¶In the default case, the input and output document encoding are assumed to be UTF-8, the vast global character encoding, expressed in 8-bit bytes. UTF-8 is compatible with 7-bit ASCII. It is recommended to use UTF-8 encoding for Texinfo manuals.
The @documentencoding
command declares the input document encoding,
and also affects the encoding of the output. Write it on a line by itself,
with a valid encoding specification following, near the beginning of the file
if your document encoding is not the default encoding.
@documentencoding enc
UTF-8 should always be the best choice for the encoding. Texinfo still supports additional encodings, mainly for compatibility with older manuals8:
US-ASCII
Character encoding based on the English alphabet.
ISO-8859-1
¶ISO-8859-15
ISO-8859-2
These specify the pre-UTF-8 standard encodings for Western European (the first two) and Eastern European languages (the third), respectively. ISO 8859-15 replaces some little-used characters from 8859-1 (e.g., precomposed fractions) with more commonly needed ones, such as the Euro symbol (€).
A full description of the encodings is beyond our scope here; one useful reference is http://czyborra.com/charsets/iso8859.html.
koi8-r
This was a commonly used encoding for the Russian language before UTF-8.
koi8-u
This was a commonly used encoding for the Ukrainian language before UTF-8.
In Info output, a so-called ‘Local Variables’ section (see File Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual) is output including the output encoding. This allows Info readers to set the encoding appropriately. It looks like this:
Local Variables: coding: UTF-8 End:
By default, for Info and plain text output, texi2any
outputs
accent constructs and special characters (such as @'e
)
as the actual UTF-8 sequence or 8-bit character in the output
encoding where possible. If this is not possible, or if the option
--disable-encoding is given, an ASCII transliteration is
used instead.
In HTML output, a ‘<meta>’ tag is output, in the ‘<head>’ section of the HTML, that specifies the output encoding. Web servers and browsers cooperate to use this information so the correct encoding is used to display the page, if supported by the system. That looks like this:
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
In HTML and LaTeX output, if OUTPUT_CHARACTERS
is set
(see Other Customization Variables), accent constructs and special
characters, such as @'e
or ``
, are output as the actual
UTF-8 sequence or 8-bit character in the output encoding where possible.
Otherwise, HTML entities are used for those characters in HTML, and
LaTeX macros are used in LaTeX.
In DocBook output, if the encoding is different from UTF-8,
an encoding
attribute is added to the XML declaration.
If OUTPUT_CHARACTERS
is set (see Other Customization Variables),
accent constructs such as @'e
are output as the actual 8-bit or
UTF-8 character in the output encoding where possible. Otherwise XML
entities are used for those constructs.
In TeX output, the characters which are supported in the standard Computer Modern fonts are output accordingly. For example, this means using constructed accents rather than precomposed glyphs. Using a missing character generates a warning message, as does specifying an unimplemented encoding.
Although modern TeX systems support nearly every script in use in the world, this wide-ranging support is not available in texinfo.tex, and it’s not feasible to duplicate or incorporate all that effort.
In LaTeX output, code loading the ‘inputenc’ package is output
based on the encoding. This, by itself, does not ensures that all
the characters from the input document can be subsequently output.
The fonts used in the default case should cover the specific Texinfo
glyphs, but not all the possible encoded characters. You may need to
load different fonts in the preamble and use
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter
with a UTF-8 encoding. For example:
@latex \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\.Z} @end latex
Cross-references between Info files in different character encodings with non-ASCII characters in node names fail. We strongly recommend using UTF-8 only as the encoding for manuals with non-ASCII characters in the destinations of cross-references.
The conditional commands allow you to use different text for different output formats, or for general conditions that you define. For example, you can use them to specify different text for the printed manual and the Info output.
The conditional commands comprise the following categories.
@inline
, @inlineifelse
, @inlineraw
@set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
@ifcommanddefined
, @ifcommandnotdefined
Texinfo has an @ifformat
environment for each output
format, to allow conditional inclusion of text for a particular output
format.
@ifinfo
begins segments of text that should be ignored when
not producing Info output, in particular in printed output. The
segment of text appears only in the Info file and, for historical
compatibility, the plain text output.
The environments for the other formats are analogous:
@ifdocbook … @end ifdocbook
Text to appear only in the DocBook output.
@ifhtml … @end ifhtml
Text to appear only in the HTML output.
@iflatex … @end iflatex
Text to appear only in the LaTeX output.
@ifplaintext … @end ifplaintext
Text to appear only in the plain text output.
@iftex … @end iftex
Text to appear only in the printed manual.
@ifxml … @end ifxml
Text to appear only in the XML output.
The @if…
and @end if…
commands must appear
on lines by themselves in your source file. The newlines following
the commands are (more or less) treated as whitespace, so that the
conditional text is flowed normally into a surrounding paragraph.
The @if…
constructs are intended to conditionalize
normal Texinfo source; see Raw Formatter Commands, for using
underlying format commands directly.
Here is an example showing all these conditionals:
@iftex This text will appear only in the printed manual. @end iftex @ifinfo However, this text will appear only in Info and plain text. @end ifinfo @ifhtml And this text will only appear in HTML. @end ifhtml @iflatex Moreover, this text will only appear in @LaTeX{}. @end iflatex @ifplaintext Whereas this text will only appear in plain text. @end ifplaintext @ifxml Notwithstanding that this will only appear in XML. @end ifxml @ifdocbook Nevertheless, this will only appear in DocBook. @end ifdocbook
The preceding example produces the following line:
And this text will only appear in HTML.
Notice that you only see one of the input lines, depending on which version of the manual you are reading.
In complex documents, you may want Texinfo to issue an error message
in some conditionals that should not ever be processed. The
@errormsg{text}
command will do this; it takes one
argument, the text of the error message.
We mention @errormsg{}
here even though it is not strictly
related to conditionals, since in practice it is most likely to be
useful in that context. Technically, it can be used anywhere.
See External Macro Processors: Line Directives, for a caveat regarding the line
numbers which @errormsg
emits in TeX.
You can specify text to be included in any output format other
than a given one with the @ifnot…
environments:
@ifnotdocbook ... @end ifnotdocbook @ifnothtml ... @end ifnothtml @ifnotinfo ... @end ifnotinfo @ifnotlatex ... @end ifnotlatex @ifnotplaintext ... @end ifnotplaintext @ifnottex ... @end ifnottex @ifnotxml ... @end ifnotxml
The @ifnot…
command and the @end
command must
appear on lines by themselves in your actual source file.
If the output file is being made in the given format, the region is ignored. Otherwise, it is included.
There is one exception (for historical compatibility):
@ifnotinfo
text is omitted for both Info and plain text
output, not just Info. To specify text which appears only in Info and
not in plain text, use @ifnotplaintext
, like this:
@ifinfo @ifnotplaintext This will be in Info, but not plain text. @end ifnotplaintext @end ifinfo
The regions delimited by these commands are ordinary Texinfo source as
with @iftex
, not raw formatter source as with @tex
(see Raw Formatter Commands).
The @if…
conditionals just described must be used only
with normal Texinfo source. For instance, most features of plain
TeX will not work within @iftex
. The purpose of
@if…
is to provide conditional processing for Texinfo
source, not provide access to underlying formatting features. For
that, Texinfo provides so-called raw formatter commands. They
should only be used when truly required (most documents do not need
them).
The first raw formatter command is @tex
. You can enter plain
TeX completely, and use ‘\’ in the TeX commands, by
delineating a region with the @tex
and @end tex
commands. All plain TeX commands and category codes are restored
within a @tex
region. The sole exception is that the
@
character still introduces a command, so that @end
tex
can be recognized. Texinfo processors will not output material
in such a region unless TeX output is being produced.
In complex cases, you may wish to define new TeX macros within
@tex
. You must use \gdef
to do this, not \def
,
because @tex
regions are processed in a TeX group. If you
need to make several definitions, you may wish to set
\globaldefs=1
(its value will be restored to zero as usual when
the group ends at @end tex
, so it won’t cause problems with
the rest of the document).
As an example, here is a displayed equation written in plain TeX:
@tex $$ \chi^2 = \sum_{i=1}^N \left (y_i - (a + b x_i) \over \sigma_i\right)^2 $$ @end tex
The output of this example will appear only in a printed manual. If you are reading this in a format not generated by TeX, you will not see the equation that appears in the printed manual.
Analogously, you can use @html … @end html
for a region of
raw HTML, @docbook … @end docbook
for a
region of raw DocBook, @latex … @end latex
for a
region of raw LaTeX, and @xml … @end xml
for a
region of raw XML.
The behavior of newlines in raw regions is unspecified.
In all cases, in raw processing, @
retains the same meaning as
in the remainder of the document. Thus, the Texinfo processors must
recognize and even execute, to some extent, the contents of the raw
regions, regardless of the final output format. Therefore, specifying
changes that globally affect the document inside a raw region leads to
unpredictable and generally undesirable behavior. For example, using
the @kbdinputstyle
command inside a raw region is undefined.
The remedy is simple: don’t do that.
@inline
, @inlineifelse
, @inlineraw
¶Texinfo provides a set of conditional commands with arguments given within braces:
@inlinefmt{format, text}
Process the Texinfo text if format output is being generated.
@inlinefmtifelse{format, then-text, else-text}
Process the Texinfo then-text if format output is being generated; otherwise, process else-text.
@inlineraw{format, text}
Similar, but for raw text (see Raw Formatter Commands).
The supported format names are:
docbook html info latex plaintext tex xml
For example,
@inlinefmt{html, @emph{HTML-only text}}
is nearly equivalent to
@ifhtml @emph{HTML-only text} @end ifhtml
except that no whitespace is added, as happens in the latter (environment) case.
In these commands, whitespace is ignored after the comma separating the arguments, as usual, but is not ignored at the end of text.
To insert a literal at sign, left brace, or right brace in one of the
arguments, you must use the alphabetic commands @atchar{}
(see Inserting ‘@’ with @@
and @atchar{}
), and @lbracechar{}
or
@rbracechar{}
(see Inserting ‘{ ‘}’ with @{ @}
and @l rbracechar{}
), or the parsing
will become confused.
With @inlinefmtifelse
, it is also necessary to use
@comma{}
to avoid mistaking a ‘,’ in the text for the
delimiter. With @inlinefmt
and @inlineraw
,
@comma{}
is not required (though it’s fine to use it), since
these commands always have exactly two arguments.
For TeX, the processed text cannot contain newline-delimited commands. Text to be ignored (i.e., for non-TeX) can, though.
Two other @inline...
conditionals complement the
@ifset
and @ifclear
commands; see the next section.
@set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
¶You can direct the Texinfo formatting commands to format or ignore parts
of a Texinfo file with the @set
, @clear
, @ifset
,
and @ifclear
commands. Here is a summary:
@set flag [value]
Set the variable flag, to the optional value if specified.
@clear flag
Undefine the variable flag, whether or not it was previously defined.
@ifset flag
If flag is set, text through the next @end ifset
command
is formatted. If flag is clear, text through the following
@end ifset
command is ignored.
@inlineifset{flag, text}
Brace-delimited version of @ifset
.
@ifclear flag
If flag is set, text through the next @end ifclear
command
is ignored. If flag is clear, text through the following
@end ifclear
command is formatted.
@inlineifclear{flag, text}
Brace-delimited version of @ifclear
.
@set
and @value
¶You use the @set
command to specify a value for a flag, which
is later expanded by the @value
command.
A flag (aka variable) name is an identifier starting with an alphanumeric, ‘-’, or ‘_’. Subsequent characters, if any, may not be whitespace, ‘@’, braces, angle brackets, or any of ‘~`^+|’; other characters, such as ‘%’, may work. However, it is best to use only letters and numerals in a flag name, not ‘-’ or ‘_’ or others—they will work in some contexts, but not all, due to limitations in TeX.
The value is the remainder of the input line, and can contain anything.
Write the @set
command like this:
@set foo This is a string.
This sets the value of the flag foo
to “This is a string.”.
The Texinfo processors then replace a @value{flag}
command with the string to which flag is set. Thus, when
foo
is set as shown above, the Texinfo processors convert this:
@value{foo}
to this:
This is a string.
You can write a @value
command within a paragraph; but you
must write a @set
command on a line of its own.
If you write the @set
command like this:
@set foo
without specifying a string, the value of foo
is the empty string.
If you clear a previously set flag with @clear flag
, a
subsequent @value{flag}
command will report an error.
For example, if you set foo
as follows:
@set howmuch very, very, very
then the processors transform
It is a @value{howmuch} wet day.
into
It is a very, very, very wet day.
If you write
@clear howmuch
then the processors transform
It is a @value{howmuch} wet day.
into
It is a {No value for "howmuch"} wet day.
@value
cannot be reliably used as the argument to an accent
command (see Inserting Accents). For example, this fails:
@set myletter a @'@value{myletter}
@ifset
and @ifclear
¶When a flag is set, the Texinfo formatting commands format text
between subsequent pairs of @ifset flag
and @end
ifset
commands. When the flag is cleared, the Texinfo formatting
commands do not format the text. @ifclear
operates
analogously.
Write the conditionally formatted text between @ifset flag
and @end ifset
commands, like this:
@ifset flag conditional-text @end ifset
For example, you can create one document that has two variants, such as a manual for a ‘large’ and ‘small’ model:
You can use this machine to dig up shrubs without hurting them. @set large @ifset large It can also dig up fully grown trees. @end ifset Remember to replant promptly ...
In the example, the formatting commands will format the text between
@ifset large
and @end ifset
because the large
flag is set.
When flag is cleared, the Texinfo formatting commands do
not format the text between @ifset flag
and
@end ifset
; that text is ignored and does not appear in the output.
For example, if you clear the flag of the preceding example by writing
an @clear large
command after the @set large
command
(but before the conditional text), then the Texinfo formatting commands
ignore the text between the @ifset large
and @end ifset
commands. In the formatted output, that text does not appear; you see
only the lines that say, “You can use
this machine to dig up shrubs without hurting them. Remember to replant
promptly …”.
If a flag is cleared with a @clear flag
command, then
the formatting commands format text between subsequent pairs of
@ifclear
and @end ifclear
commands. But if the flag
is set with @set flag
, then the formatting commands do
not format text between an @ifclear
and an @end
ifclear
command; rather, they ignore that text. An @ifclear
command looks like this:
@ifclear flag
@inlineifset
and @inlineifclear
¶@inlineifset
and @inlineifclear
provide
brace-delimited alternatives to the @ifset
and
@ifclear
forms, similar to the other @inline...
Commands (see Inline Conditionals: @inline
, @inlineifelse
, @inlineraw
). The same caveats about
argument parsing given there apply here too.
@inlineifset{var, text}
Process the Texinfo text if the flag var is defined.
@inlineifclear{var, text}
Process the Texinfo text if the flag var is not defined.
Except for the syntax, their general behavior and purposes is the same
as with @ifset
and @ifclear
, described in the previous
section.
@value
Example ¶You can use the @value
command to minimize the number of
places you need to change when you record an update to a manual.
See GNU Sample Texts, for the full text of an example of using this
to work with Automake distributions.
This example is adapted from The GNU Make Manual.
@set EDITION 0.35 Beta @set VERSION 3.63 Beta @set UPDATED 14 August 1992 @set UPDATE-MONTH August 1992
@copying
section (see @copying
: Declare Copying Permissions):
@copying This is Edition @value{EDITION}, last updated @value{UPDATED}, of @cite{The GNU Make Manual}, for @code{make}, version @value{VERSION}. Copyright ... Permission is granted ... @end copying
@titlepage @title GNU Make @subtitle A Program for Directing Recompilation @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, ... @subtitle @value{UPDATE-MONTH} @page @insertcopying ... @end titlepage
(On a printed cover, a date listing the month and the year looks less fussy than a date listing the day as well as the month and year.)
@ifnottex @node Top @top Make This is Edition @value{EDITION}, last updated @value{UPDATED}, of @cite{The GNU Make Manual}, for @code{make}, version @value{VERSION}. @end ifnottex
After you format the manual, the @value
constructs have been
expanded, so the output contains text like this:
This is Edition 0.35 Beta, last updated 14 August 1992, of `The GNU Make Manual', for `make', Version 3.63 Beta.
When you update the manual, you change only the values of the flags; you do not need to edit the three sections.
@ifcommanddefined
, @ifcommandnotdefined
¶Occasionally, you may want to arrange for your manual to test if a
given Texinfo command is available and (presumably) do some sort of
fallback formatting if not. There are conditionals
@ifcommanddefined
and @ifcommandnotdefined
to do this.
For example:
@ifcommanddefined node Good, @samp{@@node} is defined. @end ifcommanddefined
will output the expected ‘Good, ‘@node’ is defined.’.
This conditional will also consider any new commands defined by
the document via @macro
, @alias
,
@definfoenclose
, and @def(code)index
(see Defining New Texinfo Commands) to be true. Caveat: the TeX
implementation reports internal TeX commands, in addition to all
the Texinfo commands, as being “defined”; the texi2any
implementation is reliable in this regard, however.
You can check the NEWS file in the Texinfo source distribution and linked from the Texinfo home page (http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo) to see when a particular command was added.
These command-checking conditionals themselves were added in
Texinfo 5.0, released in 2013—decades after Texinfo’s
inception. In order to test if they themselves are available,
the predefined flag txicommandconditionals
can be tested, like
this:
@ifset txicommandconditionals @ifcommandnotdefined foobarnode (Good, @samp{@@foobarnode} is not defined.) @end ifcommandnotdefined @end ifset
Since flags (see the previous section) were added early in the existence of Texinfo, there is no problem with assuming they are available.
We recommend avoiding these tests whenever possible—which is usually the case. For many software packages, it is reasonable for all developers to have a given version of Texinfo (or newer) installed, and thus no reason to worry about older versions. (It is straightforward for anyone to download and install the Texinfo source; it does not have any problematic dependencies.)
The issue of Texinfo versions does not generally arise for end users. With properly distributed packages, users need not process the Texinfo manual simply to build and install the package; they can use preformatted Info (or other) output files. This is desirable in general, to avoid unnecessary dependencies between packages (see Releases in GNU Coding Standards).
Texinfo requires that for a failing conditional, the ignored text must be properly nested with respect to that failing conditional. Here’s an example:
@ifset somevar @ifset anothervar Both somevar and anothervar are set. @end ifset @ifclear anothervar Somevar is set, anothervar is not. @end ifclear @end ifset
If ‘somevar’ is not set, the whole block is skipped.
To allow the processors to reliably determine which commands to consider for nesting purposes, all conditional commands must be on lines by themselves, with no text (even spaces) before or after.
Texinfo provides several ways to define new commands (in all cases, it’s not recommended to try redefining existing commands):
Incidentally, these macros have nothing to do with the @defmac
command, which is for documenting macros in the subject area of the
manual (see The Template for a Definition).
Most generally of all (not just for defining new commands), it is
possible to invoke any external macro processor and have Texinfo
recognize so-called #line
directives for error reporting.
If you want to do simple text substitution, @set
and
@value
is the simplest approach (see Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
).
@definfoenclose
: Customized HighlightingYou use the Texinfo @macro
command to define a macro, like this:
@macro macroname{param1, param2, ...} text ... \param1\ ... @end macro
The parameters param1, param2, … correspond to arguments supplied when the macro is subsequently used in the document (described in the next section).
In principle, macroname should consist of alphanumerics,
and (except as the first character) ‘-’. The ‘_’ character
is excluded so that macros can be called inside @math
without
a following space (see @math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics). However, for a macro to
work consistently with TeX, macroname must consist entirely
of letters: no digits, hyphens, or other special characters.
So, we recommend using only letters. Texinfo commands should not
be redefined as macros.
If a macro needs no parameters, you can define it either with an empty list (‘@macro foo {}’) or with no braces at all (‘@macro foo’).
The definition or body of the macro can contain most Texinfo
commands, including macro invocations. However, a macro definition
that defines another macro does not work in TeX due to limitations
in the design of @macro
.
In the macro body, instances of a parameter name surrounded by backslashes, as in ‘\param1\’ in the example above, are replaced by the corresponding argument from the macro invocation. You can use parameter names any number of times in the body, including zero.
To get a single ‘\’ in the macro expansion, use ‘\\’. Any other use of ‘\’ in the body yields a warning.
The newline characters after the @macro
line and before the
@end macro
line are ignored, that is, not included in the
macro body. All other whitespace is treated according to the usual
Texinfo rules.
To allow a macro to be used recursively, that is, in an argument to a call to itself, you must define it with ‘@rmacro’, like this:
@rmacro rmac {arg} a\arg\b @end rmacro ... @rmac{1@rmac{text}2}
This produces the output ‘a1atextb2b’. With ‘@macro’ instead of ‘@rmacro’, an error message is given.
You can undefine a macro foo with @unmacro foo
.
It is not an error to undefine a macro that is already undefined.
For example:
@unmacro foo
After a macro is defined (see the previous section), you can invoke (use) it in your document like this:
@macroname {arg1, arg2, ...}
and the result will be more or less as if you typed the body of macroname at that spot. For example:
@macro foo {p, q} Together: \p\ & \q\. @end macro @foo{a, b}
produces:
Together: a & b.
Thus, the arguments and parameters are separated by commas and delimited by braces; any whitespace after (but not before) a comma is ignored. The braces are required in the invocation even when the macro takes no arguments, consistent with other Texinfo commands. For example:
@macro argless {} No arguments here. @end macro @argless{}
produces:
No arguments here.
Passing macro arguments containing commas requires care, since
commas also separate the arguments. To include a comma character in
an argument, the most reliable method is to use the @comma{}
command. Another method is to surround the argument with
‘@asis{…}’. For texi2any
, you can also prepend a
backslash character, as in ‘\,’, but this does not work with TeX.
It’s not always necessary to worry about commas. To facilitate use of macros, two rules for automatic quoting are implemented:
@macro TRYME{text} @strong{TRYME: \text\} @end macro @TRYME{A nice feature, though it can be dangerous.}
will produce the following output
TRYME: A nice feature, though it can be dangerous.
And indeed, it can. Namely, there is no control on the number of arguments passed to one-argument macros, so be careful when you invoke them.
@say{@strong{Yes, I do}, person one}
the comma after ‘Yes’ is implicitly quoted. Here’s another example, with a recursive macro:
@rmacro cat{a,b} \a\\b\ @end rmacro @cat{@cat{foo, bar}, baz}
will produce the string ‘foobarbaz’.
The backslash itself can be quoted in macro arguments with another backslash. For example:
@macname {\\bleh}
will pass the argument ‘\bleh’ to macname.
texi2any
also recognizes ‘\{’ and ‘\}’ sequences
for curly braces, but these are not recognized by the implementation in
TeX. There should, however, rarely be a need for these, as they are
only needed when a macro argument contains unbalanced braces.
If a macro is defined to take exactly one argument, it can be invoked without any braces, taking all of the line after the macro name as the argument. For example:
@macro bar {p} Twice: \p\ & \p\. @end macro @bar aah
produces:
Twice: aah & aah.
In these arguments, there is no escaping of special characters, so each ‘\’ stands for itself.
If a macro is defined to take more than one argument, but is called with only one (in braces), the remaining arguments are set to the empty string, and no error is given. For example:
@macro addtwo {p, q} Both: \p\\q\. @end macro @addtwo{a}
produces simply:
Both: a.
By design, macro expansion should not happen in the following contexts:
@macro
and @unmacro
lines;
@if...
lines, including @ifset
and similar;
@set
, @clear
, @value
;
@clickstyle
lines;
@end
lines when there is no macro expansion in the block
command.
Unfortunately, TeX may do some expansion in these situations, possibly yielding errors.
Also, quite a few macro-related constructs cause problems with TeX;
some of the caveats are listed below. Thus, if you get macro-related
errors when producing the printed version of a manual, you might try
expanding the macros with texi2any
by invoking
texi2dvi
with the ‘-E’ option (see Format with texi2dvi
). Or, more reliably, eschew Texinfo macros altogether
and use a language designed for macro processing, such as M4
(see External Macro Processors: Line Directives).
@example
environments, may behave unpredictably in TeX.
@comma{}
must be used.
texi2any
. This is
not the case when processing with TeX. This was often done
to “comment out” an unwanted newline at the end of a macro body, but
this is not necessary any more, as the final newline before ‘@end
macro’ is not included in the macro body anyway.
@value
) call for Texinfo command arguments, even when the text
is the same. Texinfo is not M4 (or even plain TeX). It might work
with some commands, it fails with others. Best not to do it at all.
For instance, this fails:
@macro offmacro off @end macro @headings @offmacro
This looks equivalent to @headings off
, but for TeXnical
reasons, it fails with a mysterious error message (namely,
‘Paragraph ended before @headings was complete’).
@iftex @macro atan \\mathop{\\rm atan} @end macro @end iftex @math{@atan{}(x)}
The braces following ‘@atan’ are treated by TeX as a subformula, leading to extra space before the opening parenthesis. You can work around this by defining a raw TeX macro instead:
@tex \gdef\atan#1{\mathop{\rm atan}} @end tex
The ‘#1’ in this definition absorbs the braces, so that the spacing
is as expected for the \mathop
object.
@macro Mac @iftex text for TeX output @end iftex @ifnottex text for not TeX output @end ifnottex @end macro
you can do the following instead:
@iftex @macro Mac text for TeX output @end macro @end iftex @ifnottex @macro Mac text for not TeX output @end macro @end ifnottex
@ifnottex @macro ctor {name, arg} @macro \name\ something involving \arg\ somehow @end macro @end macro @end ifnottex @tex \gdef\ctor#1{\ctorx#1,} \gdef\ctorx#1,#2,{\def#1{something involving #2 somehow}} @end tex
The following limitations are by design:
@,
(to produce a cedilla, see Inserting Accents), you have
to use @value
or another workaround. Otherwise, the comma
may be taken as separating the arguments. With texi2any
,
the comma can be escaped by a backslash. With TeX another workaround
need to be used, therefore we recommend using such a workaround.
For example,
@macro mactwo{argfirst, argsecond} \argfirst\+\argsecond\. @end macro @set fc Fran@,cois @mactwo{@value{fc},}
produces:
François+.
@verbatim
and macros do not mix; for instance, you can’t start
a verbatim block inside a macro and end it outside
(see @verbatim
: Literal Text). Starting any environment inside a macro
and ending it outside may or may not work, for that matter.
@macro
and @end macro
(likewise for @rmacro
) must be
correctly paired. For example, you cannot start a macro definition
within a macro, and then end that nested definition outside the macro.
In the makeinfo
implementation before Texinfo 5.0, ends of
lines from expansion of a @macro
definition did not end an
@-command line-delimited argument (@chapter
, @center
,
etc.). This is no longer the case. For example:
@macro twolines{} aaa bbb @end macro @center @twolines{}
In the current texi2any
, this is equivalent to:
@center aaa bbb
with just ‘aaa’ as the argument to @center
. In
the earlier implementation, it would have been parsed as this:
@center aaa bbb
The ‘@alias’ command defines a new command to be just like an existing one. This is useful for defining additional markup names, thus preserving additional semantic information in the input even though the output result may be the same.
Write the ‘@alias’ command on a line by itself, followed by the new command name, an equals sign, and the existing command name. Whitespace around the equals sign is optional and ignored if present. Thus:
@alias new = existing
For example, if your document contains citations for both books and
some other media (movies, for example), you might like to define a
macro @moviecite{}
that does the same thing as an ordinary
@cite{}
but conveys the extra semantic information as well.
You’d do this as follows:
@alias moviecite = cite
Macros do not always have the same effect as aliases, due to vagaries of argument parsing. Also, aliases are much simpler to define than macros. So the command is not redundant.
Unfortunately, it’s not possible to alias Texinfo environments; for
example, @alias lang=example
is an error.
Aliases must not be recursive, directly or indirectly.
It is not advisable to redefine any TeX primitive, plain TeX, or Texinfo command name as an alias. Unfortunately this is a very large set of names, and the possible resulting errors from TeX are unpredictable.
Alias identifiers should be the same as for macro names, that is alphanumerics and (except as the first character) ‘-’. However, with TeX, letters only should be used. So, we recommend using only letters.
You can also define a macro using the ‘@linemacro’ command.
The syntax for line macro definitions is similar to that for
@macro
.
However, the syntax for using a macro defined this way is different. The macro call uses the rest of the line, with arguments separated by spaces. The line macro facility is mainly intended to allow you to define commands that operate similarly to the builtin commands for providing definitions (see Definition Commands).
For example:
@linemacro defbuiltin {name, args} @defline {Builtin} \name\ \args\ @end linemacro
The above macro may be used as
@defblock @defbuiltin foo (bar) Explanation @end defblock
This produces the following result:
Explanation
Here the first argument is ‘foo’, and is substituted where ‘\name\’ appears in the macro body. Likewise, ‘(bar)’ is substituted for ‘\args\’.
You can include spaces in a macro argument by surrounding the argument by braces. Any pair of braces enclosing an argument is removed before substitution. Any empty arguments (including the last one) must be given as ‘{}’. Additionally, non-initial spaces may appear in the final argument in the argument list without surrounding braces (as in the example below).
If an argument line for a line macro ends in a ‘@’ character, then this character together with the following newline are included in a macro argument, and the following line in the input file is also used to get the arguments for the macro. Note that any substitution of the ‘@<newline>’ sequence must be in a valid context, such as a definition line (see Definition Command Continuation Lines).
Another example:
@linemacro deffunc {type, name, args} @findex \name\ @deftypeline {Func} {\type\} \name\ \args\ @end linemacro @defblock @deffunc {long int} F (int @var{one}, int @var{two}, @ int @var{three}, int @var{four}, int @var{five}) Explanation @end defblock
Note how braces are needed around ‘\type\’ in the
macro body in case the type
argument contains a space.
This example produces the output below and enters an index entry
for F
.
long int
F (int one, int two, int three, int four, int five)
Explanation
Line macros produce a whole number of lines of output in their expansion.
There may be better compatibility between the Texinfo processors
(texi2any
and TeX with texinfo.tex) for macros defined
with @linemacro
than for those defined with @macro
.
@definfoenclose
: Customized Highlighting ¶An @definfoenclose
command may be used to define a
highlighting command for online output formats. A command
defined using @definfoenclose
marks text by enclosing it in
strings that precede and follow the text.
In practice, there is little use for this command, and we do not
recommend you use it. Support for @definfoenclose
may be
removed in future releases of Texinfo.
Write a @definfoenclose
command at the beginning of a line
followed by three comma-separated arguments. The first argument to
@definfoenclose
is the @-command name (without the
@
); the second argument is the start delimiter string; and the
third argument is the end delimiter string. The latter two arguments
enclose the highlighted text in the output.
A delimiter string may contain spaces. Neither the start nor end delimiter is required. If you do not want a start delimiter but do want an end delimiter, you must follow the command name with two commas in a row; otherwise, the end delimiter string you intended will naturally be (mis)interpreted as the start delimiter string.
An enclosure command defined this way takes one argument in braces, since it is intended for new markup commands (see Marking Text, Words and Phrases).
For example, you can write:
@definfoenclose phoo,//,\\
near the beginning of a Texinfo file to define @phoo
as an Info
and HTML formatting command that inserts ‘//’ before and ‘\\’ after the
argument to @phoo
. You can then write @phoo{bar}
wherever you want ‘//bar\\’ highlighted in Info and HTML.
For TeX formatting, you could write
@iftex @alias phoo = i @end iftex
to define @phoo
as a command that causes TeX to typeset the
argument to @phoo
in italics.
Each definition applies to its own formatter: one for TeX, the
other for online formats. The TeX definitions need to be in
‘@iftex’. @definfoenclose
command need not be within
‘@ifinfo’ unless you want to use different definitions for
different online output formats. @definfoenclose
defined
commands have no effect in DocBook and LaTeX output, their
argument is output as-is. An @alias
could also be used
for these formats.
@definfoenclose
definitions must not be recursive, directly or
indirectly.
Texinfo macros (and its other text substitution facilities) work fine in straightforward cases. If your document needs unusually complex processing, however, their fragility and limitations can be a problem. In this case, you may want to use a different macro processor altogether, such as M4 (see M4) or CPP (see The C Preprocessor).
With one exception, Texinfo does not need to know whether its input is “original” source or preprocessed from some other source file. Therefore, you can arrange your build system to invoke whatever programs you like to handle macro expansion or other preprocessing needs. Texinfo does not offer built-in support for any particular preprocessor, since no one program seemed likely to suffice for the requirements of all documents.
The one exception is line numbers in error messages. In that case, the line number should refer to the original source file, whatever it may be. There’s a well-known mechanism for this: the so-called ‘#line’ directive. Texinfo supports this.
An input line such as this:
#line 100 "foo.ptexi"
indicates that the next line was line 100 of the file foo.ptexi, and so that’s what an error message should refer to. Both M4 (see Preprocessor features in GNU M4) and CPP (see Line Control in The C Preprocessor, and Preprocessor Output in The C Preprocessor) can generate such lines.
The texi2any
program recognizes these lines by default,
except within @verbatim
blocks (see @verbatim
: Literal Text).
Their recognition can be turned off completely with
CPP_LINE_DIRECTIVES
(see Other Customization Variables),
though there is normally no reason to do so.
For those few programs (M4, CPP, Texinfo) which need to document
‘#line’ directives and therefore have examples which would
otherwise match the pattern, the command @hashchar{}
can be
used (see Inserting ‘#’ with @hashchar{}
). The example line above looks
like this in the source for this manual:
@hashchar{}line 100 "foo.ptexi"
The @hashchar
command was added to Texinfo in 2013. If you
don’t want to rely on it, you can also use @set
and
@value
to insert the literal ‘#’:
@set hash # @value{hash}line 1 "example.c"
Or, if suitable, a @verbatim
environment can be used instead
of @example
. As mentioned above, #line
-recognition is
disabled inside verbatim blocks.
As mentioned, texi2any
recognizes the ‘#line’
directives described in the previous section. However,
texinfo.tex does not and cannot. Therefore, such a line will
be incorrectly typeset verbatim if TeX sees it. The solution is to
use texi2any
’s macro expansion options before running
TeX. There are three approaches:
texi2dvi
or its variants (see Format with texi2dvi
), you can pass -E and texi2dvi
will run texi2any
first to expand macros and eliminate
‘#line’.
texi2any
, you can specify --no-ifinfo
--iftex -E somefile.out, and then give somefile.out to
texi2dvi
in a separate command.
texi2any
will then call
texi2dvi -E
.
One last caveat regarding use with TeX: since the #line
directives are not recognized, the line numbers emitted by the
@errormsg{}
command (see Conditional Commands), or by
TeX itself, are the (incorrect) line numbers from the derived file
which TeX is reading, rather than the preprocessor-specified line
numbers.
Syntax details for the ‘#line’ directive: the ‘#’ character can be preceded or followed by whitespace, the word ‘line’ is optional, and the file name can be followed by a whitespace-separated list of integers (these are so-called “flags” output by CPP in some cases). For those who like to know the gory details, the actual (Perl) regular expression which is matched is this:
/^\s*#\s*(line)? (\d+)(( "([^"]+)")(\s+\d+)*)?\s*$/
As far as we’ve been able to tell, the trailing integer flags only occur in conjunction with a file name, so that is reflected in the regular expression.
As an example, the following is a syntactically valid ‘#line’ directive, meaning line 1 of /usr/include/stdio.h:
# 1 "/usr/include/stdio.h" 2 3 4
Unfortunately, the quoted file name (‘"..."’) has to be optional, because M4 (especially) can often generate ‘#line’ directives within a single file. Since the ‘line’ is also optional, the result is that lines might match which you wouldn’t expect, e.g.,
# 1
The possible solutions are described above (see ‘#line’ Directive).
When a Texinfo processor sees an @include
command in a Texinfo
file, it processes the contents of the file named by the
@include
and incorporates them into the output files being
created. Include files thus let you keep a single large document as a
collection of conveniently small parts.
To include another file within a Texinfo file, write the
@include
command at the beginning of a line and follow it on
the same line by the name of a file to be included. For example:
@include buffers.texi
@value{var}
references are expanded on the @include
line. Other than that, the only @-commands allowed are @@
,
@{
, @}
and associated @-commands such as
@atchar{}
.
An included file should simply be a segment of text that you expect to
be included as is into the overall or outer Texinfo file; it
should not contain the standard beginning and end parts of a Texinfo
file. In particular, you should not start an included file with a
line saying ‘\input texinfo’; if you do, that text is inserted
into the output file literally. Likewise, you should not end an
included file with a @bye
command; nothing after @bye
is formatted.
In the long-ago past, you were required to write an
@setfilename
line at the beginning of an included file, but no
longer. Now, it does not matter whether you write such a line. If an
@setfilename
line exists in an included file, it is ignored.
GNU Emacs Texinfo mode provides texinfo-multiple-files-update
to update node pointers and master menu with multiple include files.
See Update Outer File and Include Files.
@include
¶Here is an example of an outer Texinfo file with @include
files
within it:
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- @settitle Include Example
@node Top @top Include Example
@include foo.texi @include bar.texi @include concept-index.texi @bye
An included file, such as foo.texi, might look like this:
@node First @chapter First Chapter Contents of first chapter ...
The full contents of concept-index.texi might be as simple as this:
@node Concept Index @unnumbered Concept Index @printindex cp
The outer Texinfo source file for The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
Manual is named elisp.texi. This outer file
has already contained a master menu with 417 entries and a list of
41 @include
files.
@verbatiminclude
file: Include a File Verbatim ¶You can include the exact contents of a file in the document with the
@verbatiminclude
command:
@verbatiminclude filename
The contents of filename is printed in a verbatim environment
(see @verbatim
: Literal Text). Generally, the file is printed exactly
as it is, with all special characters and white space retained. No
indentation is added; if you want indentation, enclose the
@verbatiminclude
within @example
(see @example
: Example Text).
@value{var}
references are expanded on the
@verbatiminclude
line. This makes it possible to
include files in other directories within a distribution,
for instance:
@verbatiminclude @value{top_srcdir}/NEWS
(You still have to get top_srcdir
defined in the
first place.)
Other than that, the only @-commands allowed are @@
,
@{
, @}
and associated @-commands such as
@atchar{}
.
For a method on printing the file contents in a smaller font size, see
the end of the section on @verbatim
.
Running the texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
command is the
simplest way to create printable output. These commands are installed
as part of the Texinfo package.
In more detail, typesetting and printing a Texinfo file is a multi-step
process in which you use the TeX program to create a file for printing
(called a DVI or PDF file), and then print the file. Optionally,
you may also create indices using the texindex
command
after first running TeX; and then you must run TeX again.
texi2dvi
takes care of all of this, running TeX and
texindex
as needed (see Format with texi2dvi
).
When you use the shell commands, you can either work directly in the operating system shell or work within a shell inside GNU Emacs (or some other computing environment). You can give formatting and printing commands from a shell within GNU Emacs, just like any other shell command. To create a shell within Emacs, type M-x shell (see Shell in The GNU Emacs Manual). If you are using GNU Emacs, you can also use commands provided by Texinfo mode instead of shell commands. See Formatting and Printing with Emacs.
For specifing details of the printed output such as paper size, see Global Document Commands.
texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
tex
/texindex
lpr
from ShellThe typesetting program called TeX is used to format a Texinfo document for printable output. TeX is a very powerful typesetting program and, when used correctly, does an exceptionally good job. It is not included in the Texinfo package, being a vast suite of software in itself.
TeX is a document formatter that is used by the FSF for its documentation. It is the easiest way to get printed output (e.g., PDF and PostScript) for Texinfo manuals. TeX is freely redistributable, and you can get it over the Internet or on physical media. See http://tug.org/texlive.
texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
¶The texi2dvi
program takes care of all the steps for producing
a TeX DVI file from a Texinfo document. Similarly, texi2pdf
produces a PDF file9.
To run texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
on an input file
foo.texi, do this (where ‘prompt$ ’ is your shell prompt):
prompt$ texi2dvi foo.texi prompt$ texi2pdf foo.texi
As shown in this example, the file names given to texi2dvi
and
texi2pdf
must include any extension, such as ‘.texi’.
For a list of all the options, run ‘texi2dvi --help’. Some of the options are discussed below.
With the --pdf option, texi2dvi
produces PDF output
instead of DVI, by running pdftex
instead of tex
. Alternatively, the command
texi2pdf
is an abbreviation for running ‘texi2dvi
--pdf’. The command pdftexi2dvi
is also provided as a
convenience for AUC-TeX (see AUC-TeX), as it
prefers to merely prepend ‘pdf’ to DVI producing tools to have
PDF producing tools.
With the --dvipdf option, texi2dvi
produces PDF
output by running TeX and then a DVI-to-PDF program: if the
DVIPDF
environment variable is set, that value is used, else the
first program extant among dvipdfmx
, dvipdfm
,
dvipdf
, dvi2pdf
, dvitopdf
. This method generally
supports CJK typesetting better than pdftex
.
With the --ps option, texi2dvi
produces PostScript
instead of DVI, by running tex
and then dvips
(see Dvips). (Or the value of the DVIPS
environment variable, if set.)
texi2dvi
can also be used to process LaTeX files.
Normally texi2dvi
is able to guess the input file language
by its contents and file name extension; however, if it guesses wrong
you can explicitly specify the input language using
--language=lang command line option, where lang
is either ‘latex’ or ‘texinfo’.
One useful option to texi2dvi
is ‘--command=cmd’.
This inserts cmd on a line by itself at the start of the file
in a temporary copy of the input file, before
running TeX. With this, you can specify different printing
formats, such as @smallbook
(see @smallbook
: Printing “Small” Books),
@afourpaper
(see Printing on A4 Paper), or @pagesizes
(see @pagesizes
[width][, height]: Custom Page Sizes), without actually changing the document
source. (You can also do this on a site-wide basis with
texinfo.cnf; see Preparing for TeX).
The option -E (equivalently, -e and
--expand) does Texinfo macro expansion using
texi2any
instead of the TeX implementation (see Macro Details and Caveats). Each implementation has its own limitations and
advantages.
texi2dvi
takes the --build=mode option to
specify where the TeX compilation takes place, and, as a
consequence, how auxiliary files are treated. The build mode
can also be set using the environment variable
TEXI2DVI_BUILD_MODE
. The valid values for mode are:
Compile in the current directory, leaving all the auxiliary files around. This is the traditional TeX use.
Compile in a local *.t2d
directory, where the auxiliary files
are left. Output files are copied back to the original file.
Using the ‘tidy’ mode brings several advantages:
*.t2d
directories are stored there.
On the other hand, because ‘tidy’ compilation takes place in another
directory, occasionally TeX won’t be able to find some files (e.g., when
using \graphicspath
): in that case, use -I to specify the
additional directories to consider.
Same as ‘tidy’, but remove the auxiliary directory afterwards. Every compilation therefore requires the full cycle.
texi2dvi
will use etex
if
it is available, because it runs faster in some cases, and
provides additional tracing information when debugging
texinfo.tex. Nevertheless, this extended version of TeX is
not required, and the DVI output is identical.
texi2dvi
attempts to detect auxiliary files output by TeX,
either by using the -recorder option, or by scanning for
‘\openout’ in the log file that a run of TeX produces. You may
control how texi2dvi
does this with the TEXI2DVI_USE_RECORDER
environment variable. Valid values are:
use the -recorder option, no checks.
scan for ‘\openout’ in the log file, no checks.
check whether -recorder option is supported, and if yes use it, otherwise check for tracing ‘\openout’ in the log file is supported, and if yes use it, else it is an error.
same as ‘yesmaybe’, except that the ‘\openout’ trace in log file is checked first.
The default is ‘nomaybe’. This environment variable is provided for troubleshooting purposes, and may change or disappear in the future.
tex
/texindex
¶You can do the basic formatting of a Texinfo file with the shell
command tex
followed by the name of the Texinfo file. For
example:
tex foo.texi
TeX will produce a DVI file as well as several auxiliary files containing information for indices, cross-references, etc. The DVI file (for DeVice Independent file) can be printed on virtually any device, perhaps after a further conversion (see the previous section).
The tex
formatting command itself does not sort the indices; it
writes an output file of unsorted index data. To generate a printed
index after running the tex
command, you first need a sorted
index to work from. The texindex
command sorts indices.
(texi2dvi
, described in the previous section, runs
tex
and texindex
as necessary.)
tex
outputs unsorted index files under names following a
standard convention: the name of your main input file with any
‘.texi’ or similar extension replaced by the two letter index
name. For example, the raw index output files for the input file
foo.texi would be, by default, foo.cp, foo.vr,
foo.fn, foo.tp, foo.pg and foo.ky. Those
are exactly the arguments to give to texindex
.
Instead of specifying all the unsorted index file names explicitly, it’s typical to use ‘??’ as shell wildcards and give the command in this form:
texindex foo.??
This command will run texindex
on all the unsorted index files,
including any two letter indices that you have defined yourself using
@defindex
or @defcodeindex
. You can safely run
‘texindex foo.??’ even if there are files with two letter
extensions that are not index files, such as ‘foo.el’. The
texindex
command reports but otherwise ignores such files.
For each file specified, texindex
generates a sorted index file
whose name is made by appending ‘s’ to the input file name; for
example, foo.cps is made from foo.cp. The
@printindex
command looks for a file with that name
(see Printing Indices and Menus). TeX does not read the raw
index output file, and texindex
does not alter it.
After you have sorted the indices, you need to rerun tex
on the
Texinfo file. This regenerates the output file, this time with
up-to-date index entries.
Finally, you may need to run tex
one more time, to get the page
numbers in the cross-references correct.
To summarize, this is a five-step process. (Alternatively, it’s a
one-step process: run texi2dvi
; see the previous section.)
tex
on your Texinfo file. This generates a DVI file (with
undefined cross-references and no indices), and the raw index files
(with two letter extensions).
texindex
on the raw index files. This creates the
corresponding sorted index files (with three letter extensions).
tex
again on your Texinfo file. This regenerates the DVI
file, this time with indices and defined cross-references, but with
page numbers for the cross-references from the previous run, generally
incorrect.
texindex
.
tex
one last time. This time the correct page numbers are
written for the cross-references.
To generate PDF, you can run the pdftex
program instead of plain tex
. That is, run pdftex
foo.texi
instead of ‘tex foo.texi’ in the examples above.
Sometimes you may wish to print a document while you know it is
incomplete, or to print just one chapter of a document. In such a
case, the usual auxiliary files that TeX creates and warnings
TeX gives about undefined cross-references are just nuisances. You
can avoid them with the @novalidate
command, which you must
give before any sectioning or cross-reference commands.
Thus, the beginning of your file would look approximately like this:
\input texinfo @novalidate ...
@novalidate
also turns off validation in
texi2any
, just like its --no-validate
option
(see Invoking texi2any
from a Shell).
Furthermore, you need not run texindex
each time after you run
tex
. The tex
formatting command simply uses whatever
sorted index files happen to exist from a previous use of
texindex
. If those are out of date, that is usually ok while
you are creating or debugging a document.
texindex
¶In Texinfo version 6, released in 2015, the texindex
program
was completely reimplemented. The principal functional difference is
that index entries beginning with a left brace or right brace
(‘{’ resp. ‘}’) can work properly. For example, these
simple index entries are processed correctly, including the “index
initial” shown in the index:
@cindex @{ @cindex @} ... @printindex cp
Although not a matter of functionality, readers may be interested to
know that the new texindex
is a literate program
(https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Literate_programming) using
Texinfo for documentation and (portable) awk
for code. A
single source file, texindex/ti.twjr in this case, produces the
runnable program, a printable document, and an online document.
The system is called TexiWeb Jr. and was created by Arnold
Robbins, who also wrote the new texindex
. Not
coincidentally, he is also the long-time maintainer of gawk
(GNU Awk, see The GNU Awk User’s Guide). The file
texindex/Makefile.am shows example usage of the system.
lpr
from Shell ¶The way to print a DVI file depends on your system installation. Two common ones are ‘dvips foo.dvi -o’ to make a PostScript file first and then print that, and ‘lpr -d foo.dvi’ to print a DVI file directly.
For example, the following commands will (probably) suffice to sort
the indices, format, and print this manual using the texi2dvi
shell script (see Format with texi2dvi
).
texi2dvi texinfo.texi dvips texinfo.dvi -o lpr texinfo.ps
Depending on the lpr
setup on your machine, you might be able to
combine the last two steps into lpr -d texinfo.dvi
.
You can also generate a PDF file by running texi2dvi
instead of
texi2dvi
; a PDF is often directly printable. Or you can
generate a PCL file by using dvilj
instead of dvips
, if
you have a printer that prefers that format.
lpr
is a standard program on Unix systems, but it is usually
absent on MS-DOS/MS-Windows. If so, just create a PostScript or PDF
or PCL file, whatever is most convenient, and print that in the usual
way for your machine (e.g., by sending to the appropriate port,
usually ‘PRN’).
TeX needs to find the texinfo.tex file that the ‘\input texinfo’ command on the first line reads. The texinfo.tex file tells TeX how to handle @-commands; it is included in all standard GNU distributions. The latest version released for general use is available from the usual GNU servers and mirrors:
The latest development version is available from the Texinfo source repository:
texinfo.tex is essentially a standalone file, so, if you need or want to try a newer version than came with your system, it nearly always suffices to download it and put it anywhere that TeX will find it. You can replace any existing texinfo.tex with a newer version (of course saving the original in case of disaster).
Also, you should install epsf.tex, if it is not already installed
from another distribution. More details are at the end of the description
of the @image
command (see Inserting Images).
To use quotation marks other than those used in English, you’ll need to have the European Computer Modern fonts (e.g., ecrm1000) and (for PDF output) CM-Super fonts (see Inserting Quotation Marks).
To use the @euro
command, you’ll need the ‘feym*’ fonts
(e.g., feymr10). See @euro
(€): Euro Currency Symbol.
All of the above files should be installed by default in a reasonable TeX installation.
Optionally, you may create a file texinfo.cnf for site configuration. When processing a Texinfo file, TeX looks for this file in its search path, which includes the current directory and standard installation directories. You can use this file for local conventions. For example, if texinfo.cnf contains the line ‘@afourpaper’ (see Printing on A4 Paper), then all Texinfo documents will be processed with that page size in effect. If you have nothing to put in texinfo.cnf, you do not need to create it.
You can set the TEXINPUTS
environment variable
to allow TeX to find texinfo.cnf.
(This also works for texinfo.tex and any other file TeX
might read). For example, if you are using a Bourne shell-compatible shell
(sh
, bash
, ksh
, …), your .profile file
could contain the lines:
TEXINPUTS=.:/home/me/mylib: export TEXINPUTS
These settings would cause TeX first to look for an \input file in the current directory, indicated by the ‘.’, then in a hypothetical user ‘me’’s mylib directory, and finally in the system directories. (A leading, trailing, or doubled ‘:’ indicates searching the system directories at that point.)
TeX is sometimes unable to typeset a line within the normal margins. This most often occurs when TeX comes upon what it interprets as a long word that it cannot hyphenate, such as an electronic mail network address or a very long identifier. When this happens, TeX prints an error message like this:
Overfull @hbox (20.76302pt too wide)
(In TeX, lines are in “horizontal boxes”, hence the term, “hbox”. ‘@hbox’ is a TeX primitive not used in the Texinfo language.)
TeX also provides the line number in the Texinfo source file and the text of the offending line, which is marked at all the places that TeX considered hyphenation. See Debugging with TeX, for more information about typesetting errors.
If the Texinfo file has an overfull hbox, you can rewrite the sentence so the overfull hbox does not occur, or you can decide to leave it. A small excursion into the right margin often does not matter and may not even be noticeable.
If you have many overfull boxes and/or an antipathy to rewriting, you can coerce TeX into greatly increasing the allowable interword spacing, thus (if you’re lucky) avoiding many of the bad line breaks, like this:
@tex \global\emergencystretch = .9\hsize @end tex
(You should adjust the fraction as needed.) This huge value for
\emergencystretch
cannot be the default, since then the typeset
output would generally be of noticeably lower quality; its default
value is ‘.15\hsize’. \hsize
is the TeX dimension
containing the current line width.
For any overfull boxes you do have, TeX will print a large, ugly, black rectangle beside the line that contains the overfull hbox unless told otherwise. This is so you will notice the location of the problem if you are correcting a draft.
To prevent such a monstrosity from marring your final printout, write
the following in the beginning of the Texinfo file on a line of its own,
before the @titlepage
command:
@finalout
texi2any
: The Translator for Texinfo ¶texi2any
is the generic translator for Texinfo that can
produce different output formats and is highly customizable. It
supports these formats:
Info (by default, or with --info), HTML (with --html), EPUB 3 (with --epub3), plain text (with --plaintext), LaTeX (with --latex), DocBook (with --docbook), Texinfo XML (with --xml).
makeinfo
is an alias for texi2any
. By default,
both texi2any
and makeinfo
generate Info output;
indeed, there are no differences in behavior based on the name.
Beside these default formats, command line options to
texi2any
can change many aspects of the output. Beyond
that, initialization files provide even more control over the final
output—nearly anything not specified in the Texinfo input file.
Initialization files are written in Perl, like the main program, and
anything which can be specified on the command line can also be
specified within a initialization file.
texi2any
from a Shelltexi2any
texi2any
Printed Outputpod2texi
: Convert Pod to Texinfotexi2html
: Ancestor of texi2any
texi2any
from a Shell ¶To process a Texinfo file, invoke texi2any
followed by the name
of the Texinfo file. Also select the format you want to output with the
appropriate command line option (default is Info). Thus, to create
the Info file for Bison, type the following to the shell:
texi2any --info bison.texi
You can specify more than one input file name; each is processed in turn. If an input file name is ‘-’, standard input is read.
The texi2any
program accepts many options. Perhaps the
most basic are those that change the output format. By default,
texi2any
outputs Info.
Each command line option is either a long name preceded by ‘--’ or a single letter preceded by ‘-’. You can use abbreviations for the long option names as long as they are unique.
For example, you could use the following shell command to create an Info file for bison.texi in which lines are filled to only 68 columns:
texi2any --fill-column=68 bison.texi
You can write two or more options in sequence, like this:
texi2any --no-split --fill-column=70 ...
(This would keep the Info file together as one possibly very long file and would also set the fill column to 70.)
The options are (approximately in alphabetical order):
--commands-in-node-names
¶This option now does nothing, but remains for compatibility. (It used
to ensure that @-commands in node names were expanded throughout the
document, especially @value
. This is now done by default.)
--conf-dir=dir
¶Prepend dir to the directory search list for finding customization files that may be loaded with --init-file (see below). The dir value can be a single directory, or a list of several directories separated by the usual path separator character (‘:’ on Unix-like systems, ‘;’ on Windows).
--css-include=file
¶When producing HTML, literally include the contents of file, which should contain Cascading Style Sheets specifications, in the ‘<style>’ block of the HTML output. If file is ‘-’, read standard input. See HTML CSS.
--css-ref=url
¶When producing HTML, add a ‘<link>’ tag to the output which references a cascading style sheet at url. This allows using standalone style sheets.
-D var
¶-D 'var value'
Cause the Texinfo variable var to be defined. This is
equivalent to @set var
in the Texinfo file
(see Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
).
The argument to the option is always one word to the shell; if it
contains internal whitespace, the first word is taken as the variable
name and the remainder as the value. For example, -D 'myvar
someval'
is equivalent to @set myvar someval
.
--docbook
¶Generate DocBook output (rather than Info).
--document-language=lang
¶Use lang to translate Texinfo keywords which end up in the
output document. The default is the locale specified by the
@documentlanguage
command if there is one, otherwise English
(see @documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document Language).
--dvi
¶Generate a TeX DVI file using texi2dvi
, rather than Info
(see texi2any
Printed Output).
--dvipdf
¶Generate a PDF file using texi2dvi --dvipdf
, rather than
Info (see texi2any
Printed Output).
--enable-encoding
¶--disable-encoding
By default, or with --enable-encoding, output accented and special characters in Info and plain text output based on the document encoding. With --disable-encoding, 7-bit ASCII transliterations are output. Also obeyed in other output formats for index keys sorting and for some plain text output.
--epub3
¶Generate EPUB 3 output.
--error-limit=limit
¶-e limit
Report limit errors before aborting (on the assumption that continuing would be useless); default 100.
--fill-column=width
¶-f width
Specify the maximum number of columns in a line; this is the right-hand edge of a line. Paragraphs that are filled will be filled to this width. (Filling is the process of breaking up and connecting lines so that lines are the same length as or shorter than the number specified as the fill column. Lines are broken between words.) The default value is 72.
--footnote-style=style
¶-s style
Set the footnote style to style: either ‘end’ for the end
node style (the default) or ‘separate’ for the separate node
style. The value set by this option overrides the value set in a
Texinfo file by a @footnotestyle
command (see Footnote Styles).
In Info, when the footnote style is ‘separate’, texi2any
makes a
new node containing the footnotes found in the current node. When the
footnote style is ‘end’, texi2any
places the footnote
references at the end of the current node.
In HTML, when the footnote style is ‘end’, or if the output is not split, footnotes are put at the end of the output. If set to ‘separate’, and the output is split, they are placed in a separate file.
--force
¶-F
Ordinarily, if the input file has errors, the output files are not created. With this option, they are preserved.
--help
¶-h
Print a message with available options and basic usage, then exit successfully.
--html
¶Generate HTML output (rather than Info). By default, the HTML output is split into one output file per node, and the split output is written into a subdirectory based on the name of the input file. See Generating HTML.
-I dir
¶Append dir to the directory search list for finding files that
are included using the @include
command. By default,
texi2any
searches only the current directory. If dir is
not given, the current directory is appended. The dir value
can be a single directory or a list of several directories separated
by the usual path separator character (‘:’ on Unix-like systems,
‘;’ on Windows).
--ifdocbook
¶--ifhtml
--ifinfo
--iflatex
--ifplaintext
--iftex
--ifxml
For the given format, process ‘@ifformat’ and ‘@format’ commands, and do not process ‘@ifnotformat’, regardless of the format being output. For instance, if --iftex is given, then ‘@iftex’ and ‘@tex’ blocks will be read, and ‘@ifnottex’ blocks will be ignored.
--no-ifdocbook
¶--no-ifhtml
--no-ifinfo
--no-iflatex
--no-ifplaintext
--no-iftex
--no-ifxml
For the given format, do not process ‘@ifformat’ and ‘@format’ commands, and do process ‘@ifnotformat’, regardless of the format being output. For instance, if --no-ifhtml is given, then ‘@ifhtml’ and ‘@html’ blocks will not be read, and ‘@ifnothtml’ blocks will be.
--info
¶Generate Info output. By default, if the output file contains more
than about 300,000 bytes, it is split into shorter subfiles of about
that size. The name of the output file and any subfiles is determined
by the input file name, or by @setfilename
, if present
(see Setting the Output File Name). See Tag Files and Split Files.
--init-file=file
¶Load file as code to modify the behavior and output of the
generated manual. It is customary to use the .pm
or the
.init
extensions for these customization files, but that is not
enforced; the file name can be anything. The
--conf-dir option (see above) can be used to add to the list
of directories in which these customization files are searched for.
--internal-links=file
¶In HTML mode, output a tab-separated file containing three columns: the internal link to an indexed item or item in the table of contents, the name of the index (or table of contents) in which it occurs, and the term which was indexed or entered. The items are in the natural sorting order for the given element. This dump can be useful for post-processors.
--latex
¶Generate LaTeX output.
--macro-expand=file
¶-E file
Output the Texinfo source, with all Texinfo macros expanded, to
file. Normally, the result of macro expansion is used
internally by texi2any
and then discarded.
--no-headers
¶Do not include menus or node separator lines in the output.
When generating Info, this is the same as using --plaintext, resulting in a simple plain text file. Furthermore, output is to standard output unless overridden with -o. (This behavior is for backward compatibility.)
When generating HTML, and output is split, also output navigation links only at the beginning of each file. If output is not split, do not include navigation links at the top of each node at all. See Generating HTML.
--node-files
¶--no-node-files
With --node-files, when generating HTML, create redirection files for anchors and any nodes not already output with the file name corresponding to the node name (see HTML Cross-reference Node Name Expansion). This makes it possible for section- and chapter-level cross-manual references to succeed (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf).
If the output is split, this is enabled by default. If the output is not split, --node-files enables the creation of the redirection files, in addition to the monolithic main output file. --no-node-files suppresses the creation of redirection files in any case. This option has no effect with any output format other than HTML. See Generating HTML.
--no-validate
¶--no-pointer-validate
Suppress the pointer-validation phase of texi2any
—a dangerous
thing to do. This can also be done with the @novalidate
command (see Formatting Partial Documents).
If you do not suppress pointer validation, texi2any
will check
the validity of cross-references and menu entries in the Texinfo file, as
well as node pointers if they are given explicitly.
--no-warn
¶Suppress warning messages (but not error messages).
--number-footnotes
¶--no-number-footnotes
With --no-number-footnotes, suppress automatic footnote numbering. By default, footnotes are numbered sequentially within a node, i.e., the current footnote number is reset to 1 at the start of each node.
--number-sections
¶--no-number-sections
With --number-sections (the default), output chapter,
section, and appendix numbers as in printed manuals. This works only
with hierarchically structured manuals. You should specify
--no-number-sections
if your manual is not normally structured.
--output=file
¶-o file
Specify that the output should be directed to file. This
overrides any file name specified in a @setfilename
command
found in the Texinfo source. If neither @setfilename
nor this
option are specified, the input file name is used to determine the
output name. See Setting the Output File Name.
If file is ‘-’, output goes to standard output and ‘--no-split’ is implied.
If file is a directory or ends with a ‘/’ the usual rules
are used to determine the output file name (namely, use
@setfilename
or the input file name) but the files are written
to the file directory. For example, ‘texi2any -o bar/
foo.texi’, with or without --no-split, will write
bar/foo.info, and possibly other files, under bar/.
When generating HTML and output is split, file is used as the name for the directory into which all files are written. For example, ‘texi2any -o bar --html foo.texi’ will write bar/index.html, among other files.
When generating EPUB a container directory for the files and directories needed for the EPUB format is created, as well as the EPUB output file. If file corresponds to a directory, the container directory is placed within file. The EPUB output file is never put in this directory. If file corresponds to a file, it is used for the EPUB output file name.
--output-indent=val
¶This option now does nothing, but remains for compatibility. (It used to alter indentation in XML/DocBook output.)
-P path
¶Prepend path to the directory search list for @include
.
If path is not given, the current directory is prepended. See
‘-I’ above.
--paragraph-indent=indent
¶-p indent
Set the paragraph indentation style to indent. The value set by
this option overrides the value set in a Texinfo file by an
@paragraphindent
command (see @paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation).
The value of indent is interpreted as follows:
Preserve any existing indentation (or lack thereof) at the beginnings of paragraphs.
Delete any existing indentation.
Indent each paragraph by num spaces.
The default is to indent by two spaces, except for paragraphs following a section heading, which are not indented.
--pdf
¶Generate a PDF file using texi2dvi --pdf
, rather than Info
(see texi2any
Printed Output).
--plaintext
¶Output a plain text file (rather than Info): do not include menus or node separator lines in the output. This results in a straightforward plain text file that you can (for example) send in email without complications, or include in a distribution (for example, an INSTALL file).
With this option the output goes to standard output by default, instead
of to a file with a name based on the input file name or @setfilename
;
this can be overridden with -o.
--ps
¶Generate a PostScript file using texi2dvi --ps
, rather than
Info (see texi2any
Printed Output).
--set-customization-variable var=value
¶-c var=value
Set the customization variable var to value. The =
is optional, but both var and value must be quoted to the
shell as necessary so the result is a single word. Many aspects of
texi2any
behavior and output may be controlled by
customization variables, beyond what can be set in the document by
@-commands and with other command line switches. See Customization Variables.
--split=how
¶--no-split
When generating Info, by default large output files are split into smaller subfiles, of approximately 300k bytes. When generating HTML, by default each output file contains one node (see Generating HTML). --no-split suppresses this splitting of the output.
Alternatively, --split=how may be used to specify at which level the HTML output should be split. The possible values for how are:
The output is split at @chapter
and other sectioning
@-commands at this level (@appendix
, etc.).
The output is split at @section
and similar.
The output is split at every node. This is the default.
Plain text output can be split similarly to HTML. This may be useful for extracting sections from a Texinfo document and making them available as separate files.
--split-size=num
¶Keep Info files to at most num characters if possible; default is 300,000. (However, a single node will never be split across Info files.)
--transliterate-file-names
¶Enable transliteration of non-ASCII characters in node names for the purpose of file name creation. See HTML Cross-reference 8-bit Character Expansion.
-U var
Cause var to be undefined. This is equivalent to @clear
var
in the Texinfo file (see Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
).
--verbose
¶Cause texi2any
to display messages saying what it is doing.
Normally, texi2any
only outputs messages if there are errors or
warnings.
--version
¶-V
Print the version number, then exit successfully.
--Xopt str
¶Pass str (a single shell word) to texi2dvi
; may be
repeated (see texi2any
Printed Output).
--xml
¶Generate Texinfo XML output (rather than Info).
texi2any
¶texi2any
also reads the environment variable
TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
to determine the output format, if not
overridden by a command line option. The value should be one of:
docbook dvi dvipdf epub3 html info latex pdf plaintext ps xml
If not set or otherwise specified, Info output is the default.
TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
may take some other special values, which do
not correspond to any command-line settable output format
(see Customization Variables and Options).
The customization variable of the same name is also read; if set, that overrides an environment variable setting, but not a command-line option. See Customization Variables and Options.
You can control texi2any
’s use of Perl extension modules
by setting the TEXINFO_XS
environment variable. These modules
are compiled native code that the interpreted Perl code can use.
Ideally, these extension modules should just work, and the only noticeable
difference they should make is that texi2any
finishes running
sooner. However, you can use this environment variable for the purposes
of troubleshooting: for example, if you have problems with the output of
texi2any
varying depending on whether the extension modules are
in use.
The following values of TEXINFO_XS
are recognized by
texi2any
:
The default behavior. Try to load extension modules, and silently fall back to the interpreted Perl implementations if this fails.
Try to load extension modules, and if this fails, give a warning message before falling back to the interpreted Perl implementations.
Try to load extension modules, printing many messages while doing so.
Do not use extension modules.
Set TEXINFO_XS_PARSER
to ‘0’ to disable the use of the
native code implementation of the parser module. This is the part of
texi2any
that converts Texinfo input into an internal tree
format used for further processing into output formats. This may
be useful for working around bugs or incompatibilities between the
native code implementation and the implementation in pure Perl code.
texi2any
Printed Output ¶To justify the name Texinfo-to-any, texi2any
has
basic support for creating printed output in the various formats:
TeX DVI, PDF, and PostScript. This is done via the simple method
of executing the texi2dvi
program when those output formats
are requested, after checking the validity of the input to give users
the benefit of texi2any
’s error checking. If you don’t want
such error checking, perhaps because your manual plays advanced TeX
tricks together with texinfo.tex, just invoke
texi2dvi
directly.
The output format options for this are --dvi,
--dvipdf, --pdf, and --ps. See Format with texi2dvi
, for more details on these options and general
texi2dvi
operation. In addition, the --verbose,
--silent, and --quiet options are passed on if
specified; the -I and -o options are likewise passed
on with their arguments, and --debug without its argument.
The only option remaining that is related to the texi2dvi
invocation is --Xopt. Here, just the argument is passed on
and multiple --Xopt options accumulate. This provides a way
to construct an arbitrary command line for texi2dvi
. For
example, running
texi2any --Xopt -t --Xopt @a4paper --pdf foo.texi
is equivalent to running
texi2dvi -t @a4paper --pdf foo.texi
except for the validity check.
Although one might wish that other options to texi2any
would
take effect, they don’t. For example, running ‘texi2any
--no-number-sections --dvi foo.texi’ still results in a DVI file with
numbered sections. (Perhaps this could be improved in the future, if
requests are received.)
The actual name of the command that is invoked is specified by the
TEXI2DVI
customization variable (see Other Customization Variables). As you might guess, the default is ‘texi2dvi’.
texi2any
itself does not generate any normal output when it
invokes texi2dvi
, only diagnostic messages.
Warning: These customization variable names and meanings may change in any Texinfo release. We always try to avoid incompatible changes, but we cannot absolutely promise, since needs change over time.
Many aspects of the behavior and output of texi2any
may be
modified by modifying so-called customization variables. These
fall into a few general categories:
@documentlanguage
.
SPLIT
is associated with the
--split command-line option, and TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
allows specifying the output format.
Customization variables may set on the command line using
--set-customization-variable 'var value'
(quoting
the variable/value pair to the shell) or
--set-customization-variable var=value
(using
=
). A special value is ‘undef’, which sets the
variable to this special “undefined” Perl value.
The sections below give the details for each of these.
latex2html
Customization Variablestex4ht
Customization VariablesEach of the following @-commands has an associated customization
variable with the same name (minus the leading @
):
@afivepaper @afourpaper @afourlatex @afourwide @allowcodebreaks @bsixpaper @contents @clickstyle @codequotebacktick @codequoteundirected @deftypefnnewline @documentdescription @documentencoding @documentlanguage @evenfooting @evenfootingmarks @evenheading @evenheadingmarks @everyfooting @everyfootingmarks @everyheading @everyheadingmarks @exampleindent @firstparagraphindent @fonttextsize @footnotestyle @frenchspacing @headings @kbdinputstyle @microtype @novalidate @oddfooting @oddfootingmarks @oddheading @oddheadingmarks @pagesizes @paragraphindent @setfilename @setchapternewpage @shortcontents @smallbook @summarycontents @urefbreakstyle @xrefautomaticsectiontitle
Setting such a customization variable to a value ‘foo’ is similar
to executing @cmd foo
. It is not exactly the same,
though, since any side effects of parsing the Texinfo source are not
redone. Also, some variables do not take Texinfo code when generating
particular formats, but an argument that is already formatted. This
is the case, for example, for HTML for documentdescription
.
Note that if texi2any
is invoked to process the file with
TeX (e.g., with the --pdf option), then these customization
variables may not be passed on to TeX.
The following table gives the customization variables associated with
some command line options. See Invoking texi2any
from a Shell, for the
meaning of the options.
Setting such a customization variable to a value ‘foo’ is
essentially the same as specifying the --opt=foo
if the
option takes an argument, or --opt
if not.
In addition, the customization variable TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
allows specifying what texi2any
outputs, either one of the usual
output formats that can be specified with options, or various other
forms:
These correspond to the command-line options (and
TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
environment variable values) of the same
name. See Invoking texi2any
from a Shell.
Instead of generating a regular output format, output a text representation of the tree obtained by parsing the input texinfo document.
Do only Texinfo source parsing; there is no output.
Output the Texinfo source with all the macros, @include
and
@value{}
expanded. This is similar to setting
--macro-expand, but instead of being output in addition to
the normal conversion, output of Texinfo is the main output.
Output raw text, with minimal formatting. For example, footnotes are ignored and there is no paragraph filling. This is used by the parser for file names and copyright text in HTML comments, for example.
Do only Texinfo source parsing and determination of the document structure; there is no output.
Output the document in TexinfoSXML representation, a syntax for writing XML data using Lisp S-expressions.
Output the text content only, stripped of commands; this is useful for
spell checking or word counting, for example. The trivial
detexinfo
script setting this is in the util directory
of the Texinfo source as an example. It’s one line:
exec texi2any -c TEXINPUT_OUTPUT_FORMAT=textcontent "$@"
This table gives the customization variables which apply to HTML output only. A few other customization variables apply to both HTML and other output formats; see Other Customization Variables.
AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY
¶If set, and the menu entry and menu description are the same, then do not print the menu description; default false.
AFTER_BODY_OPEN
¶If set, the corresponding text will appear at the beginning of each HTML file; default unset.
AFTER_SHORT_TOC_LINES
¶AFTER_TOC_LINES
¶If set, the corresponding text is output after the short
table of contents for AFTER_SHORT_TOC_LINES
and after the table of
contents for AFTER_TOC_LINES
; otherwise, a default string is
used. At the time of writing, a </div>
element is closed.
In general, you should set BEFORE_SHORT_TOC_LINES
if
AFTER_SHORT_TOC_LINES
is set, and you should set
BEFORE_TOC_LINES
if AFTER_TOC_LINES
is set.
BASEFILENAME_LENGTH
¶The maximum length of a base file name; default 245. Changing this would make cross-manual references to such long node names invalid (see HTML Cross-reference Link Basics).
BEFORE_SHORT_TOC_LINES
¶BEFORE_TOC_LINES
¶If set, the corresponding text is output before the short
table of contents for BEFORE_SHORT_TOC_LINES
and before the table of
contents for BEFORE_TOC_LINES
, otherwise a default string is
used. At the time of writing, a <div ...>
element is opened.
In general you should set AFTER_SHORT_TOC_LINES
if
BEFORE_SHORT_TOC_LINES
is set, and you should set
AFTER_TOC_LINES
if BEFORE_TOC_LINES
is set.
BIG_RULE
¶Rule used after and before the top element and before
special elements, but not for footers and headers; default
<hr>
.
BODYTEXT
¶The text appearing in <body>
. By default, sets the
HTML lang
attribute to the document language
(see @documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document Language).
CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAMES
¶Construct output file names as if the filesystem were case insensitive (see HTML Splitting); default false.
CHAPTER_HEADER_LEVEL
¶Header formatting level used for chapter level sectioning commands; default ‘2’.
CHECK_HTMLXREF
¶Check that manuals which are the target of external
cross-references (see @xref
with Four and Five Arguments) are present in
htmlxref.cnf (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf); default false.
COMPLEX_FORMAT_IN_TABLE
¶If set, use tables for indentation of complex formats; default false.
CONTENTS_OUTPUT_LOCATION
¶If set to ‘after_top’, output the contents at the end of the @top
section. If set to ‘inline’, output the contents where the
@contents
and similar @-commands are located. If set to
‘separate_element’ output the contents in separate elements, either at the
end of the document if not split, or in a separate file. If set to
‘after_title’ the tables of contents are output after the title; default
‘after_top’.
CONVERT_TO_LATEX_IN_MATH
¶If set, try to convert any Texinfo @-commands inside @math
and
@displaymath
to LaTeX, before converting the @math
or
@displaymath
to HTML. Default undef
. If undefined,
set if HTML_MATH
is set.
COPIABLE_LINKS
¶If set, output copiable links for the definition commands (see Definition Commands) and table commands (see Making a Two-column Table) where an index entry is defined. A link appears as a ‘¶’ sign that appears when you hover the mouse pointer over the heading text.
DATE_IN_HEADER
¶Put the document generation date in the header; off by default.
DEF_TABLE
¶If set, a <table>
construction for @deffn
and similar @-commands is used (looking more like the TeX output),
instead of definition lists; default false.
DEFAULT_RULE
¶Rule used between element, except before and after the
top element, and before special elements, and for footers and headers;
default <hr>
.
DO_ABOUT
¶If set to 0 never do an About special element; if set to 1 always do an About special element; default 0.
EXTERNAL_CROSSREF_SPLIT
¶For cross-references to other manuals, this determines if the other
manual is considered to be split or monolithic. By default, it is set
based on the value of SPLIT
. See HTML Cross-references, and see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf.
EXTERNAL_DIR
¶Base directory for external manuals; default none. It is better to use the general external cross-reference mechanism (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf) than this variable.
EXTERNAL_CROSSREF_EXTENSION
¶File extension for cross-references to other manuals. If unset,
based on EXTENSION
.
EXTRA_HEAD
¶Additional text appearing within <head>
; default unset.
FOOTNOTE_END_HEADER_LEVEL
¶Header formatting level used for the footnotes header with the ‘end’ footnotestyle; default ‘4’. See Footnote Styles.
FOOTNOTE_SEPARATE_HEADER_LEVEL
¶Header formatting level used for the footnotes header with the ‘separate’ footnotestyle; default ‘4’. See Footnote Styles.
FRAMES
¶If set, a file describing the frame layout is generated, together with a file with the short table of contents; default false.
FRAMESET_DOCTYPE
¶Same as DOCTYPE, but for the file containing the frame description.
HEADER_IN_TABLE
¶Use tables for header formatting rather than a simple
<div>
element; default false.
HTML_MATH
¶Method to use to render @math
. This can be unset, set to
‘mathjax’ (see MathJax Customization Variables),
set to ‘l2h’, which uses latex2html
(see latex2html
Customization Variables), or set to
‘t4h’, which uses tex4ht
(see tex4ht
Customization Variables). In the default case,
setting HTML_MATH
also sets CONVERT_TO_LATEX_IN_MATH
.
HTML_ROOT_ELEMENT_ATTRIBUTES
¶Use that string for the <html>
HTML document root element.
Default undefined.
HTMLXREF_FILE
¶Set the file name used for cross-references to other manuals. If
not defined, htmlxref.cnf is used (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf).
Not defined in the default case. If TEST
is set, HTMLXREF_MODE
is set to the default and HTMLXREF_FILE
is not defined, information on
cross-references to other manuals is not used.
If HTMLXREF_MODE
is set to ‘file’ the file name is directly used
as the source of information, otherwise the file name is searched for in
directories, and all the files found are used (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf).
HTMLXREF_MODE
¶How cross-references to other manuals information is determined.
If set to ‘none’, no information is used. If set to ‘file’,
the information is determined from a file path, htmlxref.cnf
in the default case, or the value of HTMLXREF_FILE
. If not defined
(the default) or set to any other value, search in
directories and use all the files (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf).
ICONS
¶Use icons for the navigation panel; default false.
IMAGE_LINK_PREFIX
¶If set, the associated value is prepended to the image file links; default unset.
INDEX_ENTRY_COLON
¶Symbol used between the index entry and the associated node or section; default ‘:’.
INFO_JS_DIR
¶(Experimental.) Add a JavaScript browsing interface to the manual. The value of the variable is the directory to place the code for this interface, so you would run the program as e.g. ‘texi2any --html -c INFO_JS_DIR=js manual.texi’ to place files in a ‘js’ directory under the output. This provides some of the functionality of the Info browsers in a web browser, such as keyboard navigation and index lookup. This only works with non-split HTML output.
The interface should provide an acceptable fallback in functionality if JavaScript or web browser features are not available. However, please be cautious when using this option, in case you do make your documentation harder to access for some of your users.
IGNORE_REF_TO_TOP_NODE_UP
¶Ignore references to TOP_NODE_UP
, the up node for the Top node.
INLINE_CSS_STYLE
¶Put CSS directly in HTML elements rather than at the beginning of the output; default false.
JS_WEBLABELS
¶JS_WEBLABELS_FILE
¶Specify how to use a JavaScript license web labels page to give licensing information and source code for any JavaScript used in the HTML files for the manual. (See https://www.gnu.org/licenses/javascript-labels.html).
With the value ‘generate’ (the default), generate a labels page
at JS_WEBLABELS_FILE
, and link to it in the HTML output files.
Only do this if actually referencing JavaScript files (either with
HTML_MATH
set to ‘mathjax’, or when using the experimental
JS browsing interface when INFO_JS_DIR
is set). With this
setting, JS_WEBLABELS_FILE
must be a relative file name.
With the value ‘reference’, link to the labels
file given by JS_WEBLABELS_FILE
in the output, and do not
generate a labels file. This setting is useful if you separately
maintain a single labels file for a larger website that includes
your manual.
With ‘omit’, neither generate nor link to a labels file.
MAX_HEADER_LEVEL
¶Maximum header formatting level used (higher header formatting level numbers correspond to lower sectioning levels); default ‘4’.
MENU_ENTRY_COLON
¶Symbol used between the menu entry and the description; default ‘:’.
MENU_SYMBOL
¶Symbol used in front of menu entries when node names are used
for menu entries formatting; default is undefined and set to
•
if USE_NUMERIC_ENTITY
is not set, and to
’
if set.
MONOLITHIC
¶Output only one file including the table of contents. Set by default, but only relevant when the output is not split.
NO_CSS
¶Do not use CSS; default false. See HTML CSS.
NO_CUSTOM_HTML_ATTRIBUTE
¶Do not output HTML with custom attributes in elements; default false.
NO_NUMBER_FOOTNOTE_SYMBOL
¶Symbol used for footnotes if NUMBER_FOOTNOTES
is false.
Default is *
.
NODE_NAME_IN_INDEX
¶If true, use node names in index entries, otherwise prefer section names.
If undefined, use USE_NODES
value in HTML. Default is undefined.
PRE_BODY_CLOSE
¶If set, the given text will appear at the footer of each HTML file; default unset.
PROGRAM_NAME_IN_ABOUT
¶Used when an About element is output. If set, output the program name and miscellaneous related information in About special element; default false.
PROGRAM_NAME_IN_FOOTER
¶If set, output the program name and miscellaneous related information in the page footers; default false.
SECTION_NAME_IN_TITLE
¶If set, when output is split, use the argument of the chapter
structuring command (e.g., @chapter
or @section
)
in the <title>
instead of the argument to @node
.
SHORT_TOC_LINK_TO_TOC
¶If set, the cross-references in the Short table of contents links to the corresponding Table of Contents entries, if a Table of Contents is output; default true.
SHOW_BUILTIN_CSS_RULES
¶Output the built-in default CSS rules on the standard output and exit.
SHOW_TITLE
¶If set, output the title at the beginning of the document;
default ‘undef’. If set to ‘undef’, setting
NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
also sets SHOW_TITLE
for HTML.
SIMPLE_MENU
¶If set, use a simple preformatted style for the menu, instead of breaking down the different parts of the menu; default false. See The Parts of a Menu.
TOC_LINKS
¶If set, links from headings to toc entries are created; default false.
TOP_FILE
¶This file name may be used for the top-level file. The extension is set appropriately, if necessary. This is used to override the default, and is, in general, only taken into account when output is split, and for HTML.
TOP_NODE_FILE_TARGET
¶File name used for the Top node in cross-references;
default is index.html
.
TOP_NODE_UP_URL
¶A URL used for Top node up references; the default is
undef
, in that case no Top node Up reference is generated.
For more about the Top node pointers, see The First Node. For
overriding the Up pointer name in case TOP_NODE_UP_URL
is set
and for other formats, see TOP_NODE_UP
in
Other Customization Variables.
USE_ACCESSKEY
¶Use accesskey
in cross-references; default true.
USE_ISO
¶Use entities for doubled single-quote characters (see Inserting Quotation Marks), and ‘---’ and ‘--’ (see General Syntactic Conventions); default true.
USE_LINKS
¶Generate <link>
elements in the HTML <head>
output; default true.
USE_NEXT_HEADING_FOR_LONE_NODE
¶If set, a node not associated to a sectioning command but
followed by a heading command not usually associated to node
such as @heading
before other formatted contents
do not have its name output as a heading, under the assumption
that the command found provides the heading. Default true.
USE_NODE_DIRECTIONS
¶If true, use nodes to determine where next, up and prev
link to in node headers. If false, use sections. If undefined, use
USE_NODES
value. Default is undefined. Note that this setting does not
determine the link string only where the links points to, see xrefautomaticsectiontitle for the link string customization. If
nodes and sections are systematically associated, this customization has no
practical effect.
USE_REL_REV
¶Use rel
in cross-references; default true.
USE_TITLEPAGE_FOR_TITLE
¶Use the full @titlepage
as the title, not a simple title string;
default true. Only relevant if SHOW_TITLE
is set.
USE_XML_SYNTAX
¶Use XML/XHTML compatible syntax.
VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION
¶If set, a vertical navigation panel is used; default false.
WORDS_IN_PAGE
¶When output is split by nodes, specifies the approximate minimum page length at which a navigation panel is placed at the bottom of a page. To avoid ever having the navigation buttons at the bottom of a page, set this to a sufficiently large number. The default is 300.
XREF_USE_FLOAT_LABEL
¶If set, for the float name in cross-references, use the
float label instead of the type followed by the float number
(see @float
[type][,label]: Floating Material). The default is off.
XREF_USE_NODE_NAME_ARG
¶Only relevant for cross-reference commands with no cross
reference name (second argument). If set to 1, use the node name
(first) argument in cross-reference @-commands for the text displayed
as the hyperlink. If set to 0, use the node name if
USE_NODES
is set, otherwise the section name. If set to
‘undef’, use the first argument in preformatted environments,
otherwise use the node name or section name depending on
USE_NODES
. The default is ‘undef’.
This table lists the customization variables which can be used when
MathJax is being used, which will be the case when HTML_MATH
is set to ‘mathjax’.
MATHJAX_SCRIPT
¶URL of the MathJax component file (e.g. tex-svg.js) you are using.
texi2any
provides a default value for this variable, but you
are encouraged to host this file yourself on your website so that you are
not dependent on others’ hosting.
MATHJAX_SOURCE
¶A URL of the full source code in its preferred form for modification,
or instructions for obtaining such source code, for the component file
named by MATHJAX_SCRIPT
. ‘Preferred form for modification’
means that this should not be in a ‘minified’ form. Used in the
license labels page (see HTML Customization Variables, under
JS_WEBLABELS
).
Again, texi2any
provides a default value for this variable,
but you are encouraged to host the source code for MathJax and its
dependencies yourself. This is in order to make the source code
available reliably, and to reduce you and your users’ dependence on
others’ distribution systems.
latex2html
Customization Variables ¶This table lists the customization variables which can be used when
latex2html
is being used to convert @math
,
@displaymath
, @latex
and @tex
sections for HTML.
These customization variables are relevant only if HTML_MATH
is set to
‘l2h’.
To actually convert @tex
sections, --iftex should be used,
and to actually convert @latex
sections, --iflatex should be
used.
L2H_CLEAN
¶If set, the intermediate files generated in relation with latex2html
are removed; default true.
L2H_FILE
¶If set, the given file is used as latex2html
’s init file; default
unset.
L2H_HTML_VERSION
¶The HTML version used in the latex2html
call; default unset.
L2H_L2H
¶The program invoked as latex2html
; default is latex2html
.
L2H_SKIP
¶If set to a true value, the actual call to latex2html
is skipped;
previously generated content is reused instead. If set to 0, the cache is not
used at all. If set to ‘undef’, the cache is used for as many TeX
fragments as possible and for any remaining the command is run. The default is
‘undef’.
L2H_TMP
¶Set the directory used for temporary files. None of the file name components
in this directory name may start with ‘.’; otherwise, latex2html
will fail (because of dvips
). The default is the empty string, which
means the current directory.
tex4ht
Customization Variables ¶This table lists the customization variables which can be used when
tex4ht
is being used to convert @math
, @displaymath
,
@tex
and @latex
sections for HTML. These customization
variables are relevant only if HTML_MATH
is set to ‘t4h’.
To actually convert @tex
sections, --iftex should be used,
and to actually convert @latex
sections, --iflatex should be
used.
T4H_LATEX_CONVERSION
¶If set, the conversion type used for @latex
sections. Possibilities
are ‘latex’, ‘tex’ and ‘texi’. Set to ‘latex’ if not
defined.
T4H_MATH_CONVERSION
¶If set, the conversion type used for @math
and @displymath
.
Possibilities are ‘latex’, ‘tex’ and ‘texi’. Set to ‘tex’
if not defined.
T4H_TEX_CONVERSION
¶If set, the conversion type used for @tex
sections. Possibilities
are ‘latex’, ‘tex’ and ‘texi’. Set to ‘tex’ if not
defined.
|
This table gives the customization variables which apply to LaTeX output only.
CLASS_BEGIN_USEPACKAGE
¶If set, the corresponding text will replace the LaTeX \documentclass
,
package imports that are always output and are output right after
\documentclass
, and package imports that depend on the document encoding
setting the input and font encoding (inputenc
and fontenc
).
The text replaced is along:
\documentclass{book} \usepackage{amsfonts} \usepackage{amsmath} \usepackage[gen]{eurosym} \usepackage{textcomp} \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{etoolbox} \usepackage{titleps} \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
END_USEPACKAGE
¶If set, the corresponding text will replace the package imports that depend on the Texinfo commands used, and the last packages imports that are always output and output after all the other packages imports. The last package imports corresponds to ‘\usepackage[hidelinks]{hyperref}’.
Here is an example of the corresponding text for a document with indices,
@need
, @multitable
, definition commands, @cartouche
,
lists, and @float
:
\usepackage{imakeidx} \usepackage{needspace} \usepackage{array} \usepackage{embrac} \usepackage{expl3} \usepackage{tabularx} \usepackage[framemethod=tikz]{mdframed} \usepackage{enumitem} \usepackage{float} \usepackage[hidelinks]{hyperref}
This table gives the remaining customization variables, which apply to multiple formats, or affect global behavior, or otherwise don’t fit into the categories of the previous sections.
ASCII_DASHES_AND_QUOTES
¶For Info output, when set, use plain ASCII characters to represent quotation marks, hyphens and dashes when these are given in the Texinfo source as ‘-’, ‘--’, ‘---’, ‘`’, ‘``’, ‘'’, and ‘''’, rather than UTF-8 directional quotation marks, en dashes, vel sim. On by default.
ASCII_GLYPH
¶For Info output, use ASCII output for glyph commands such as the copyright
sign (@copyright{}
, becoming ‘(C)’),
and the bullet symbol (@bullet{}
, becoming ‘*’), rather
than other Unicode sequences. Off by default.
ASCII_PUNCTUATION
¶Avoid any unncessary or gratuitious non-ASCII, UTF-8 sequences in the
output. Implies both ASCII_DASHES_AND_QUOTES
and ASCII_GLYPH
and additionally affects the output of commands such as @samp
which
output quotation marks.
AUTO_MENU_DESCRIPTION_ALIGN_COLUMN
¶For Info output, column at which to start a menu entry description
provided by @nodedescription
or @nodedescriptionblock
.
Undefined by default, in which case 45% of the fill column value is used
(see Invoking texi2any
from a Shell).
AUTO_MENU_MAX_WIDTH
¶Maximum number of columns in a menu entry line in Info when adding a
description from @nodedescription
or @nodedescriptionblock
.
Undefined by default, in which case 10% more than the fill column value
is used (see Invoking texi2any
from a Shell).
CHECK_MISSING_MENU_ENTRY
¶When a @menu
block occurs in a node, check if there is a menu
entry for all subordinate nodes in the document sectioning structure. On
by default.
CHECK_NORMAL_MENU_STRUCTURE
¶Warn if the node pointers (either explicitly or automatically set)
are not consistent with the order of node menu entries. This is a more
thorough structure check than that provided by
CHECK_MISSING_MENU_ENTRY
. Off by default.
CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL
¶When a closing quote is needed, e.g. for @samp
output, use
this character; default ’
in DocBook.
Undefined in the default case in HTML and set to ’
if USE_NUMERIC_ENTITY
is not set, to ’
if set, and
to a quote character if OUTPUT_CHARACTERS
is set and the output
encoding includes that character.
The default for Info is set the same as for OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL
,
except that the Unicode code is a closing quote (see below).
CLOSE_DOUBLE_QUOTE_SYMBOL
¶When a closing double quote is needed, for ‘@dfn’ in Info, use this
character. The default for Info is set the same as for
OPEN_DOUBLE_QUOTE_SYMBOL
, except that the Unicode code is a closing
double quote (see below).
COMMAND_LINE_ENCODING
¶Encoding used to decode command-line arguments. Default is based on the locale encoding. This may affect file names inserted into output files or error messages printed by the program.
Note that some file and directory names from the command line may not be decoded immediately, and may not be decoded at all.
CPP_LINE_DIRECTIVES
¶Recognize #line
directives in a “preprocessing” pass
(see External Macro Processors: Line Directives); on by default.
DEBUG
¶If set, debugging output is generated; default is off (zero).
DOC_ENCODING_FOR_INPUT_FILE_NAME
¶If set, use the input Texinfo document encoding information for
the encoding of input file names, such as file names specified as
@include
or @verbatiminclude
arguments. If unset, use
the locale encoding instead. Default is set, except on MS-Windows where
the locale encoding is used by default.
Note that this is for file names only; the default encoding or
@documentencoding
is always used for the encoding of file
content (see @documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding).
The INPUT_FILE_NAME_ENCODING
variable overrides this variable.
DOC_ENCODING_FOR_OUTPUT_FILE_NAME
¶If set, use the input Texinfo document encoding information for the encoding of output file names, such as files specified with --output. If unset, use the locale encoding instead. Default is unset, so files names are encoded using the current locale.
Note that this is for file names only; OUTPUT_ENCODING_NAME
is used for the encoding of file content.
The OUTPUT_FILE_NAME_ENCODING
variable overrides this variable.
DOCTYPE
¶For DocBook, HTML, XML. Specifies the SystemLiteral
, the
entity’s system identifier. This is a URI which may be used to
retrieve the entity, and identifies the canonical DTD for the
document. The default value is different for each of HTML, DocBook
and XML.
DUMP_TEXI
¶For debugging. If set, no conversion is done, only parsing and macro expansion. If the option --macro-expand is set, the Texinfo source is also expanded to the corresponding file. Default false.
DUMP_TREE
¶For debugging. If set, the tree constructed upon parsing a Texinfo document is output to standard error; default false.
EPUB_CREATE_CONTAINER_FILE
¶If set to 0, do not generate the EPUB output file. Default is set to 1.
EPUB_KEEP_CONTAINER_FOLDER
¶If set, keep the directory containing the directories and files
needed for EPUB. The EPUB output file is a ZIP archive of this
directory. Default is not defined. Set if not defined and TEST
or
DEBUG
is set. See Container Directory and Output Files.
EXTENSION
¶The extension added to the output file name. The default is different for each output format.
FORMAT_MENU
¶If set to ‘menu’, output Texinfo menus. This is the default for
Info. ‘sectiontoc’ is the default setting for HTML, where instead
of the contents of @menu
blocks being output, a list of subordinate
sections is output in each node. If set to ‘nomenu’, do not output
menus.
This variable is set to ‘nomenu’ when generating DocBook, or when --no-headers is specified.
HIGHLIGHT_SYNTAX
¶If set, @example
blocks with language information as first
argument are highlighted in the HTML output. It is also possible to specify a
default for the language with HIGHLIGHT_SYNTAX_DEFAULT_LANGUAGE
. Syntax
highlighting requires an external program to generate the highlighted HTML.
The HIGHLIGHT_SYNTAX
value allows to select a specific program. The
possibilities are highlight
, pygments
, any other value standing
for source-highlight
(see Code Examples Syntax Highlighting in HTML).
HIGHLIGHT_SYNTAX_DEFAULT_LANGUAGE
¶The default language used for syntax highlighting when there is no language information.
IGNORE_SPACE_AFTER_BRACED_COMMAND_NAME
¶If set, spaces are ignored after an @-command that takes braces. Default true, matching the TeX behavior.
INDEX_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
¶If set, warn about ‘:’ in index entry, as not all Info readers may be able to process these. For Info and plaintext only. Default false, because parsing problems there don’t prevent navigation; readers can still relatively easily find their way to the node in question.
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_QUOTE
¶If set, whenever there are problematic characters for Info output in
places such as node names or menu items, surround the part of the
construct where they appear with quoting characters, as described in
Info Format Specification. Default is set for Info and unset
for plaintext. See @node
Line Requirements.
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
¶If set, warn about problematic constructs for Info output (such as the
string ‘::’) in node names, menu items, and cross-references.
If not defined, set unless INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_QUOTE
is set.
Default is set for Info and not defined for plaintext. Similar warnings in
index entries are covered by INDEX_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
.
INPUT_FILE_NAME_ENCODING
¶Encoding used for input file names. This variable overrides
any encoding from the document or current locale. Normally, you do
not need to set this variable, but it can be used if file names are
in a certain character encoding on a filesystem. An alternative is to
set DOC_ENCODING_FOR_INPUT_FILE_NAME
to ‘0’ to use the locale
encoding. See also OUTPUT_FILE_NAME_ENCODING
.
LOCALE_ENCODING
¶Locale encoding obtained from the system. You should not need to explicitly set this variable.
MAX_MACRO_CALL_NESTING
¶The maximal number of recursive calls of @-commands defined through
@rmacro
; default 100000. The purpose of this variable is to
avoid infinite recursions.
MESSAGE_ENCODING
¶Encoding used to encode messages output by texi2any
. Default is
based on the locale encoding.
It is also used for command-line argument passed to commands called from
texi2any
. For example, latex2html
will be called from
texi2any
if HTML_MATH
is set to ‘l2h’.
NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
¶If set do not output the Top node content. The Top node is still
parsed, but the content is discarded. Not set in the default case
for HTML. Set in the default case for EPUB. If SHOW_TITLE
is ‘undef’, setting NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
also sets
SHOW_TITLE
for HTML.
Setting NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
, which removes the Top node and adds
a title page corresponds more to the formatting of a book. Setting
NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
to false, with SHOW_TITLE
remaining
‘undef’, and false, corresponds more to a document setup for browsing,
with a direct access to the information at the Top node.
For DocBook, NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
is set to true. Setting
NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
to false causes the Top node content to be
output. It is not recommended to output the Top node in DocBook as
the title and copying informations are always output. This option
is kept for DocBook for compatibility, as before 2022 the Top node was output
in DocBook. It could be removed in the future.
NO_USE_SETFILENAME
¶If set, do not use @setfilename
to set the document name;
instead, base the output document name only on the input file name.
The default is false.
NODE_NAME_IN_MENU
¶If set, use node names in menu entries, otherwise prefer section names; default true.
OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL
¶When an opening quote is needed, e.g., for ‘@samp’ output, use
the specified character; default ‘
for DocBook.
Undefined in the default case in HTML and set to ‘
if USE_NUMERIC_ENTITY
is not set, to ’
if set, and
to a quote character if OUTPUT_CHARACTERS
is set and the output
encoding includes that character.
For Info, the default depends on the enabled document encoding. If --disable-encoding is set or the document encoding is not UTF-8, ‘'’ is used. This character usually appears as an undirected single quote on modern systems. Otherwise, the Info output uses a Unicode left quote.
OPEN_DOUBLE_QUOTE_SYMBOL
¶When an opening double quote is needed, for ‘@dfn’ output in Info, use the specified character. If --disable-encoding is set or the document encoding is not UTF-8, ‘"’ is used. Otherwise, the Info output uses a Unicode left double quote.
OUTPUT_CHARACTERS
¶If not set, the default, output accented and special characters in HTML, XML
and DocBook using XML entities, and in LaTeX using macros. If set, output
accented characters in HTML, XML, DocBook and LaTeX output and special
characters in HTML and LaTeX output based on the document encoding.
See @documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding, and Inserting Accents.
OUTPUT_ENCODING_NAME
¶Normalized encoding name used for output files. Should be a usable
charset name in HTML, typically one of the preferred IANA encoding
names. By default, if an input encoding is set (typically through
@documentencoding
), this information is used to set the output
encoding name, otherwise the output encoding is based on the
default encoding. See @documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding.
OUTPUT_FILE_NAME_ENCODING
¶Encoding used for output file names. This variable overrides any encoding from the document or current locale.
Normally, you do not need to set this variable, but it can be used if file
names should be created in a certain character encoding on a filesystem.
See also INPUT_FILE_NAME_ENCODING
.
PACKAGE
¶PACKAGE_VERSION
¶PACKAGE_AND_VERSION
¶PACKAGE_URL
¶PACKAGE_NAME
¶The implementation’s short package name, package version, package name
and version concatenated, package URL, and full package name,
respectively. By default, these variables are all set through
Autoconf, Automake, and configure
.
PREFIX
¶The output file prefix, which is prepended to some output file names.
By default it is set by @setfilename
or from the input file
(see Setting the Output File Name). How this value is used depends on the
value of other customization variables or command line options, such
as whether the output is split. The default is unset.
PROGRAM
¶Name of the program used. By default, it is set to the name of the program launched, with a trailing ‘.pl’ removed.
SORT_ELEMENT_COUNT
¶If set, the name of a file to which a list of elements (nodes or
sections, depending on the output format) is dumped, sorted by the
number of lines they contain after removal of @-commands; default
unset. This is used by the program texi-elements-by-size
in
the util/ directory of the Texinfo source distribution
(see texi-elements-by-size).
SORT_ELEMENT_COUNT_WORDS
¶When dumping the elements-by-size file (see preceding item), use word counts instead of line counts; default false.
TEST
¶If set to true, some variables which are normally dynamically generated anew for each run (date, program name, version) are set to fixed and given values. This is useful to compare the output to a reference file, as is done for the tests. The default is false.
TEXI2DVI
¶Name of the command used to produce PostScript, PDF, and DVI; default
‘texi2dvi’. See texi2any
Printed Output.
TEXI2HTML
¶Generate HTML and try to be as compatible as possible with
texi2html
; default false.
TEXINFO_DTD_VERSION
¶For XML. Version of the DTD used in the XML output preamble. The default is set based on a variable in configure.ac.
TEXTCONTENT_COMMENT
¶For stripped text content output (i.e., when
TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
is set to textcontent
). If set,
also output comments. Default false.
TOP_NODE_UP
¶Up node for the Top node; default ‘(dir)’. This node name is
supposed to be already formatted for the output format. In HTML
can be used in attribute, so should not contain any element. Used for
HTML output only if TOP_NODE_UP_URL
is set to override the URL,
see TOP_NODE_UP_URL
in HTML Customization Variables.
TREE_TRANSFORMATIONS
¶The associated value is a comma separated list of transformations that can be applied to the Texinfo tree prior to outputting the result. If more than one is specified, the ordering is irrelevant; each is always applied at the necessary point during processing.
By default, the tree transformations ‘move_index_entries_after_items’ and ‘relate_index_entries_to_table_entries’ are executed for HTML and DocBook output. Here’s an example of updating the master menu in a document:
texi2any \ -c TREE_TRANSFORMATIONS=regenerate_master_menu \ -c TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT=plaintexinfo \ mydoc.texi \ -o /tmp/out
(Caveat: Since ‘plaintexinfo’ output expands Texinfo macros and conditionals, it’s necessary to remove any such differences before installing the updates in the original document. This may be remedied in a future release.)
The following transformations are currently supported (many are used
in the pod2texi
utility distributed with Texinfo;
see Invoking pod2texi
: Convert Pod to Texinfo):
Add menu entries or whole menus for nodes associated with sections of any level, based on the sectioning tree.
Add whole menus for nodes associated with sections without menu. The menus are based on the sectioning tree.
Adds empty @unnumbered...
sections in a tree to fill gaps in
sectioning. For example, an @unnumberedsec
will be inserted
if a @chapter
is followed by a @subsection
.
Insert nodes for sectioning commands lacking a corresponding node.
In @enumerate
and @itemize
, move index entries
appearing just before an @item
to just after the
@item
. Comment lines between index entries are moved too. As
mentioned, this is always done for HTML and DocBook output.
Update the Top node master menu, either replacing the (first)
@detailmenu
in the Top node menu, or creating it at the end of
the Top node menu.
In @table
, @vtable
and @ftable
,
reassociate the index entry information from an index @-command
appearing right after an @item
line with the first element of
the @item
. Remove the index @-command from the tree.
Mostly the same as SIMPLE_MENU
: use a simple preformatted style
for the menu. It differs from setting SIMPLE_MENU
in that
SIMPLE_MENU
only has an effect in HTML output.
USE_NODES
¶Preferentially use nodes to decide where elements are separated. If set to false, preferentially use sectioning to decide where elements are separated. The default is true.
USE_NUMERIC_ENTITY
¶For HTML, XML and DocBook. If set, use numeric entities instead of named entities. By default, set to true for DocBook output.
USE_UP_NODE_FOR_ELEMENT_UP
¶Fill in up sectioning direction with node direction when there is no sectioning up direction. In practice this can only happen when there is no @top section. Not set by default.
USE_SETFILENAME_EXTENSION
¶Default is on for Info, off for other output. If set, use exactly
what @setfilename
gives for the output file name, including
the extension. You should not need to explicitly set this variable.
USE_UNIDECODE
¶If set to false, do not use the Text::Unidecode
Perl module to
transliterate more characters; default true.
texi2any
writes fixed strings into the output document at
various places: cross-references, page footers, the help page,
alternate text for images, and so on. The string chosen depends on
the value of the documentlanguage
at the time of the string
being output (see @documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document Language, for the Texinfo
command interface).
The Gettext framework is used for those strings (see Gettext). The libintl-perl
package is used as the
gettext
implementation; more specifically, the pure Perl
implementation is used, so Texinfo can support consistent behavior
across all platforms and installations, which would not otherwise be
possible. libintl-perl
is included in the Texinfo distribution
and always installed, to ensure that it is available if needed. It is
also possible to use the system gettext
(the choice can be made
at build-time).
The Gettext domain ‘texinfo_document’ is used for the strings.
Translated strings are written as Texinfo, and may include
@-commands. In translated strings, the varying parts of the string
are not usually denoted by %s
and the like, but by
‘{arg_name}’. (This convention is common for gettext
in
Perl and is fully supported in GNU Gettext; see Perl
Format Strings in GNU Gettext.) For example, in the
following, ‘{section}’ will be replaced by the section name:
see {section}
These Perl-style brace format strings are used for two reasons: first,
changing the order of printf
arguments is only available since
Perl 5.8.0; second, and more importantly, the order of arguments
is unpredictable, since @-command expansion may lead to different
orders depending on the output format.
The expansion of a translation string is done like this:
.
documentencoding.
If the documentlanguage has the form ‘ll_CC’, that is tried first, and then just ‘ll’.
To cope with the possibility of having multiple encodings, a
special use of the us-ascii
locale encoding is also possible.
If the ‘ll’ locale in the current encoding does not exist, and the
encoding is not us-ascii
, then us-ascii
is tried.
The idea is that if there is a us-ascii
encoding, it means that
all the characters in the charset may be expressed as @-commands.
For example, there is a fr.us-ascii
locale that can accommodate
any encoding, since all the Latin 1 characters have associated
@-commands. On the other hand, Japanese has only a translation
ja.utf-8
, since there are no @-commands for Japanese
characters.
The us-ascii
locales are not needed much now that
UTF-8 is used for most documents. Note that accented characters
are required to be expressed as @-commands in the us-ascii
locales,
which may be inconvenient for translators.
In the following example, ‘{date}’, ‘{program_homepage}’
and ‘{program}’ are the arguments of the string. Since they
are used in @uref
, their order is not predictable.
‘{date}’, ‘{program_homepage}’ and ‘{program}’ are
substituted after the expansion:
Generated on @emph{{date}} using @uref{{program_homepage}, @emph{{program}}}.
This approach is admittedly a bit complicated. Its usefulness is that it supports having translations available in different encodings for encodings which can be covered by @-commands, and also specifying how the formatting for some commands is done, independently of the output format—yet still be language-dependent. For example, the ‘@pxref’ translation string can be like this:
see {node_file_href} section `{section}' in @cite{{book}}
which allows for specifying a string independently of the output format, while nevertheless with rich formatting it may be translated appropriately in many languages.
pod2texi
: Convert Pod to Texinfo ¶The pod2texi
program translates Perl Pod documentation file(s)
to Texinfo. There are two basic modes of operation: generating a
standalone manual from each input Pod, or (if --base-level=1
or
higher is given) generating Texinfo subfiles suitable for use
with @include
.
The pod2texi
program may be useful outside of the rest of Texinfo;
thus, the invocation of pod2texi
is documented in the Pod language
using the man page format to follow the convention used in Perl standalone
programs, with a version on the web
http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/pod2texi.html and a version
included below. The version included in the manual is also an example of
pod2texi
use, as it is converted from Pod using pod2texi
.
pod2texi - convert Pod to Texinfo
pod2texi [OPTION]... POD...
Translate Pod file(s) to Texinfo. There are two basic modes of operation. First, by default, each Pod is translated to a standalone Texinfo manual.
Second, if --base-level
is set higher than 0, each Pod is translated
to a file suitable for @include
, and one more file with a main menu
and all the @include
is generated.
Use appendix sectioning commands (@appendix
, ...) instead of the
default numbered sectioning Texinfo @-commands (@chapter
,
@section
, ...).
Sets the level of the head1
commands. It may be an integer or a
Texinfo sectioning command (without the @
): 1 corresponds to the
@chapter
/@unnumbered
level, 2 to the @section
level, and so on.
The default is 0, meaning that head1
commands are still output as
chapters, but the output is arranged as a standalone manual.
If the level is not 0, the Pod file is rendered as a fragment of a
Texinfo manual suitable for @include
. In this case, each Pod file
has an additional sectioning command covering the entire file, one level
above the --base-level
value. Therefore, to make each Pod file a
chapter in a large manual, you should use section
as the base level.
For an example of making Texinfo out of the Perl documentation itself,
see contrib/perldoc-all
in the Texinfo source distribution.
Set debugging level to NUM.
Use headings commands (@heading
, ...) instead of the
default numbered sectioning Texinfo @-commands (@chapter
,
@section
, ...). The sectioning command covering the entire
file output for each Pod file if --base-level is not 0 is a
numbered command.
Display help and exit.
Output node menus. If there is a main manual, its Top node menu is always output, since a master menu is generated. Other nodes menus are not output in the default case.
Name for the first manual, or the main manual if there is a main manual. Default is to write to standard output.
Use anchors for sections instead of nodes.
Do not fill sectioning gaps with empty @unnumbered
files.
Ordinarily, it’s good to keep the sectioning hierarchy intact.
Insert STR as top boilerplate before menu and includes. If STR is
set to -
, read the top boilerplate from the standard input. The default top
boilerplate is a minimal beginning for a Texinfo document.
Use STR in top boilerplate before menu and includes for @setfilename
.
No @setfilename
is output in the default case.
If there is a main manual with include files (each corresponding to an input Pod file), then those include files are put in directory NAME.
Use unnumbered sectioning commands (@unnumbered
, ...) instead of the
default numbered sectioning Texinfo @-commands (@chapter
,
@section
, ...).
Name of the @top
element for the main manual. May contain Texinfo code.
Display version information and exit.
(Pod-Simple-Texinfo). (perlpod). The Texinfo manual. Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
Copyright 2012-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
There is NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law.
Patrice Dumas <bug-texinfo@gnu.org>.
texi2html
: Ancestor of texi2any
¶Conceptually, the texi2html
program is the parent of today’s
texi2any
program. texi2html
was developed
independently, originally by Lionel Cons in 1998; at the time,
makeinfo
could not generate HTML. Many other people
contributed to texi2html
over the years.
The present texi2any
uses little of the actual code of
texi2html
, and has quite a different basic approach to the
implementation (namely, parsing the Texinfo document into a tree), but
still, there is a family resemblance.
By design, texi2any
supports nearly all the features of
texi2html
in some way. However, we did not attempt to
maintain strict compatibility, so no texi2html
executable is
installed by the Texinfo package. An approximation can be run with an
invocation like this:
texi2any --set-customization-variable TEXI2HTML=1 ...
but, to emphasize, this is not a drop-in replacement
for the previous texi2html
. Here are the biggest differences:
texi2html
are now customization variables, for the most part. A table of
approximate equivalents is given below.
texi2any
.
We do not intend to reimplement these
differences. Therefore, the route forward for authors is alter
manuals and build processes as necessary to use the new features and
methods of texi2any
. The texi2html
maintainers
(one of whom is the principal author of texi2any
) do not
intend to make further releases.
Here is the table showing texi2html
options and
corresponding texi2any
customization variables.
--toc-links | TOC_LINKS |
--short-ext | EXTENSION set to ‘htm’ |
--prefix | PREFIX |
--def-table | DEF_TABLE |
--html-xref-prefix | EXTERNAL_DIR |
--l2h | HTML_MATH set to ‘l2h’ |
--l2h-l2h | L2H_L2H |
--l2h-skip | L2H_SKIP |
--l2h-tmp | L2H_TMP |
--l2h-file | L2H_FILE |
--l2h-clean | L2H_CLEAN |
--use-nodes | USE_NODES |
--monolithic | MONOLITHIC |
--top-file | TOP_FILE |
--frames | FRAMES |
--menu | FORMAT_MENU |
--debug | DEBUG |
--doctype | DOCTYPE |
--frameset-doctype | FRAMESET_DOCTYPE |
--test | TEST |
Finally, any texi2html
users seeking more detailed information can
check the first part of the archived file doc/texi2oldapi.texi in the
Texinfo source repository.
This chapter gives some information on the Info output and describes how to
install Info files. For the creation of Info files with texi2any
, see
texi2any
: The Translator for Texinfo, and with Emacs, Formatting for Info. See Info Files, for general information about the file format.
See Info Format Specification, for a detailed technical specification of the
Info format.
Info files are usually kept in the info directory. You can read Info files using the standalone Info program or the Info reader built into Emacs. (See Info, for an introduction to Info.)
install-info
For Info to work, the info directory must contain a file that serves as a top-level directory for the Info system. By convention, this file is called dir. (You can find the location of this file within Emacs by typing C-h i to enter Info and then typing C-x C-f to see the location of the info directory.)
The dir file is itself an Info file. It contains the top-level menu for all the Info files in the system. The menu looks like this:
* Menu: * Info: (info). Documentation browsing system. * Emacs: (emacs). The extensible, self-documenting text editor. * Texinfo: (texinfo). With one source file, make either a printed manual using @TeX{} or an Info file. ...
Each of these menu entries points to the ‘Top’ node of the Info file that is named in parentheses. (The menu entry does not need to specify the ‘Top’ node, since Info goes to the ‘Top’ node if no node name is mentioned. See Nodes in Other Info Files.)
Thus, the ‘Info’ entry points to the ‘Top’ node of the info file and the ‘Emacs’ entry points to the ‘Top’ node of the emacs file.
In each of the Info files, the ‘Up’ pointer of the ‘Top’ node refers
back to the dir
file. For example, the line for the ‘Top’
node of the Emacs manual looks like this in Info:
File: emacs Node: Top, Up: (DIR), Next: Distrib
In this case, the dir file name is written in uppercase letters—it can be written in either upper- or lowercase. This is not true in general, it is a special case for dir.
See the util/dir-example file in the Texinfo distribution for
a large sample dir
file.
To add a new Info file to your system, you must write a menu entry to add to the menu in the dir file in the info directory. For example, if you were adding documentation for GDB, you would write the following new entry:
* GDB: (gdb). The source-level C debugger.
The first part of the menu entry is the menu entry name, followed by a colon. The second part is the name of the Info file, in parentheses, followed by a period. The third part is the description.
The name of an Info file often has a .info extension. Thus, the Info file for GDB might be called either gdb or gdb.info. The Info reader programs automatically try the file name both with and without .info10; so it is better to avoid clutter and not to write ‘.info’ explicitly in the menu entry. For example, the GDB menu entry should use just ‘gdb’ for the file name, not ‘gdb.info’.
If an Info file is not in the info directory, there are three ways to specify its location:
INFOPATH
environment
variable in your .profile or .cshrc initialization file.
(Only you and others who set this environment variable will be able to
find Info files whose location is specified this way.)
Info-directory-list
variable in your personal or site
initialization file.
This variable tells Emacs where to look for dir files (the files
must be named dir). Emacs merges the files named dir from
each of the listed directories. (In Emacs version 18, you can set the
Info-directory
variable to the name of only one
directory.)
For example, to reach a test file in the /home/bob/info directory, you could add an entry like this to the menu in the standard dir file:
* Test: (/home/bob/info/info-test). Bob's own test file.
In this case, the absolute file name of the info-test file is written as the second part of the menu entry.
If you don’t want to edit the system dir file, you can tell
Info where to look by setting the INFOPATH
environment variable
in your shell startup file. This works with both the Emacs and
standalone Info readers.
Emacs uses the INFOPATH
environment variable to initialize the value of
Emacs’s own Info-directory-list
variable. The standalone Info reader
merges any files named dir in any directory listed in the
INFOPATH
variable into a single menu presented to you in the node
called ‘(dir)Top’.
However you set INFOPATH
, if its last character is a colon (on
MS-DOS/MS-Windows systems, use a semicolon instead), this is replaced
by the default (compiled-in) path. This gives you a way to augment
the default path with new directories without having to list all the
standard places. For example (using sh
syntax):
INFOPATH=/home/bob/info: export INFOPATH
will search /home/bob/info first, then the standard directories. Leading or doubled colons are not treated specially.
When you create your own dir file for use with
Info-directory-list
or INFOPATH
, it’s easiest to start by
copying an existing dir file and replace all the text after the
‘* Menu:’ with your desired entries. That way, the punctuation
and special CTRL-_ characters that Info needs will be present.
As one final alternative, which works only with Emacs Info, you can
change the Info-directory-list
variable. For example:
(add-hook 'Info-mode-hook '(lambda () (add-to-list 'Info-directory-list (expand-file-name "~/info"))))
When you install an Info file onto your system, you can use the program
install-info
to update the Info directory file dir.
Normally the makefile for the package runs install-info
, just
after copying the Info file into its proper installed location.
In order for the Info file to work with install-info
, you include
the commands @dircategory
and
@direntry
…@end direntry
in the Texinfo source
file. Use @direntry
to specify the menu entries to add to the
Info directory file. Use @dircategory
to specify a category
for the manual, which determines which part of the Info directory to
put it in. See Directory Category.
Here is how these commands are used in this manual:
@dircategory Texinfo documentation system @direntry * Texinfo: (texinfo). The GNU documentation format. * install-info: (texinfo)Invoking install-info. ... ... @end direntry
Here’s what this produces in the Info file:
INFO-DIR-SECTION Texinfo documentation system START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY * Texinfo: (texinfo). The GNU documentation format. * install-info: (texinfo)Invoking install-info. ... ... END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
The install-info
program sees these lines in the Info file, and
that is how it knows what to do.
Always use the @direntry
and @dircategory
commands near
the beginning of the Texinfo input, before the first @node
command. If you use them later on in the input, install-info
will not notice them.
install-info
will automatically reformat the description of the
menu entries it is adding. As a matter of convention, the description
of the main entry (above, ‘The GNU documentation format’) should
start at column 32, starting at zero (as in
what-cursor-position
in Emacs). This will make it align with
most others. Description for individual utilities best start in
column 48, where possible. For more information about formatting see
the ‘--calign’, ‘--align’, and ‘--max-width’ options in
Invoking install-info
.
If you use @dircategory
more than once in the Texinfo source,
each usage specifies the ‘current’ category; any subsequent
@direntry
commands will add to that category.
Each ‘Invoking’ node for every program installed should have a
corresponding @direntry
. This lets users easily find the
documentation for the different programs they can run, as with the
traditional man
system.
install-info
¶install-info
inserts menu entries from an Info file into the
top-level dir file in the Info system (see the previous sections
for an explanation of how the dir file works). install-info
also removes menu entries from the dir file. It’s most often
run as part of software installation, or when constructing a dir file
for all manuals on a system. Synopsis:
install-info [option...] [info-file [dir-file]]
If info-file or dir-file are not specified, the options
(described below) that define them must be. There are no compile-time
defaults, and standard input is never used. install-info
can
read only one Info file and write only one dir file per invocation.
If dir-file (however specified) does not exist,
install-info
creates it if possible (with no entries).
If any input file is compressed with gzip
(see Gzip), install-info
automatically uncompresses it for reading.
And if dir-file is compressed, install-info
also
automatically leaves it compressed after writing any changes. If
dir-file itself does not exist, install-info
tries to
open dir-file.gz, dir-file.xz,
dir-file.bz2, dir-file.lz, and
dir-file.lzma, in that order.
Options:
--add-once
¶Specifies that the entry or entries will only be put into a single section.
--align=column
¶Specifies the column that the second and subsequent lines of menu entry’s description will be formatted to begin at. The default for this option is ‘35’. It is used in conjunction with the ‘--max-width’ option. column starts counting at 1.
--append-new-sections
¶Instead of alphabetizing new sections, place them at the end of the DIR file.
--calign=column
¶Specifies the column that the first line of menu entry’s description will be formatted to begin at. The default for this option is ‘33’. It is used in conjunction with the ‘--max-width’ option. When the name of the menu entry exceeds this column, entry’s description will start on the following line. column starts counting at 1.
--debug
¶Report what is being done.
--delete
¶Delete the entries in info-file from dir-file. The file name in the entry in dir-file must be info-file (except for an optional ‘.info’ in either one). Don’t insert any new entries. Any empty sections that result from the removal are also removed.
--description=text
¶Specify the explanatory portion of the menu entry. If you don’t specify a description (either via ‘--entry’, ‘--item’ or this option), the description is taken from the Info file itself.
--dir-file=name
¶Specify file name of the Info directory file. This is equivalent to using the dir-file argument.
--dry-run
¶Same as ‘--test’.
--entry=text
¶Insert text as an Info directory entry; text should have the form of an Info menu item line plus zero or more extra lines starting with whitespace. If you specify more than one entry, they are all added. If you don’t specify any entries, they are determined from information in the Info file itself.
--help
¶Display a usage message with basic usage and all available options, then exit successfully.
--info-file=file
¶Specify Info file to install in the directory. This is equivalent to using the info-file argument.
--info-dir=dir
¶Specify the directory where the directory file dir resides. Equivalent to ‘--dir-file=dir/dir’.
--infodir=dir
¶Same as ‘--info-dir’.
--item=text
¶Same as ‘--entry=text’. An Info directory entry is actually a menu item.
--keep-old
¶Do not replace pre-existing menu entries. When ‘--remove’ is specified, this option means that empty sections are not removed.
--max-width=column
¶Specifies the column that the menu entry’s description will be word-wrapped at. column starts counting at 1.
--maxwidth=column
¶Same as ‘--max-width’.
--menuentry=text
¶Same as ‘--name’.
--name=text
¶Specify the name portion of the menu entry. If the text does not start with an asterisk ‘*’, it is presumed to be the text after the ‘*’ and before the parentheses that specify the Info file. Otherwise text is taken verbatim, and is taken as defining the text up to and including the first period (a space is appended if necessary). If you don’t specify the name (either via ‘--entry’, ‘--item’ or this option), it is taken from the Info file itself. If the Info does not contain the name, the basename of the Info file is used.
--no-indent
¶Suppress formatting of new entries into the dir file.
--quiet
¶--silent
Suppress warnings, etc., for silent operation.
--remove
¶Same as ‘--delete’.
--remove-exactly
¶Also like ‘--delete’, but only entries if the Info file name
matches exactly; .info
and/or .gz
suffixes are
not ignored.
--section=sec
¶Put this file’s entries in section sec of the directory. If you specify more than one section, all the entries are added in each of the sections. If you don’t specify any sections, they are determined from information in the Info file itself. If the Info file doesn’t specify a section, the menu entries are put into the Miscellaneous section.
--section regex sec
¶Same as ‘--regex=regex --section=sec --add-once’.
install-info
tries to detect when this alternate syntax is used,
but does not always guess correctly. Here is the heuristic that
install-info
uses:
--section
starts with a hyphen, the
original syntax is presumed.
--section
is a file that can be
opened, the original syntax is presumed.
When the heuristic fails because your section title starts with a hyphen, or it happens to be a file that can be opened, the syntax should be changed to ‘--regex=regex --section=sec --add-once’.
--regex=regex
¶Put this file’s entries into any section that matches regex. If
more than one section matches, all of the entries are added in each of the
sections. Specify regex using basic regular expression syntax, more
or less as used with grep
, for example.
--test
¶Suppress updating of the directory file.
--version
¶Display version information and exit successfully.
Info files always contain a tag table, to be able to jump to nodes quickly. Info files can be nonsplit (also called unsplit) or split.
If the Info file contains less than about 300,000 characters the
file should be nonsplit. In that case, the tag table should
appear at the end of the Info file. If the Texinfo file contains
more than about 300,000 characters, Texinfo processors split the
large Info file into shorter indirect subfiles of about
300,000 characters each. With texi2any
, splitting
may be prevented by --no-split, and the default size
of 300,000 characters may be modified with --split-size
(see Invoking texi2any
from a Shell).
When a file is split, Info itself makes use of a shortened version of the original file that contains just the tag table and references to the files that were split off. The split-off files are called indirect files.
The split-off files have names that are created by appending ‘-1’,
‘-2’, ‘-3’ and so on to the output file name, specified
by the @setfilename
command or the input file name. The shortened
version of the original file continues to have the name specified by
@setfilename
or the input file name.
At one stage in writing this document, for example, the Info file was saved as the file test-texinfo and that file looked like this:
Info file: test-texinfo, -*-Text-*- produced by texinfo-format-buffer from file: new-texinfo-manual.texinfo ^_ Indirect: test-texinfo-1: 102 test-texinfo-2: 50422
test-texinfo-3: 101300 ^_^L Tag table: (Indirect) Node: overview^?104 Node: info file^?1271
Node: printed manual^?4853 Node: conventions^?6855 ...
(But test-texinfo had far more nodes than are shown here.) Each of the split-off, indirect files, test-texinfo-1, test-texinfo-2, and test-texinfo-3, is listed in this file after the line that says ‘Indirect:’. The tag table is listed after the line that says ‘Tag table:’.
In the list of indirect files, the number following the file name records the cumulative number of bytes in the preceding indirect files, not counting the file list itself, the tag table, or any permissions text in the first file. In the tag table, the number following the node name records the location of the beginning of the node, in bytes from the beginning of the (unsplit) output.
If you are using texinfo-format-buffer
to create Info files,
you may want to run the Info-validate
command. (The
texi2any
command does such a good job on its own, you do not
need Info-validate
.) However, you cannot run the M-x
Info-validate node-checking command on indirect files. For
information on how to prevent files from being split with
texinfo-format-buffer
and how to validate the structure of the nodes,
see Using Info-validate
.
Here are some questions that have been frequently asked on the project mailing lists and elsewhere.
Check that the Info manuals are installed. Not all GNU/Linux distributions install all the Info manuals by default. This is regrettable, as often the Info manual provides more information than the provided man page.
Manuals are rarely written in the Info format itself, but are
generated from Texinfo source by the texi2any
program.
texi2any
can generate HTML as well as Info from Texinfo
source. You can also access and download HTML manuals from the GNU
website (https://www.gnu.org/manual/manual.html). Additionally,
some GNU/Linux distributions provide packages for the installation
of HTML manuals.
Info still has some advantages over HTML for locally installed documentation. The Info browsers support index lookup and support for links between locally installed manuals in multiple locations. It’s important to have documentation installed locally on your machine rather than relying on the Internet; this makes accessing documentation more reliable, and ensures it matches installed versions of packages. It’s hoped that support for browsing locally installed Texinfo documentation in some form of HTML can be improved in the future.
info
program when the Emacs Info reader is better?The Emacs Info reader can display images, and fully supports using
a mouse. There are not many differences among the Info readers
besides that. Command-line info
can be configured
to change the default key bindings, as well as change the color
of cross-references and search results, and to enable mouse
scrolling support. You should not need to be experienced with
the Emacs editor to use info
. (Some recommend another
program called pinfo
, but this lacks in important
features like index lookup.)
Some prefer to be able to scroll through the entire manual at once (as
happens with man pages), rather than being limited to a single ‘node’
of content at once. Of course, there is no accounting for taste,
but a single, unstructured block of text becomes more awkward as a
manual becomes longer and more complicated. (However, if you really
want to, you can view an info manual all at once in the less
pager with ‘info foo | less’.)
By default, Emacs Info mode either changes the marker ‘*note’ for
cross-references to ‘see’, or hides it completely. Command-line
info
does the same if hide-note-references
is set.
Unfortunately, there is no way to do this reliably, as both the @pxref
and @ref
commands in Texinfo output this marker in the Info
output, and the ‘see’ text is only appropriate for @pxref
.
You can’t. Info is a plain text format that is displayed mostly as-is in the viewers, and without the ‘*note’ text there would be nothing to mark text as a link.
For output formats such as HTML, you can use the @link
command
to produce a plain link. See @link
: Plain, unadorned hyperlink. This does not produce
a working cross-reference in Info output or in a printed copy of the
manual, though.
This due to Emacs (or info
with hide-note-references
set to ‘On’) hiding ‘*note’ strings, as mentioned above.
Any extension would be incompatible with existing Info-viewing programs. Extra markup added to Info files would be displayed to the user, making files ugly and unreadable.
When Texinfo files are processed into Info files, information about which Texinfo commands were used to markup text is lost. Moreover, it is not possible to reliably detect whether text can be reflowed (e.g. a paragraph of prose), or whether line breaks should be kept (e.g. a code sample, or poem).
Info’s core purpose is to display documentation on text terminals.
If you want more, you are recommended to use the HTML output from
texi2any
instead.
texi2any
generates Info output by default, but given the
--html option, it will generate HTML, for web browsers and
other programs. This chapter gives some details on such HTML output.
texi2any
has many user-definable customization variables
with which you can influence the HTML output. See Customization Variables. In particular, there is support for syntax highlighting in
@example
(see Code Examples Syntax Highlighting in HTML). You can also write so-called
initialization files, or init files for short, to modify almost
every aspect of HTML output formatting. Initialization files contain code and
are loaded by --init-file (see Invoking texi2any
from a Shell).
Some initialization files are maintained with Texinfo and installed in the default case. For example, chm.pm produces the intermediate compressed HTML Help format files that can be subsequently converted to the CHM format.
The documentation of texi2any
HTML output adaptation using
customization files is in a separate manual. See GNU
Texinfo texi2any
Output Customization.
@documentdescription
: Summary TextThe HTML generated by texi2any
generates standard HTML
output. The output is intentionally quite plain for maximum portability
and accessibility.
You can customize the output via CSS (see HTML CSS) or other means (see Customization Variables). If you cannot accomplish a reasonable customization, feel free to report that.
Navigation bar: By default, a navigation bar is inserted at the
start of each node, analogous to Info output. If the
‘--no-headers’ option is used, the navigation bar is only
inserted at the beginning of split files. Header <link>
elements
in split output support Info-like navigation with browsers which implement
this feature.
Raw HTML: texi2any
will include segments of Texinfo
source between @ifhtml
and @end ifhtml
in the HTML
output (but not any of the other conditionals, by default). Source
between @html
and @end html
is passed without change
to the output (i.e., suppressing the normal escaping of input
‘<’, ‘>’ and ‘&’ characters which have special
significance in HTML). See Conditional Commands.
Standards: It is intentionally not our goal, and not even always possible, to pass through every conceivable validation test without any diagnostics. Different validation tests have different goals, often about pedantic enforcement of some standard or another. Our overriding goal is to help users, not blindly comply with standards.
Please report output from an
error-free run of texi2any
which has practical browser
or EPUB reader portability problems as a bug (see Reporting Bugs).
In practice, the HTML produced by texi2any
is slowly adjusted
over time towards the latest HTML standard, while also trying to keep
compatibility with earlier produced HTML. We use transitional markup
and try to be slow enough to give time for the diverse HTML readers
to adjust (and for standards to reincorporate useful features that were
dropped…).
When splitting output at nodes (which is the default),
texi2any
writes HTML output into (basically) one output file
per Texinfo source @node
.
Each output file name is the node name with spaces replaced by ‘-’’s and special characters changed to ‘_’ followed by their code point in hex (see HTML Cross-references). This is to make it portable and easy to use as a file name. In the unusual case of two different nodes having the same name after this treatment, they are written consecutively to the same file, with HTML anchors so each can be referred to independently.
If texi2any
is run on a system which does not distinguish
case in file names, nodes which are the same except for case (e.g.,
‘index’ and ‘Index’) will also be folded into the same
output file with anchors. You can also pretend to be on a case
insensitive filesystem by setting the customization variable
CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAMES
.
It is also possible to split at chapters or sections with
--split (see Invoking texi2any
from a Shell). In that case,
the file names are constructed after the name of the node associated
with the relevant sectioning command. Also, unless
--no-node-files is specified, a redirection file is output
for every node in order to more reliably support cross-references to
that manual (see HTML Cross-references).
When splitting, the HTML output files are written into a subdirectory. The
subdirectory name is derived from the base name (that
is, any extension is removed), with _html
postpended. For example, HTML
output for gcc.texi would be written into a subdirectory
named ‘gcc_html/’. The subdirectory name is based on @setfilename
or on the input file name (see Setting the Output File Name).
In any case, the top-level output file within the directory is always named ‘index.html’.
Monolithic output (--no-split
) is named according to
@setfilename
, if present (with any ‘.info’ extension replaced
with ‘.html’), --output
(the argument is used literally), or
based on the input file name as a last resort
(see Setting the Output File Name).
Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) is an Internet standard for influencing the display of HTML documents: see http://www.w3.org/Style/CSS/.
By default, some CSS code is included to better implement the appearance of some Texinfo environments. For example:
pre.display { font-family:inherit }
The above tells the web browser to use the same font as the main
document inside ‘<pre>’ elements used for @display
environments.
By default, the HTML ‘<pre>’ command uses a monospaced font.
Please see the reference above for a full explanation of CSS.
You can influence the CSS in the HTML output with two
texi2any
options: --css-include=file and
--css-ref=url.
The option --css-ref=url adds to each output HTML file a ‘<link>’ tag referencing a CSS at the given url. This allows using external style sheets.
The option --css-include=file includes the contents file in the HTML output, as you might expect. However, the details are somewhat tricky, as described in the following, to provide maximum flexibility.
The CSS file first line may be a ‘@charset’ directive. If present, this directive is used to determine the encoding of the CSS file. The line is not copied into the output.
The CSS file may begin with so-called ‘@import’ directives, which link to external CSS specifications for browsers to use when interpreting the document. Again, a full description is beyond our scope here, but we’ll describe how they work syntactically, so we can explain how they are handled.
There can be more than one ‘@import’, but they have to come first in the file, with only whitespace and comments interspersed, no normal definitions. Comments in CSS files are delimited by ‘/* ... */’, as in C. An ‘@import’ directive must be in one of these two forms:
@import url(http://example.org/foo.css); @import "http://example.net/bar.css";
The crucial characters are the ‘@’ at the beginning and the semicolon terminating the directive. When reading the CSS file, any such ‘@’-directive is simply copied into the output, as follows:
pre.example { font-size: inherit ! important }
If the CSS file is malformed or erroneous, the output is unspecified. The meaning of the CSS file is not interpreted in any way; the special ‘@’ and ‘;’ characters are looked for the text is blindly copied into the output. Comments in the CSS file may or may not be included in the output.
In addition to the possibilities offered by CSS, texi2any
has many user-definable customization variables with which you can
influence the HTML output. See Customization Variables.
@documentdescription
: Summary Text ¶When producing HTML output for a document, a ‘<meta>’ element
is written in the ‘<head>’ to give some idea of the
content of the document. By default, this description is the
title of the document, taken from the @settitle
command
(see @settitle
: Set the Document Title). To change this, use the
@documentdescription
environment, as in:
@documentdescription descriptive text. @end documentdescription
This will produce the following output in the ‘<head>’ of the HTML:
<meta name=description content="descriptive text.">
EPUB is a format designed for reading electronic books on portable
devices. texi2any
generated EPUB 3.2 in 2022. An EPUB
file is a ZIP archive container, holding informative files as
well as the manual rendered in HTML.
The generation of the EPUB file depends on the Archive::Zip
Perl module being installed. This dependency is checked at runtime.
In the default case, trying to output EPUB without this dependency raises an
error. However, if the EPUB output file is not generated, with the
customization variable EPUB_CREATE_CONTAINER_FILE
set to 0, it is
not an error if Archive::Zip
is not installed.
The texi2any
tests related to EPUB generation do not require the
installation of Archive::Zip
, as they set
EPUB_CREATE_CONTAINER_FILE
to 0 and keep the directory containing
the files and directories needed for the EPUB file by setting the
EPUB_KEEP_CONTAINER_FOLDER
customization variable to 1.
A directory containing the files and directories needed for the
EPUB format is created when outputting EPUB. The name of this
container directory is derived from the base name of the input file (that
is, any extension is removed), with _epub_package
postpended.
If an output directory is specified, with --output,
or with the SUBDIR
customization variable,
the container directory is created in that directory instead of
the current directory. At the beginning of a new run, the container
directory and all its contents are removed. The container directory
is also removed after the final EPUB file has been generated in the
default case.
The HTML files produced from the Texinfo manual are output in subdirectories of the container directory. Image files referred to from the Texinfo manual, if found, are copied to subdirectories of the container directory.
The EPUB output file is a ZIP archive of the container directory.
The file name is derived from the base name, with the .epub
extension postpended. If an output file is specified, with
--output, or with the OUTFILE
customization function,
this file name is used instead. The output EPUB file is never placed
in the directory specified by --output or SUBDIR
;
only the container directory is placed there, as explained just above.
The EPUB output file is not generated if the customization variable
EPUB_CREATE_CONTAINER_FILE
is set to 0. The container directory
is left after the final EPUB file has been generated if
EPUB_KEEP_CONTAINER_FOLDER
is set.
See Invoking texi2any
from a Shell.
The EPUB format does not support references from an EPUB file to
another EPUB file. Therefore any references to “external” Texinfo
manuals should resolve to an external URL. texi2any
produces these links with HTML cross-reference configuration
(see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf). Since the links in the
resulting EPUB are incorrect if no information is found for the
cross-references, texi2any
issues a warning by default for
missing cross-references information. If these warnings are unwanted,
set CHECK_HTMLXREF
to 0.
The HTML generated for EPUB is XHTML conformant, UTF-8 encoded, and
formatted without the usual HTML navigation headers and footers.
Most of these features are enabled with customization variables, such as
USE_XML_SYNTAX
or OUTPUT_FILE_NAME_ENCODING
. Some
features of printed output are used in EPUB. In particular, the Top
node does not appear in the EPUB output, while a title page is
generated. This is obtained by setting NO_TOP_NODE_OUTPUT
.
The OUTFILE
and SUBDIR
customization variables values
correspond initially to the EPUB directory container and/or the
EPUB output file (see Container Directory and Output Files). These
customization variables values are undefined or reset to the
locations in the container directory where the XHTML files are output
for the HTML generation. It is mentioned here because resetting
customization variables is unusual; however, the variables reset are
used internally for the conversion, and should not interact with any
customization set by the user.
See HTML Customization Variables.
|
Support for source code syntax highlighting is available in
texi2any
for the HTML output, with the help of external software.
This feature is turned on by setting HIGHLIGHT_SYNTAX
. Source code
highlighting is set up for @example
blocks. The language
specified for syntax highlighting is the first argument on the @example
line
(see @example
: Example Text), or HIGHLIGHT_SYNTAX_DEFAULT_LANGUAGE
if set
and there is no first argument.
The HIGHLIGHT_SYNTAX
value determines the command used for highlighting:
highlight
Use highlight
from
http://www.andre-simon.de/doku/highlight/en/highlight.php;
pygments
Use pygmentize
from https://pygments.org/;
anything else
Use source-highlight
(see GNU Source-highlight).
See Other Customization Variables.
Cross-references between Texinfo manuals in HTML format become standard
HTML <a>
links. This section describes the algorithm used,
so that Texinfo can cooperate with other programs, such as
texi2html
, by writing mutually compatible HTML files.
This algorithm may or may not be used for links within HTML output for a Texinfo file. Since no issues of compatibility arise in such cases, we do not need to specify this.
We try to support references to such “external” manuals in both monolithic and split forms. A monolithic (mono) manual is entirely contained in one file, and a split manual has a file for each node. (See HTML Splitting.)
The algorithm was primarily devised by Patrice Dumas in 2003–04.
For our purposes, an HTML link consists of four components: a host
name, a directory part, a file part, and a target part. We
always assume the http
protocol. For example:
http://host/dir/file.html#target
The information to construct a link comes from the node name and manual name in the cross-reference command in the Texinfo source (see Cross-references), and from external information (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf).
We now consider each part in turn.
The host is hardwired to be the local host. This could either be the literal string ‘localhost’, or, according to the rules for HTML links, the ‘http://localhost/’ could be omitted entirely.
The dir and file parts are more complicated, and depend on the relative split/mono nature of both the manual being processed and the manual that the cross-reference refers to. The underlying idea is that there is one directory for Texinfo manuals in HTML, and a given manual is either available as a monolithic file manual.html, or a split subdirectory manual_html/*.html. Here are the cases:
Another rule, that only holds for file names, is that base file names
are truncated to 245 characters, to allow for an extension to be
appended and still comply with the 255-character limit which is common
to many filesystems. Although technically this can be changed with
the BASEFILENAME_LENGTH
customization variable (see Other Customization Variables), doing so would make cross-manual references
to such nodes invalid.
Any directory part in the file name argument of the source cross
reference command is ignored. Thus, @xref{,,,../foo}
and
@xref{,,,foo}
both use ‘foo’ as the manual name. This
is because any such attempted hardwiring of the directory is very
unlikely to be useful for all the output formats that use the manual
name.
Finally, the target part is always the expanded node name.
Whether the present manual is split or mono is determined by user
option; texi2any
defaults to split, with the
--no-split option overriding this.
Whether the referent manual is split or mono, however, is another bit
of the external information (see HTML Cross-reference Configuration: htmlxref.cnf). By
default, texi2any
uses the same form of the referent manual
as the present manual.
Thus, there can be a mismatch between the format of the referent manual that the generating software assumes, and the format it’s actually present in. See HTML Cross-reference Mismatch.
As mentioned in the previous section, the key part of the HTML cross reference algorithm is the conversion of node names in the Texinfo source into strings suitable for XHTML identifiers and file names. The restrictions are similar for each: plain ASCII letters, numbers, and the ‘-’ and ‘_’ characters are all that can be used. (Although HTML anchors can contain most characters, XHTML is more restrictive.)
Cross-references in Texinfo can refer either to nodes, anchors
(see @anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets) or float labels (see @float
[type][,label]: Floating Material).
However, anchors and float labels are treated identically
to nodes in this context, so we’ll continue to say “node” names for
simplicity.
A special exception: the Top node (see The ‘Top’ Node and Master Menu) is always mapped to the file index.html, to match web server software. However, the HTML target is ‘Top’. Thus (in the split case):
@xref{Top,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. ⇒ <a href="../emacs_html/index.html#Top">
For example:
@node A node --- with _'% ⇒ A-node-_002d_002d_002d-with-_005f_0027_0025
Example translations of common characters:
On case-folding computer systems, nodes differing only by case will be mapped to the same file. In particular, as mentioned above, Top always maps to the file index.html. Thus, on a case-folding system, Top and a node named ‘Index’ will both be written to index.html. Fortunately, the targets serve to distinguish these cases, since HTML target names are always case-sensitive, independent of operating system.
Node names may contain @-commands (see @node
Line Requirements).
This section describes how they are handled.
First, comments are removed.
Next, any @value
commands (see @set
and @value
) and
macro invocations (see Invoking Macros) are fully expanded.
Then, for the following commands, the command name and braces are removed, and the text of the argument is recursively transformed:
@asis @b @cite @code @command @dfn @dmn @dotless @emph @env @file @i @indicateurl @kbd @key @samp @sansserif @sc @slanted @strong @sub @sup @t @U @var @verb @w
In addition, the following commands are replaced by constant text, as
shown below. If any of these commands have non-empty arguments, as in
@TeX{bad}
, it is an error, and the result is unspecified.
In this table, ‘(space)’ means a space character and ‘(nothing)’ means
the empty string. The notation ‘U+hhhh’ means Unicode code
point hhhh (in hex, as usual).
There are further transformations of many of these expansions to yield the final file or other target name, such as space characters to ‘-’, etc., according to the other rules.
@(newline) | (space) |
@(space) | (space) |
@(tab) | (space) |
@! | ‘!’ |
@* | (space) |
@- | (nothing) |
@. | ‘.’ |
@: | (nothing) |
@? | ‘?’ |
@@ | ‘@’ |
@{ | ‘{’ |
@} | ‘}’ |
@LaTeX | ‘LaTeX’ |
@TeX | ‘TeX’ |
@arrow | U+2192 |
@bullet | U+2022 |
@comma | ‘,’ |
@copyright | U+00A9 |
@dots | U+2026 |
@enddots | ‘...’ |
@equiv | U+2261 |
@error | ‘error-->’ |
@euro | U+20AC |
@exclamdown | U+00A1 |
@expansion | U+21A6 |
@geq | U+2265 |
@leq | U+2264 |
@minus | U+2212 |
@ordf | U+00AA |
@ordm | U+00BA |
@point | U+22C6 |
@pounds | U+00A3 |
@print | U+22A3 |
@questiondown | U+00BF |
@registeredsymbol | U+00AE |
@result | U+21D2 |
@textdegree | U+00B0 |
@tie | (space) |
Quotation mark @-commands (@quotedblright{}
and the like),
are likewise replaced by their Unicode values. Normal quotation
characters (e.g., ASCII ‘ and ’) are not altered.
See Inserting Quotation Marks.
Any @acronym
, @abbr
, @email
, and
@image
commands are replaced by their first argument. (For
these commands, all subsequent arguments are optional, and ignored
here.) See @acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}, and @email
{email-address[, displayed-text]}, and Inserting Images.
Accents are handled according to the next section.
Any other command is an error, and the result is unspecified.
Usually, characters other than plain 7-bit ASCII are transformed into
the corresponding Unicode code point(s) in Normalization Form C,
which uses precomposed characters where available. (This is the
normalization form recommended by the W3C and other bodies.) This
holds when that code point is 0xffff
or less, as it almost
always is.
These will then be further transformed by the rules above into the string ‘_hhhh’, where hhhh is the code point in hex.
For example, combining this rule and the previous section:
@node @b{A} @TeX{} @u{B} @point{}@enddots{} ⇒ A-TeX-B_0306-_22C6_002e_002e_002e
Notice: 1) @enddots
expands to three periods which in
turn expands to three ‘_002e’’s; 2) @u{B}
is a ‘B’
with a breve accent, which does not exist as a pre-accented Unicode
character, therefore expands to ‘B_0306’ (B with combining
breve).
When the Unicode code point is above 0xffff
, the transformation
is ‘__xxxxxx’, that is, two leading underscores followed by
six hex digits. Since Unicode has declared that their highest code
point is 0x10ffff
, this is sufficient. (We felt it was better
to define this extra escape than to always use six hex digits, since
the first two would nearly always be zeros.)
This method works fine if the node name consists mostly of ASCII
characters and contains only few 8-bit ones. But if the document is
written in a language whose script is not based on the Latin alphabet
(for example, Ukrainian), it will create file names consisting almost
entirely of ‘_xxxx’ notations, which is inconvenient and
all but unreadable. To handle such cases, texi2any
offers
the --transliterate-file-names command line option. This
option enables transliteration of node names into ASCII
characters for the purposes of file name creation and referencing.
The transliteration is based on phonetic principles, which makes the
generated file names more easily understandable.
For the definition of Unicode Normalization Form C, see Unicode report UAX#15, http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr15/. Many related documents and implementations are available elsewhere on the web.
As mentioned earlier (see HTML Cross-reference Link Basics), the generating software may need to guess whether a given manual being cross-referenced is available in split or monolithic form—and, inevitably, it might guess wrong. However, when the referent manual is generated, it is possible to handle at least some mismatches.
In the case where we assume the referent is split, but it is actually available in mono, the only recourse would be to generate a manual_html/ subdirectory full of HTML files which redirect back to the monolithic manual.html. Since this is essentially the same as a split manual in the first place, it’s not very appealing.
On the other hand, in the case where we assume the referent is mono, but it is actually available in split, it is possible to use JavaScript to redirect from the putatively monolithic manual.html to the different manual_html/node.html files. Here’s an example:
function redirect() { switch (location.hash) { case "#Node1": location.replace("manual_html/Node1.html#Node1"); break; case "#Node2" : location.replace("manual_html/Node2.html#Node2"); break; ... default:; } }
Then, in the <body>
tag of manual.html:
<body onLoad="redirect();">
Once again, this is something the software which generated the referent manual has to do in advance, it’s not something the software generating the cross-reference in the present manual can control.
texi2any
reads a file named htmlxref.cnf to gather
information for cross-references to other manuals in HTML output. It
is looked for in the following directories:
(the current directory)
(under the current directory)
(where ~
is the current user’s home directory)
(where sysconfdir is the system configuration directory specified at compile-time, e.g., /usr/local/etc)
(likewise specified at compile time, e.g., /usr/local/share)
All files found are used, with earlier entries overriding later ones. The Texinfo distribution includes a default file which handles many GNU manuals; it is installed in the last of the above directories, i.e., datadir/texinfo/htmlxref.cnf.
The HTMLXREF_MODE
customization variable can be set to modify how the
files are found. For instance, if set to ‘none’, no external information
is used. HTMLXREF_FILE
sets the file name to something else than
htmlxref.cnf. see HTML Customization Variables.
The file is line-oriented. Lines consisting only of whitespace are ignored. Comments are indicated with a ‘#’ at the beginning of a line, optionally preceded by whitespace. Since ‘#’ can occur in URLs (like almost any character), it does not otherwise start a comment.
Each non-blank non-comment line must be either a variable assignment or manual information.
A variable assignment line looks like this:
varname = varvalue
Whitespace around the ‘=’ is optional and ignored. The varname should consist of letters; case is significant. The varvalue is an arbitrary string, continuing to the end of the line. Variables are then referenced with ‘${varname}’; variable references can occur in the varvalue.
A manual information line looks like this:
manual keyword urlprefix
with manual the short identifier for a manual, keyword
being one of: mono
, node
, section
,
chapter
, and urlprefix described below. Variable
references can occur only in the urlprefix. For example (used
in the canonical htmlxref.cnf):
G = http://www.gnu.org GS = ${G}/software hello mono ${GS}/hello/manual/hello.html hello chapter ${GS}/hello/manual/html_chapter/ hello section ${GS}/hello/manual/html_section/ hello node ${GS}/hello/manual/html_node/
If the keyword is mono
, urlprefix gives the host,
directory, and file name for manual as one monolithic file.
If the keyword is node
, section
, or chapter
,
urlprefix gives the host and directory for manual split
into nodes, sections, or chapters, respectively.
When available, texi2any
will use the “corresponding”
value for cross-references between manuals. That is, when generating
monolithic output (--no-split), the mono
URL will be
used, when generating output that is split by node, the node
URL will be used, etc. However, if a manual is not available in that
form, anything that is available can be used. Here is the search
order for each style:
node ⇒ node, section, chapter, mono section ⇒ section, chapter, node, mono chapter ⇒ chapter, section, node, mono mono ⇒ mono, chapter, section, node
These section- and chapter-level cross-manual references can succeed only when the target manual was created using --node-files; this is the default for split output.
If you have additions or corrections to the htmlxref.cnf distributed with Texinfo, please email bug-texinfo@gnu.org as usual. You can get the latest version from http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/htmlxref.cnf.
Here are the details of @-commands: information about their syntax, a list of commands, and information about where commands can appear.
Texinfo has the following types of @-command:
These commands start with @ followed by a letter or a word, followed by an
argument within braces. For example, the command @dfn
indicates
the introductory or defining use of a term; it is used as follows: ‘In
Texinfo, @@-commands are @dfn{mark-up} commands.’
These commands occupy an entire line. The line starts with @,
followed by the name of the command (a word); for example, @center
or @cindex
. If no argument is needed, the word is followed by
the end of the line. If there is an argument, it is separated from
the command name by a space. Braces are not used.
These commands are written at the start of a line, with general text on
following lines, terminated by a matching @end
command on a
line of its own. For example, @example
, then the lines of a
coding example, then @end example
. Some of these block commands
take arguments as line commands do; for example, @enumerate A
opening an environment terminated by @end enumerate
. Here
‘A’ is the argument.
These commands start with @ followed by a word followed by a
left and right- brace. These commands insert special symbols in
the document; they do not take arguments. Some examples:
@dots{}
⇒ ‘…’, @equiv{}
⇒ ‘≡’, @TeX{}
⇒ ‘TeX’, and
@bullet{}
⇒ ‘•’.
The names of commands in all of the above categories consist of
alphabetic characters, almost entirely in lower-case. Unlike those, the
non-alphabetic commands consist of an @ followed by a
punctuation mark or other character that is not part of the Latin
alphabet. Non-alphabetic commands are almost always part of text
within a paragraph. The non-alphabetic commands include @@
,
@{
, @}
, @.
, @SPACE
, and most of
the accent commands.
There are a handful of commands that don’t fit into any of the above
categories; for example, the obsolete command @refill
, which is
always used at the end of a paragraph immediately following the final
period or other punctuation character. @refill
takes no
argument and does not require braces. Likewise, @tab
used in a
@multitable
block does not take arguments, and is not followed
by braces.
Thus, the alphabetic commands fall into classes that have
different argument syntaxes. You cannot tell to which class a command
belongs by the appearance of its name, but you can tell by the
command’s meaning: if the command stands for a glyph, it is in
class 4 and does not require an argument; if it makes sense to use the
command among other text as part of a paragraph, the command
is in class 1 and must be followed by an argument in braces. The
non-alphabetic commands, such as @:
, are exceptions to the
rule; they do not need braces.
The purpose of having different syntax for commands is to make Texinfo files easier to read, and also to help the GNU Emacs paragraph and filling commands work properly.
Here is an alphabetical list of the @-commands in Texinfo. Square
brackets, [
]
, indicate optional arguments; an ellipsis,
‘…’, indicates repeated text.
@whitespace
An @
followed by a space, tab, or newline produces a normal,
stretchable, interword space. See Multiple Spaces.
@!
Produce an exclamation point that ends a sentence (usually after an end-of-sentence capital letter). See Ending a Sentence.
@"
@'
Generate an umlaut or acute accent, respectively, over the next character, as in ö and ó. See Inserting Accents.
@&
@ampchar{}
Generate an ampersand. See Inserting ‘&’ with @&
and @ampchar{}
.
@*
Force a line break. See @*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line Breaks.
@,{c}
Generate a cedilla accent under c, as in ç. See Inserting Accents.
@-
Insert a discretionary hyphenation point. See @-
and @hyphenation
: Hyphenation in Printed Output.
@.
Produce a period that ends a sentence (usually after an end-of-sentence capital letter). See Ending a Sentence.
@/
Produces no output, but allows a line break. See @*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line Breaks.
@:
Tell printed output processors to refrain from inserting extra whitespace after an immediately preceding period, question mark, exclamation mark, or colon. See Not Ending a Sentence.
@=
Generate a macron (bar) accent over the next character, as in ō. See Inserting Accents.
@?
Produce a question mark that ends a sentence (usually after an end-of-sentence capital letter). See Ending a Sentence.
@@
@atchar{}
Insert an at sign, ‘@’. See Inserting ‘@’ with @@
and @atchar{}
.
@\
@backslashchar{}
Insert a backslash, ‘\’; @backslashchar{}
works
anywhere, while @\
works only inside @math
.
See Inserting ‘\’ with @backslashchar{}
, and @math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics.
@^
@`
Generate a circumflex (hat) or grave accent, respectively, over the next character, as in ô and è. See Inserting Accents.
@{
@lbracechar{}
Insert a left brace, ‘{’. See Inserting ‘{ ‘}’ with @{ @}
and @l rbracechar{}
.
@}
@rbracechar{}
Insert a right brace, ‘}’. See Inserting ‘{ ‘}’ with @{ @}
and @l rbracechar{}
.
@~
Generate a tilde accent over the next character, as in Ñ. See Inserting Accents.
@AA{}
@aa{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Scandinavian A-ring letters, respectively: Å, å. See Inserting Accents.
@abbr{abbreviation}
Indicate a general abbreviation, such as ‘Comput.’.
See @abbr
{abbreviation[, meaning]}.
@acronym{acronym}
Indicate an acronym in all capital letters, such as ‘NASA’.
See @acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}.
@AE{}
@ae{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase AE ligatures, respectively: Æ, æ. See Inserting Accents.
@afivepaper
Change page dimensions for the A5 paper size. See Printing on A4 Paper.
@afourlatex
@afourpaper
@afourwide
Change page dimensions for the A4 paper size. See Printing on A4 Paper.
@alias new=existing
Make the command ‘@new’ a synonym for the existing command ‘@existing’. See ‘@alias new=existing’.
@allowcodebreaks true-false
Control breaking at ‘-’ and ‘_’ in printed output.
See @allowcodebreaks
: Control Line Breaks in @code
.
@anchor{name}
Define name as the current location for use as a cross-reference
target. See @anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets.
@appendix title
Begin an appendix. The title appears in the table of contents.
See @unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other Labeling.
@appendixsec title
@appendixsection title
Begin an appendix section within an appendix. The section title
appears in the table of contents. @appendixsection
is
a longer spelling of the @appendixsec
command.
See @unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
.
@appendixsubsec title
Begin an appendix subsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. See The @subsection
-like Commands.
@appendixsubsubsec title
Begin an appendix subsubsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. See @subsubsection
and Other Subsub Commands.
@arrow{}
Generate a right arrow glyph: ‘→’. Used by default
for @click
. See Click Sequences.
@asis
Keep the argument as is.
Used following @table
, @ftable
, and @vtable
to
print the table’s first column without highlighting (“as is”).
See @asis
.
@author author
Set a manual author in the title page. See @title
, @subtitle
, and @author
.
Set a quotation author in @quotation
. See @quotation
: Block Quotations.
@b{text}
Set text in a bold font, if possible. See Fonts for Printing.
@bullet{}
Generate a large round dot, •, or the closest possible thing to one.
Often used with @table
. See @bullet
(•).
@bsixpaper
Change page dimensions for the B6 paper size. See Printing on A4 Paper.
@bye
Stop processing a file. The processors do not see anything in the
input file following @bye
. See Ending a Texinfo File.
@c comment
Begin a comment in Texinfo. The rest of the line does not appear in
any output. A synonym for @comment
. DEL also
starts a comment. See Comments.
@caption
Define the full caption for a @float
. See @caption
& @shortcaption
.
@cartouche
Highlight an example or quotation by drawing a box with rounded
corners around it, if possible. Pair with @end cartouche
.
See @cartouche
: Rounded Rectangles.
@center line-of-text
Center the line of text following the command.
See @titlefont
, @center
, and @sp
.
@centerchap line-of-text
Like @chapter
, but centers the chapter title. See @chapter
: Chapter Structuring.
@chapheading title
Print an unnumbered chapter-like heading, but omit from the table of
contents. See @majorheading
, @chapheading
: Chapter-level Headings.
@chapter title
Begin a numbered chapter. The chapter title appears in the table of
contents. See @chapter
: Chapter Structuring.
@cindex entry
Add entry to the index of concepts. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@cite{reference}
Highlight the name of a book or other reference that has no companion
Info file. See @cite
{reference}.
@clear flag
Unset flag, preventing the Texinfo formatting commands from
formatting text between subsequent pairs of @ifset flag
and @end ifset
commands, and preventing
@value{flag}
from expanding to the value to which
flag is set. See Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
.
@click{}
Represent a single “click” in a GUI. Used within
@clicksequence
. See Click Sequences.
@clicksequence{action @click{} action}
Represent a sequence of clicks in a GUI. See Click Sequences.
@clickstyle @cmd
Execute @cmd for each @click
; the default is
@arrow
. The usual following empty braces on @cmd are
omitted. See Click Sequences.
@code{sample-code}
Indicate an expression, a syntactically complete token of a program,
or a program name. See @code
{sample-code}.
@codequotebacktick on-off
@codequoteundirected on-off
Control output of `
and '
in code examples.
See Inserting Quote Characters.
@comma{}
Insert a comma ‘,’ character; only needed when a literal comma would
be taken as an argument separator. See Inserting ‘,’ with @comma{}
.
@command{command-name}
Indicate a command name, such as ls
. See @command
{command-name}.
@comment comment
Begin a comment in Texinfo. The rest of the line does not appear in
any output. A synonym for @c
.
See Comments.
@contents
Print a complete table of contents or specify that a table of content should be output, for formats that may output a table of contents. See Generating a Table of Contents.
@copying
Specify copyright holders and copying conditions for the document. Pair
with @end copying
. See @copying
: Declare Copying Permissions.
@copyright{}
Generate the copyright symbol ©.
See @copyright{}
(©).
@defblock
Start a block containing definitions. Pair with ‘@end defblock’. See Generic Definition Commands.
@defcodeindex index-name
Define a new index and its indexing command. Print entries in an
@code
font. See Defining New Indices.
@defcv category class name
@defcvx category class name
Format a description for a variable associated with a class in object-oriented programming. Takes three arguments: the category of thing being defined, the class to which it belongs, and its name. See Definition Commands.
@deffn category name arguments…
@deffnx category name arguments…
Format a description for a function, interactive command, or similar
entity that may take arguments. @deffn
takes as arguments the
category of entity being described, the name of this particular
entity, and its arguments, if any. See Definition Commands.
@defindex index-name
Define a new index and its indexing command. Print entries in a roman font. See Defining New Indices.
@definfoenclose newcmd, before, after
Create a new command @newcmd
for online formats
that marks text by enclosing it in strings that precede and
follow the text.
See @definfoenclose
: Customized Highlighting.
@defivar class instance-variable-name
@defivarx class instance-variable-name
Format a description for an instance variable in object-oriented programming. The command is equivalent to ‘@defcv {Instance Variable} …’. See Definition Commands.
@defline category name arguments…
Use within a @defblock
environment to give the heading prototype
line for a symbol being defined. This command does not
create any index entries. See Generic Definition Commands.
@defmac macroname arguments…
@defmacx macroname arguments…
Format a description for a macro; equivalent to ‘@deffn Macro …’. See Definition Commands.
@defmethod class method-name arguments…
@defmethodx class method-name arguments…
Format a description for a method in object-oriented programming; equivalent to ‘@defop Method …’. See Definition Commands.
@defop category class name arguments…
@defopx category class name arguments…
Format a description for an operation in object-oriented programming.
@defop
takes as arguments the name of the category of
operation, the name of the operation’s class, the name of the
operation, and its arguments, if any. See Definition Commands, and
Object-Oriented Programming.
@defopt option-name
@defoptx option-name
Format a description for a user option; equivalent to ‘@defvr {User Option} …’. See Definition Commands.
@defspec special-form-name arguments…
@defspecx special-form-name arguments…
Format a description for a special form; equivalent to ‘@deffn {Special Form} …’. See Definition Commands.
@deftp category name-of-type attributes…
@deftpx category name-of-type attributes…
Format a description for a data type; its arguments are the category, the name of the type (e.g., ‘int’) , and then the names of attributes of objects of that type. See Definition Commands, and Data Types.
@deftypecv category class data-type name
@deftypecvx category class data-type name
Format a description for a typed class variable in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands, and Object-Oriented Programming.
@deftypefn category data-type name arguments…
@deftypefnx category data-type name arguments…
Format a description for a function or similar entity that may take
arguments and that is typed. @deftypefn
takes as arguments the
category of entity being described, the type, the name of the
entity, and its arguments, if any. See Definition Commands.
@deftypefnnewline on-off
Specifies whether return types for @deftypefn
and similar are
printed on lines by themselves; default is off. See Functions in Typed Languages.
@deftypefun data-type function-name arguments…
@deftypefunx data-type function-name arguments…
Format a description for a function in a typed language. The command is equivalent to ‘@deftypefn Function …’. See Definition Commands.
@deftypeivar class data-type variable-name
@deftypeivarx class data-type variable-name
Format a description for a typed instance variable in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands, and Object-Oriented Programming.
@deftypeline category data-type name arguments…
Use within a @defblock
environment to give the heading prototype
line for a symbol being defined, with data types. This command does not
create any index entries. See Generic Definition Commands.
@deftypemethod class data-type method-name arguments…
@deftypemethodx class data-type method-name arguments…
Format a description for a typed method in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands.
@deftypeop category class data-type name arguments…
@deftypeopx category class data-type name arguments…
Format a description for a typed operation in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands, and Object-Oriented Programming.
@deftypevar data-type variable-name
@deftypevarx data-type variable-name
Format a description for a variable in a typed language. The command is equivalent to ‘@deftypevr Variable …’. See Definition Commands.
@deftypevr category data-type name
@deftypevrx category data-type name
Format a description for something like a variable in a typed language—an entity that records a value. Takes as arguments the category of entity being described, the type, and the name of the entity. See Definition Commands.
@defun function-name arguments…
@defunx function-name arguments…
Format a description for a function; equivalent to ‘@deffn Function …’. See Definition Commands.
@defvar variable-name
@defvarx variable-name
Format a description for a variable; equivalent to ‘@defvr Variable …’. See Definition Commands.
@defvr category name
@defvrx category name
Format a description for any kind of variable. @defvr
takes
as arguments the category of the entity and the name of the entity.
See Definition Commands.
@detailmenu
Mark the (optional) detailed node listing in a master menu. See Parts of a Master Menu.
@dfn{term}
Indicate the introductory or defining use of a term. See @dfn
{term}.
@DH{}
@dh{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Icelandic letter eth, respectively: Ð, ð. See Inserting Accents.
@dircategory dirpart
Specify a category for the manual. See Directory Category.
@direntry
Begin the Info directory menu entry for this file. Pair with
@end direntry
. See Installing Info Directory Files.
@display
Begin a kind of example. Like @example
(indent text, do not
fill), but do not select a new font. Pair with @end display
.
See @display
: Examples Using the Text Font.
@displaymath
Format a block of math in “display” format. See @math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics.
@dmn{dimension}
Format a unit of measure, as in 12pt. See @dmn
{dimension}: Format a Dimension.
@docbook
Enter DocBook completely. Pair with @end docbook
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@documentdescription
Set the document description text, included in the HTML output. Pair
with @end documentdescription
. See @documentdescription
: Summary Text.
@documentencoding enc
Declare the input encoding to be enc.
See @documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding.
@documentlanguage CC
Declare the document language as the two-character ISO-639 abbreviation
CC. See @documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document Language.
@dotaccent{c}
Generate a dot accent over the character c, as in ȯ. See Inserting Accents.
@dotless{i-or-j}
Generate dotless i (‘ı’) and dotless j (‘ȷ’). See Inserting Accents.
@dots{}
Generate an ellipsis, ‘…’.
See @dots
(…) and @enddots
(...).
@email{address[, displayed-text]}
Indicate an electronic mail address. See @email
{email-address[, displayed-text]}.
@emph{text}
Emphasize text. See Emphasizing Text.
@end environment
Ends environment, as in ‘@end example’. See @-commands.
@enddots{}
Generate an end-of-sentence ellipsis, like this: ...
See @dots
(…) and @enddots
(...).
@enumerate [number-or-letter]
Begin a numbered list, using @item
for each entry.
Optionally, start list with number-or-letter. Pair with
@end enumerate
. See @enumerate
: Making a Numbered or Lettered List.
@env{environment-variable}
Indicate an environment variable name, such as PATH
.
See @env
{environment-variable}.
@equiv{}
Indicate to the reader the exact equivalence of two forms with a
glyph: ‘≡’. See @equiv{}
(≡): Indicating Equivalence.
@error{}
Indicate to the reader with a glyph that the following text is
an error message: ‘error→’. See @error{}
(error→): Indicating an Error Message.
@errormsg{msg}
Report msg as an error to standard error, and exit unsuccessfully. Texinfo commands within msg are expanded to plain text. See Conditionally Visible Text, and External Macro Processors: Line Directives.
@euro{}
Generate the Euro currency sign. See @euro
(€): Euro Currency Symbol.
@evenfooting [left] @| [center] @| [right]
@evenheading [left] @| [center] @| [right]
Specify page footings resp. headings for even-numbered (left-hand) pages. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@everyfooting [left] @| [center] @| [right]
@everyheading [left] @| [center] @| [right]
Specify page footings resp. headings for every page. Not relevant to Info. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@example
Begin an example. Indent text, do not fill, and select fixed-width
font. Pair with @end example
. @example
accepts optional
arguments, separated by commas. It is recommended to set the first argument to
the language of the example code. See @example
: Example Text.
@exampleindent indent
Indent example-like environments by indent number of spaces
(perhaps 0). See @exampleindent
: Environment Indenting.
@exclamdown{}
Generate an upside-down exclamation point. See Inserting Accents.
@exdent line-of-text
Remove any indentation a line might have. See @exdent
: Undoing a Line’s Indentation.
@expansion{}
Indicate the result of a macro expansion to the reader with a special
glyph: ‘→’. See @expansion{}
(→): Indicating an Expansion.
@file{filename}
Highlight the name of a file, buffer, node, directory, etc.
See @file
{file-name}.
@finalout
Prevent TeX from printing large black warning rectangles beside over-wide lines. See Overfull “hboxes”.
@findex entry
Add entry to the index of functions. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@firstparagraphindent word
Control indentation of the first paragraph after section headers
according to word, one of ‘none’ or ‘insert’.
See @firstparagraphindent
: Indenting After Headings.
@float
Environment to define floating material. Pair with @end float
.
See Floats.
@flushleft
@flushright
Do not fill text; left (right) justify every line while leaving the
right (left) end ragged. Leave font as is. Pair with @end
flushleft
(@end flushright
). See @flushleft
and @flushright
.
@fonttextsize 10-11
Change the size of the main body font in the printed output. See Fonts for Printing.
@footnote{text-of-footnote}
Enter a footnote, for a reference that documents or elucidates the primary text. Footnote text is printed at the bottom of the page in printed output. In other formats, footnote text can be output in the same node, in a separate node, or simply be marked as being footnote text. See Footnotes.
@footnotestyle style
Specify a footnote style, either ‘end’ for the end node style or ‘separate’ for the separate style. In the separate style, footnotes are put in a separate node or file. See Footnote Styles.
@format
Begin a kind of example. Like @display
, but do not indent.
Pair with @end format
. See @example
: Example Text.
@frenchspacing on-off
Control spacing after punctuation. See @frenchspacing
val: Control Sentence Spacing.
@ftable formatting-command
Begin a two-column table, using @item
for each entry.
Automatically enter each of the items in the first column into the
index of functions. Pair with @end ftable
. The same as
@table
, except for indexing. See @ftable
and @vtable
.
@geq{}
Generate a greater-than-or-equal sign, ‘≥’. See @geq
(≥) and @leq
(≤): Inserting Relations.
@group
Disallow page breaks within following text. Pair with @end
group
. Ignored in Info. See @group
: Prevent Page Breaks.
@guillemetleft{}
@guillemetright{}
@guillemotleft{}
@guillemotright{}
@guilsinglleft{}
@guilsinglright{}
Double and single angle quotation marks: «
» ‹ ›.
@guillemotleft
and @guillemotright
are synonyms for
@guillemetleft
and @guillemetright
. See Inserting Quotation Marks.
@H{c}
Generate the long Hungarian umlaut accent over c, as in ő.
@hashchar{}
Insert a hash ‘#’ character; only needed when a literal hash would
introduce #line
directive. See Inserting ‘#’ with @hashchar{}
, and
External Macro Processors: Line Directives.
@heading title
Print an unnumbered section-like heading, but omit from the table of
contents. See @unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
.
@headings on-off-single-double
Turn page headings on or off, and/or specify single-sided or double-sided
page headings for printing. See The @headings
Command.
@headitem
Begin a heading row in a multitable. See Multitable Rows.
@headitemfont{text}
Set text in the font used for multitable heading rows; mostly useful in multitable templates. See Multitable Rows.
@html
Enter HTML completely. Pair with @end html
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@hyphenation{hy-phen-a-ted words}
Explicitly define hyphenation points. See @-
and @hyphenation
: Hyphenation in Printed Output.
@i{text}
Set text in an italic font, when possible. See Fonts for Printing.
@ifclear txivar
If the Texinfo variable txivar is not set, format the following
text. Pair with @end ifclear
. See Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
.
@ifcommanddefined txicmd
@ifcommandnotdefined txicmd
If the Texinfo code ‘@txicmd’ is (not) defined, format the
follow text. Pair with the corresponding @end ifcommand...
.
See Testing for Texinfo Commands: @ifcommanddefined
, @ifcommandnotdefined
.
@ifdocbook
@ifhtml
@ifinfo
@iflatex
@ifplaintext
@ifxml
Begin text that will appear only in the given output format.
@ifinfo
output appears in both Info and (for historical
compatibility) plain text output. Pair with @end ifdocbook
resp. @end ifhtml
...
See Conditionally Visible Text.
@ifnotdocbook
@ifnothtml
@ifnotlatex
@ifnotplaintext
@ifnottex
@ifnotxml
Begin text to be ignored in one output format but not the others.
@ifnothtml
text is omitted from HTML output, etc. Pair with
the corresponding @end ifnotformat
.
See Conditionally Visible Text.
@ifnotinfo
Begin text to appear in output other than Info and (for historical
compatibility) plain text. Pair with @end ifnotinfo
.
See Conditionally Visible Text.
@ifset txivar
If the Texinfo variable txivar is set, format the following
text. Pair with @end ifset
. See Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
.
@iftex
Begin text to appear only in the TeX output. Pair with @end
iftex
. See Conditionally Visible Text.
@ignore
Begin text that will not appear in any output. Pair with @end
ignore
. See Comments and Ignored Text.
@image{filename, [width], [height], [alt], [ext]}
Include graphics image in external filename scaled to the given width and/or height, using alt text and looking for ‘filename.ext’ in HTML. See Inserting Images.
@include filename
Read the contents of Texinfo source file filename. See Include Files.
@indent
Insert paragraph indentation. See @indent
: Forcing Indentation.
@indentedblock
Indent a block of arbitrary text on the left. Pair with @end
indentedblock
. See @indentedblock
: Indented text blocks.
@indicateurl{indicateurl}
Indicate text that is a uniform resource locator for the World Wide
Web. See @indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator}.
@inforef{node-name, [entry-name], info-file-name}
Make a cross-reference to an Info file for which there is no printed
manual. See @inforef
: Cross-references to Info-only Material.
@inlinefmt{fmt, text}
Insert text only if the output format is fmt.
See Inline Conditionals: @inline
, @inlineifelse
, @inlineraw
.
@inlinefmtifelse{fmt, text, else-text}
Insert text if the output format is fmt, else else-text.
@inlineifclear{var, text}
@inlineifset{var, text}
Insert text only if the Texinfo variable var is (not) set.
@inlineraw{fmt, raw-text}
Insert text as in a raw conditional, only if the output format is fmt.
\input macro-definitions-file
Use the specified macro definitions file. This command is used only
in the first line of a Texinfo file to cause TeX to make use of the
texinfo macro definitions file. The \
in \input
is used instead of an @
because TeX does not recognize
@
until after it has read the definitions file. See Texinfo File Header.
@insertcopying
Insert the text previously defined with the @copying
environment. See @insertcopying
: Include Permissions Text.
@item
Indicate the beginning of a marked paragraph for @itemize
and
@enumerate
; indicate the beginning of the text of a first column
entry for @table
, @ftable
, and @vtable
.
See Lists and Tables.
@itemize mark-generating-character-or-command
Begin an unordered list: indented paragraphs with a mark, such as
@bullet
, inside the left margin at the beginning of each item.
Pair with @end itemize
. See @itemize
: Making an Itemized List.
@itemx
Like @item
in @table
, @ftable
, and @vtable
,
but do not generate extra vertical space above the
item text. Thus, when several items have the same description, use
@item
for the first and @itemx
for the others.
See @itemx
: Second and Subsequent Items.
@kbd{keyboard-characters}
Indicate characters of input to be typed by users. See @kbd
{keyboard-characters}.
@kbdinputstyle style
Specify when @kbd
should use a font distinct from
@code
according to style: code
, distinct
,
example
. See @kbd
{keyboard-characters}.
@key{key-name}
Indicate the name of a key on a keyboard. See @key
{key-name}.
@kindex entry
Add entry to the index of keys. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@L{}
@l{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Polish suppressed-L letters, respectively: Ł, ł.
@LaTeX{}
Generate the LaTeX logo. See @TeX
{} (TeX) and @LaTeX
{} (LaTeX).
@latex
Enter LaTeX completely. Pair with @end latex
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@leq{}
Generate a less-than-or-equal sign, ‘≤’. See @geq
(≥) and @leq
(≤): Inserting Relations.
@linemacro macroname {params}
Define a new macro which takes rest of the line as an argument, and expands to a whole number of complete lines. See Line Macros.
@link{nodename, label, manual-name}
Create a plain link with no visible markup or page reference.
See @link
: Plain, unadorned hyperlink.
@lisp
Begin an example of Lisp code. Indent text, do not fill, and select
fixed-width font. Pair with @end lisp
. See @lisp
: Marking a Lisp Example.
@listoffloats
Produce a table-of-contents-like listing of @float
s.
See @listoffloats
: Tables of Contents for Floats.
@lowersections
Change subsequent chapters to sections, sections to subsections, and so
on. See @raisesections
and
@lowersections
.
@macro macroname {params}
Define a new Texinfo command @macroname{params}
.
Pair with @end macro
. See Defining Macros.
@majorheading title
Print an unnumbered chapter-like heading, but omit from the table of
contents. This generates more vertical whitespace before the heading
than the @chapheading
command. See @majorheading
, @chapheading
: Chapter-level Headings.
@math{mathematical-expression}
Format a mathematical expression. See @math
and @displaymath
: Formatting Mathematics.
@menu
Mark the beginning of a menu of nodes. No effect in a printed manual.
Pair with @end menu
. See Menus.
@microtype on-off
Turn microtype on or off. See Microtypography.
@minus{}
Generate a minus sign, ‘−’. See @minus
(−): Inserting a Minus Sign.
@multitable column-width-spec
Begin a multi-column table. Begin each row with @item
or
@headitem
, and separate columns with @tab
. Pair with
@end multitable
. See Multitable Column Widths.
@need n
Start a new page in a printed manual if fewer than n mils
(thousandths of an inch) remain on the current page.
See @need mils
: Prevent Page Breaks.
@node name, [next], [previous], [up]
Begin a new node. Only the first argument is mandatory.
See Writing a @node
Line.
@nodedescription node-description
Provide a short elaboration of the purpose of a node. See Node Descriptions.
@nodedescriptionblock
Used to start a longer node description. Pair with ‘@end nodedescriptionblock’. See Node Descriptions.
@noindent
Prevent text from being indented as if it were a new paragraph.
See @noindent
: Omitting Indentation.
@novalidate
Suppress validation of node references and omit creation of auxiliary files with TeX. Use before any sectioning or cross-reference commands. See Pointer Validation.
@O{}
@o{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase O-with-slash letters, respectively: Ø, ø.
@oddfooting [left] @| [center] @| [right]
@oddheading [left] @| [center] @| [right]
Specify page footings resp. headings for odd-numbered (right-hand) pages. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@OE{}
@oe{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase OE ligatures, respectively: Œ, œ. See Inserting Accents.
@ogonek{c}
Generate an ogonek diacritic under the next character, as in ą. See Inserting Accents.
@option{option-name}
Indicate a command-line option, such as -l or
--help. See @option
{option-name}.
@ordf{}
@ordm{}
Generate the feminine and masculine Spanish ordinals, respectively: ª, º. See Inserting Accents.
@page
Start a new page in a printed manual. See @page
: Start a New Page.
@pagesizes [width][, height]
Change page dimensions. See pagesizes.
@paragraphindent indent
Indent paragraphs by indent number of spaces (perhaps 0); preserve
source file indentation if indent is asis
.
See @paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation.
@part title
Begin a group of chapters or appendixes; included in the tables of
contents.
See @part
: Groups of Chapters.
@pindex entry
Add entry to the index of programs. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@point{}
Indicate the position of point in a buffer to the reader with a glyph:
‘∗’. See @point{}
(∗): Indicating Point in a Buffer.
@pounds{}
Generate the pounds sterling currency sign, ‘£’.
See @pounds
(£): Pounds Sterling.
@print{}
Indicate printed output to the reader with a glyph: ‘-|’.
See @print{}
(-|): Indicating Generated Output.
@printindex index-name
Generate the index for index-name. See Printing Indices and Menus.
@pxref{node, [entry], [node-title], [info-file], [printed-manual]}
Make a reference to be used within parentheses. Starts with a lowercase
‘see’ in a printed manual. The first argument is mandatory, except for
references to whole manuals. To refer to another manual as a whole,
the printed-manual and/or the info-file are the only
required arguments. See @pxref
.
@questiondown{}
Generate an upside-down question mark. See Inserting Accents.
@quotation
Narrow the margins to indicate text that is quoted from another work.
Takes optional argument specifying prefix text. Pair with @end
quotation
. See @quotation
: Block Quotations.
@quotedblleft{}
@quotedblright{}
@quoteleft{}
@quoteright{}
@quotedblbase{}
@quotesinglbase{}
Produce various quotation marks: “ ” ‘ ’ „ ‚. See Inserting Quotation Marks.
@r{text}
Set text in the regular roman font, if possible. See Fonts for Printing.
@raggedright
Fill text; left justify every line while leaving the right end ragged.
Leave font as is. Pair with @end raggedright
.
See @raggedright
: Ragged Right Text.
@raisesections
Change subsequent sections to chapters, subsections to sections, and so
on. See Raise/lower Sections: @raisesections
and @lowersections
.
@ref{node, [entry], [node-title], [info-file], [printed-manual]}
Make a plain reference that does not start with any special text.
Follow command with a punctuation mark. The first argument is mandatory, except for
references to whole manuals. To refer to another manual as a whole,
the printed-manual and/or the info-file are the only
required arguments. See @ref
.
@registeredsymbol{}
Generate the legal symbol ®.
See @registeredsymbol{}
(®).
@result{}
Indicate the result of an expression to the reader with a special
glyph: ‘⇒’. See @result{}
(⇒): Result of an Expression.
@ringaccent{c}
Generate a ring accent over the next character, as in o̊. See Inserting Accents.
@samp{text}
Indicate a literal example of a sequence of characters, in general.
See @samp
{text}.
@sansserif{text}
Set text in a sans serif font if possible. See Fonts for Printing.
@sc{text}
Set text in a small caps font if possible, and uppercase
in Info. See @sc
{text}: The Small Caps Font.
@section title
Begin a section within a chapter. The section title appears in the
table of contents. Within @chapter
and @appendix
, the section
title is numbered; within @unnumbered
, the section is unnumbered.
See @section
: Sections Below Chapters.
@seealso{index-text}
Use in an index entry to refer the reader to another relevant index entry. See Advanced Indexing Commands.
@seeentry{index-text}
Use in an index entry to redirect the reader to another index entry. See Advanced Indexing Commands.
@set txivar [string]
Define the Texinfo variable txivar, optionally to the value
string. See Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
.
@setchapternewpage on-off-odd
Specify whether chapters start on new pages, and if so, whether on
odd-numbered (right-hand) new pages. See @setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before Chapters.
@setfilename info-file-name
Provide a name to be used for the output files. This command is ignored
for TeX formatting. See @setfilename
: Set the Output File Name.
@settitle title
Specify the title for page headers in a printed manual, and the
default document title for HTML.
See @settitle
: Set the Document Title.
@shortcaption
Define the short caption for a @float
. See @caption
& @shortcaption
.
@shortcontents
Print a short table of contents, with chapter-level entries only, or specify that a short table of contents should be output. For formats that may output a short table of contents. See Generating a Table of Contents.
@shorttitlepage title
Generate a minimal title page. See @titlepage
.
@slanted{text}
Set text in a slanted font if possible. See Fonts for Printing.
@smallbook
In printed output, use a 7 by 9.25 inch format rather than the
regular 8.5 by 11 inch format. See @smallbook
: Printing “Small” Books.
@smalldisplay
Begin a kind of example. Like @display
, but use a smaller
font size where possible. Pair with @end smalldisplay
.
See @small…
Block Commands.
@smallexample
Begin an example. Like @example
, but use a smaller font size
where possible. Pair with @end smallexample
.
See @small…
Block Commands.
@smallformat
Begin a kind of example. Like @format
, but use a smaller font
size where possible. Pair with @end smallformat
.
See @small…
Block Commands.
@smallindentedblock
Like @indentedblock
, but use a smaller font size where
possible. Pair with @end smallindentedblock
.
See @small…
Block Commands.
@smalllisp
Begin an example of Lisp code. Same as @smallexample
. Pair
with @end smalllisp
. See @small…
Block Commands.
@smallquotation
Like @quotation
, but use a smaller font size where possible.
Pair with @end smallquotation
. See @small…
Block Commands.
@sortas {key}
Used in the arguments to index commands to give a string by which the index entry should be sorted. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@sp n
Skip n blank lines. See @sp
n: Insert Blank Lines.
@ss{}
Generate the German sharp-S es-zet letter, ß. See Inserting Accents.
@strong {text}
Emphasize text more strongly than @emph
.
See Emphasizing Text.
@sub {text}
Set text as a subscript. See @sub
and @sup
: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts.
@subentry
Use in an index entry to separate parts of a multi-level entry. See Advanced Indexing Commands.
@subheading title
Print an unnumbered subsection-like heading, but omit from the table
of contents of a printed manual.
See The @subsection
-like Commands.
@subsection title
Begin a subsection within a section. The subsection title appears in
the table of contents.
Same context-dependent numbering as @section
.
See @subsection
: Subsections Below Sections.
@subsubheading title
Print an unnumbered subsubsection-like heading, but omit from the
table of contents of a printed manual. See @subsubsection
and Other Subsub Commands.
@subsubsection title
Begin a subsubsection within a subsection. The subsubsection title
appears in the table of contents. Same context-dependent numbering as
@section
. See @subsubsection
and Other Subsub Commands.
@subtitle title
Set a subtitle for the title page. See @title
, @subtitle
, and @author
.
@summarycontents
Print or specify a short table of contents. Synonym for @shortcontents
.
See Generating a Table of Contents.
@sup {text}
Set text as a superscript. See @sub
and @sup
: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts.
@syncodeindex from-index to-index
Merge the index named in the first argument into the index named in
the second argument, formatting the entries from the first index with
@code
. See Combining Indices.
@synindex from-index to-index
Merge the index named in the first argument into the index named in the second argument. Do not change the font of from-index entries. See Combining Indices.
@t{text}
Set text in a fixed-width
, typewriter-like font, if possible.
See Fonts for Printing.
@tab
Separate columns in a row of a multitable. See Multitable Rows.
@table formatting-command
Begin a two-column table (description list), using @item
for
each entry. Write each first column entry on the same line as
@item
. First column entries are printed in the font resulting
from formatting-command. Pair with @end table
.
See Making a Two-column Table. Also see
@ftable
and @vtable
, and @itemx
: Second and Subsequent Items.
@TeX{}
Generate the TeX logo. See @TeX
{} (TeX) and @LaTeX
{} (LaTeX).
@tex
Enter TeX completely. Pair with @end tex
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@textdegree{}
Generate the degree symbol. See @textdegree
(°): Degrees Symbol.
@thischapter
@thischaptername
@thischapternum
@thissection
@thissectionname
@thissectionnum
@thisfile
@thispage
@thistitle
Only allowed in a heading or footing. Stands for, respectively, the number and name of the current chapter (in the format ‘Chapter 1: Title’), the current chapter name only, the current chapter number only, the number and name of the current section, the current section name only, the current section number only, the file name, the current page number, and the title of the document. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@TH{}
@th{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Icelandic letter thorn, respectively: Þ, þ. See Inserting Accents.
@tie{}
Generate a normal interword space at which a line break is not
allowed. See @tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable Space.
@tieaccent{cc}
Generate a tie-after accent over the next two characters cc, as in ‘o͡o’. See Inserting Accents.
@tindex entry
Add entry to the index of data types. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@title title
Set the title for the title page. See @title
, @subtitle
, and @author
.
@titlefont{text}
Print text in a larger than normal font, if possible.
See @titlefont
, @center
, and @sp
.
@titlepage
Begin the title page. Write the command on a line of its own, paired
with @end titlepage
. The title page is not output, in the
default case, in online formats. See @titlepage
.
@today{}
Insert the current date, in ‘1 Jan 1900’ style. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@top title
Mark the topmost @node
in the file, which must be defined on
the line immediately preceding the @top
command. The title is
formatted as a chapter-level heading. In TeX the @top
command is merely a synonym for @unnumbered
.
@U{hex}
Output a representation of Unicode character U+hex.
See Inserting Unicode: @U
.
@u{c}
@ubaraccent{c}
@udotaccent{c}
Generate a breve, underbar, or underdot accent, respectively, over or under the character c, as in ŏ, o̲, ọ. See Inserting Accents.
@unmacro macroname
Undefine the macro @macroname
if it has been defined.
See Defining Macros.
@unnumbered title
Begin a chapter that appears without chapter numbers of any kind. The
title appears in the table of contents. See @unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other Labeling.
@unnumberedsec title
Begin a section that appears without section numbers of any kind. The
title appears in the table of contents. See @unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
.
@unnumberedsubsec title
Begin an unnumbered subsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. See The @subsection
-like Commands.
@unnumberedsubsubsec title
Begin an unnumbered subsubsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. See @subsubsection
and Other Subsub Commands.
@uref{url[, displayed-text][, replacement}
@url{url[, displayed-text][, replacement}
Define a cross-reference to an external uniform resource locator,
e.g., for the World Wide Web. See @url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
.
@urefbreakstyle style
Specify how @uref
/@url
should break at special
characters: after
, before
, none
.
See @url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
.
@v{c}
Generate check accent over the character c, as in ǒ. See Inserting Accents.
@value{txivar}
Insert the value, if any, of the Texinfo variable txivar,
previously defined by @set
. See Flags: @set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
.
@var{metasyntactic-variable}
Highlight a metasyntactic variable, which is something that stands for
another piece of text. See @var
{metasyntactic-variable}.
@verb{delim literal delim}
Output literal, delimited by the single character delim,
exactly as is (in the fixed-width font), including any whitespace or
Texinfo special characters. See @verb
{chartextchar}.
@verbatim
Output the text of the environment exactly as is (in the fixed-width
font). Pair with @end verbatim
. See @verbatim
: Literal Text.
@verbatiminclude filename
Output the contents of filename exactly as is (in the
fixed-width font). See @verbatiminclude
file: Include a File Verbatim.
@vindex entry
Add entry to the index of variables. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@vskip amount
In a printed manual, insert whitespace so as to push text on the remainder of the page towards the bottom of the page. Used in formatting the copyright page with the argument ‘0pt plus 1filll’. (Note spelling of ‘filll’.) See Copyright Page.
@vtable formatting-command
Begin a two-column table, using @item
for each entry.
Automatically enter each of the items in the first column into the
index of variables. Pair with @end vtable
. The same as
@table
, except for indexing. See @ftable
and @vtable
.
@w{text}
Disallow line breaks within text. See @w
{text}: Prevent Line Breaks.
@xml
Enter XML completely. Pair with @end xml
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@xref{node, [entry], [node-title], [info-file], [printed-manual]}
Make a reference that starts with ‘See’ in a printed manual. Follow
command with a punctuation mark. The first argument is mandatory, except for
references to whole manuals. To refer to another manual as a whole,
the printed-manual and/or the info-file are the only
required arguments. See @xref
.
@xrefautomaticsectiontitle on-off
By default, use the section title instead of the node name in cross
references, including in node headers in HTML. See @xref
with Three Arguments.
Here we describe approximately which @-commands can be used in which contexts. It is not exhaustive or meant to be a complete reference. Discrepancies between the information here and the Texinfo processors implementations are most likely to be resolved in favor of the implementations.
By general text below, we mean anything except sectioning and
other such outer-level document commands, such as @section
,
@node
, and @setfilename
.
@c
, @comment
and @if ... @end if
conditional
commands may appear anywhere (except the conditionals must still be on lines by
themselves). @caption
and @shortcaption
may only appear in
@float
but may contain general text. @footnote
content
likewise.
@-commands with braces marking text (such as @strong
,
@sc
, @asis
) may contain raw formatter commands such as
@html
but no other block commands (other commands terminated
by @end
) and may not be split across paragraphs, but may
otherwise contain general text.
In addition to the block command restriction, on @center
,
@exdent
and @item
in @table
lines, @-commands
that makes only sense in a paragraph are not accepted, such as
@indent
.
In addition to the above, sectioning commands cannot contain
@anchor
, @footnote
or @verb
.
In addition to the above, remaining commands (@node
,
@anchor
, @printindex
, @ref
, @math
,
@cindex
, @url
, @image
, and so on) cannot
contain cross-reference commands (@ref
, @xref
,
@pxref
and @inforef
).
For precise and complete information, we suggest looking into the test suite in the sources, which exhaustively tries combinations.
Here are Texinfo @-commands which are obsolete or have been removed completely. This section is for historical purposes.
@refill
¶This command used to refill and indent the paragraph after all the other processing has been done. It is no longer needed, since all formatters now automatically refill as needed, but you may still see it in the source to some manuals, as it does no harm.
@setcontentsaftertitlepage
¶In the past, the contents commands were sometimes placed at the end of
the file, after any indices and just before the @bye
, but we
no longer recommend this.
This command could be used by a user printing a manual, to force the
contents to be printed after the title page
(after the ‘@end titlepage’ line)
even if the @contents
command was at the end of the manual.
@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage
¶This placed the short table of contents after the ‘@end titlepage’
command even if the @shortcontents
command was at the end.
Here are some tips for writing Texinfo documentation:
Write many index entries, in different ways. Readers like indices; they are helpful and convenient.
Although it is easiest to write index entries as you write the body of the text, some people prefer to write entries afterwards. In either case, write an entry before the paragraph to which it applies. This way, an index entry points to the first page of a paragraph that is split across pages.
Here are more index-related hints we have found valuable:
In the example that follows, a blank line comes after the index entry for “Leaping”:
@section The Dog and the Fox @cindex Jumping, in general @cindex Leaping @cindex Dog, lazy, jumped over @cindex Lazy dog jumped over @cindex Fox, jumps over dog @cindex Quick fox jumps over dog The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
(Note that the example shows entries for the same concept that are written in different ways—‘Lazy dog’, and ‘Dog, lazy’—so readers can look up the concept in different ways.)
@table
command and after an
@end table
command; but never insert a blank line after an
@table
command.
For example,
Types of fox: @table @samp @item Quick Jump over lazy dogs.
@item Brown Also jump over lazy dogs. @end table
@noindent On the other hand, ...
Insert blank lines before and after @itemize
… @end
itemize
and @enumerate
… @end enumerate
in the
same way.
Complete phrases are easier to read than …
Include edition numbers, version numbers, and dates in the
@copying
text (for people reading the Texinfo file, and for the
legal copyright in the output files). Then use @insertcopying
in the @titlepage
section for people reading the printed
output (see Short Sample).
It is easiest to handle such version information using @set
and @value
. See @value
Example, and GNU Sample Texts.
Definition commands are @deffn
, @defun
,
@defmac
, and the like, and enable you to write descriptions in
a uniform format.
@table
… @end table
in an appendix that
contains a summary of functions, not @deffn
or other definition
commands.
@TeX{}
command. Note the uppercase
‘T’ and ‘X’. This command causes the formatters to
typeset the name according to the wishes of Donald Knuth, who wrote
TeX. (Likewise @LaTeX{}
for LaTeX.)
Do not use spaces to format a Texinfo file, except inside of
@example
… @end example
and other literal
environments and commands.
For example, TeX fills the following:
@kbd{C-x v} @kbd{M-x vc-next-action} Perform the next logical operation on the version-controlled file corresponding to the current buffer.
so it looks like this:
‘C-x v’ ‘M-x vc-next-action’ Perform the next logical operation on the version-controlled file corresponding to the current buffer.
In this case, the text should be formatted with
@table
, @item
, and @itemx
, to create a table.
@code
around Lisp symbols, including command names.
For example,
The main function is @code{vc-next-action}, ...
@var
around meta-variables. Do not write angle brackets
around them.
Place periods and other punctuation marks outside of quotations, unless the punctuation is part of the quotation. This practice goes against some publishing conventions in the United States, but enables the reader to distinguish between the contents of the quotation and the whole passage.
For example, you should write the following sentence with the period outside the end quotation marks:
Evidently, ‘au’ is an abbreviation for ``author''.
since ‘au’ does not serve as an abbreviation for ‘author.’ (with a period following the word).
For example, in the following, the terms “check in”, “register” and “delta” are all appearing for the first time; the example sentence should be rewritten so they are understandable.
The major function assists you in checking in a file to your version control system and registering successive sets of changes to it as deltas.
@dfn
command around a word being introduced, to indicate
that the reader should not expect to know the meaning already, and
should expect to learn the meaning from this passage.
You can invoke programs such as Emacs, GCC, and gawk
from a
shell. The documentation for each program should contain a section that
describes this. Unfortunately, if the node names and titles for these
sections are all different, they are difficult for users to find.
So, there is a convention to name such sections with a phrase beginning with the word ‘Invoking’, as in ‘Invoking Emacs’; this way, users can find the section easily.
When you use @example
to describe a C function’s calling
conventions, use the ANSI C syntax, like this:
void dld_init (char *@var{path});
And in the subsequent discussion, refer to the argument values by
writing the same argument names, again highlighted with
@var
.
Avoid the obsolete style that looks like this:
#include <dld.h> dld_init (path) char *path;
Also, it is best to avoid writing #include
above the
declaration just to indicate that the function is declared in a
header file. The practice may give the misimpression that the
#include
belongs near the declaration of the function. Either
state explicitly which header file holds the declaration or, better
yet, name the header file used for a group of functions at the
beginning of the section that describes the functions.
Keep nodes (sections) to a reasonable length, whatever reasonable might be in the given context. Don’t hesitate to break up long nodes into subnodes and have an extensive tree structure; that’s what it’s there for. Many times, readers will probably try to find a single specific point in the manual, using search, indexing, or just plain guessing, rather than reading the whole thing from beginning to end.
You can use the texi-elements-by-size
utility to see a list
of all nodes (or sections) in the document, sorted by size (either
lines or words), to find candidates for splitting. It’s in the
util/ subdirectory of the Texinfo sources.
Here are several examples of bad writing to avoid:
In this example, say, “ … you must @dfn
{check
in} the new version.” That flows better.
When you are done editing the file, you must perform a
@dfn
{check in}.
In the following example, say, “… makes a unified interface such as VC mode possible.”
SCCS, RCS and other version-control systems all perform similar functions in broadly similar ways (it is this resemblance which makes a unified control mode like this possible).
And in this example, you should specify what ‘it’ refers to:
If you are working with other people, it assists in coordinating everyone’s changes so they do not step on each other.
@bye
. None of the processors process text after the
@bye
; it is as if the text were within @ignore
…
@end ignore
.
This appendix includes texts to be used in GNU manuals.
Following is a sample Texinfo document with the full texts that should be used (adapted as necessary) in GNU manuals.
As well as the legal texts, it also serves as a practical example of how many elements in a GNU system can affect the manual. If you’re not familiar with all these different elements, don’t worry. They’re not required and a perfectly good manual can be written without them. They’re included here nonetheless because many manuals do (or could) benefit from them.
See Short Sample, for a minimal example of a Texinfo file.
Here are some notes on the example:
@include
command is maintained
automatically by Automake (see Texinfo in GNU Automake).
It sets the ‘VERSION’, ‘UPDATED’ and ‘UPDATED-MONTH’
values used elsewhere. If your distribution doesn’t use Automake, but
you do use Emacs, you may find the time-stamp.el
package helpful
(see Time Stamps in The GNU Emacs Manual).
@syncodeindex
command reflects the recommendation to use
only one index where possible, to make it easier for readers to look up
index entries.
@dircategory
specify a category for the manual. It is
used for constructing the Info directory. See Directory Category,
which includes a variety of recommended category names.
See Installing Info Directory Files.
@include
command. The fdl.texi file
is available in the Texinfo and other GNU source distributions. It is
also available on the GNU website (at
https://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl-1.3.html) along with guidance
for using it.
Here is the sample document:
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- @comment %**start of header @include version.texi @settitle GNU Sample @value{VERSION} @syncodeindex pg cp @comment %**end of header @copying This manual is for GNU Sample (version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}), which is an example in the Texinfo documentation. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @quotation Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. @end quotation @end copying @dircategory Texinfo documentation system @direntry * sample: (sample)Invoking sample. @end direntry @titlepage @title GNU Sample @subtitle for version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED} @author A.U. Thor (@email{bug-sample@@gnu.org}) @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying @end titlepage @contents @node Top @top GNU Sample This manual is for GNU Sample (version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}). @menu * Invoking sample:: * GNU Free Documentation License:: * Index:: @end menu @node Invoking sample @chapter Invoking sample @pindex sample @cindex invoking @command{sample} This is a sample manual. There is no sample program to invoke, but if there were, you could see its basic usage and command line options here. @node GNU Free Documentation License @appendix GNU Free Documentation License @include fdl.texi @node Index @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye
For software manuals and other documentation, it is critical to use a license permitting free redistribution and updating, so that when a free program is changed, the documentation can be updated as well.
On the other hand, for documents that express your personal views, feelings or experiences, it is more appropriate to use a license permitting only verbatim copying.
Here is a sample text for such a license permitting verbatim copying only. This is just the license text itself. For a complete sample document, see the previous sections.
@copying This document is a sample for allowing verbatim copying only. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @quotation Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this entire document without royalty provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved. @end quotation @end copying
For software manuals and other documentation, it is important to use a license permitting free redistribution and updating, so that when a free program is changed, the documentation can be updated as well.
On the other hand, for small supporting files, short manuals (under 300 lines long) and rough documentation (README files, INSTALL files, etc.), the full FDL would be overkill. They can use a simple all-permissive license.
Here is a sample text for such an all-permissive license. This is just the license text itself. For a complete sample document, see the previous sections.
Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved.
You may edit a Texinfo file with any text editor you choose. A Texinfo file is no different from any other ASCII file. However, GNU Emacs comes with a special mode, called Texinfo mode, that provides Emacs commands and tools to help ease your work.
Texinfo mode provides special features for working with Texinfo files. You can:
@node
lines.
Perhaps the two most helpful features are those for inserting frequently used @-commands and for creating node pointers and menus.
In most cases, the usual Text mode commands work the same in Texinfo
mode as they do in Text mode. Texinfo mode adds new editing commands
and tools to GNU Emacs’ general purpose editing features. The major
difference concerns filling. In Texinfo mode, the paragraph
separation variable and syntax table are redefined so that Texinfo
commands that should be on lines of their own are not inadvertently
included in paragraphs. Thus, the M-q (fill-paragraph
)
command will refill a paragraph but not mix an indexing command on a
line adjacent to it into the paragraph.
In addition, Texinfo mode sets the page-delimiter
variable to
the value of texinfo-chapter-level-regexp
; by default, this is
a regular expression matching the commands for chapters and their
equivalents, such as appendices. With this value for the page
delimiter, you can jump from chapter title to chapter title with the
C-x ] (forward-page
) and C-x [
(backward-page
) commands and narrow to a chapter with the
C-x n p (narrow-to-page
) command. (See Pages in The GNU Emacs Manual, for details about the page commands.)
GNU Emacs automatically enters Texinfo mode when you visit a
file with a .texinfo, .texi or .txi
extension. Also, Emacs switches to Texinfo mode
when you visit a
file that has ‘-*-texinfo-*-’ in its first line. If ever you are
in another mode and wish to switch to Texinfo mode, type M-x
texinfo-mode
.
Like all other Emacs features, you can customize or enhance Texinfo mode as you wish. In particular, the keybindings are very easy to change. The keybindings described here are the default or standard ones.
Texinfo mode provides commands to insert various frequently used @-commands into the buffer. You can use these commands to save keystrokes.
The insert commands are invoked by typing C-c twice and then the first letter of the @-command:
Insert @code{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @dfn{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @end
and attempt to insert the correct following word,
such as ‘example’ or ‘table’. (This command does not handle
nested lists correctly, but inserts the word appropriate to the
immediately preceding list.)
Insert @item
and put the
cursor at the beginning of the next line.
Insert @kbd{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @node
and a comment line
listing the sequence for the ‘Next’,
‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ nodes.
Leave point after the @node
.
Insert @noindent
and put the
cursor at the beginning of the next line.
This function and binding were added in Emacs 27.1.
Inserts one of @pxref{}
, @xref{}
, or
@ref{}
based on the text around point; calling it near an
unclosed preceding open parenthesis results in @pxref{}
, at
the beginning of a sentence or at (point-min)
yields
@xref{}
, any other location (including inside a word), will
result in @ref{}
. A numeric argument says how many words
the braces should surround. Puts the cursor between the braces.
Insert @samp{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @table
followed by a SPC
and leave the cursor after the SPC.
Insert @var{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @example
and put the
cursor at the beginning of the next line.
Insert {}
and put the cursor between the braces.
Move from between a pair of braces forward past the closing brace. Typing C-c ] is easier than typing C-c }, which is, however, more mnemonic; hence the two keybindings. (Also, you can move out from between braces by typing C-f.)
To put a command such as @code{…}
around an
existing word, position the cursor in front of the word and type
C-u 1 C-c C-c c. This makes it easy to edit existing plain text.
The value of the prefix argument tells Emacs how many words following
point to include between braces—‘1’ for one word, ‘2’ for
two words, and so on. Use a negative argument to enclose the previous
word or words. If you do not specify a prefix argument, Emacs inserts
the @-command string and positions the cursor between the braces. This
feature works only for those @-commands that operate on a word or words
within one line, such as @kbd
and @var
.
This set of insert commands was created after analyzing the frequency with which different @-commands are used in the GNU Emacs Manual and the GDB Manual. If you wish to add your own insert commands, you can bind a keyboard macro to a key, use abbreviations, or extend the code in texinfo.el.
C-c C-c C-d (texinfo-start-menu-description
) is an insert
command that works differently from the other insert commands. It
inserts a node’s section or chapter title in the space for the
description in a menu entry line. (A menu entry has three parts, the
entry name, the node name, and the description. Only the node name is
required, but a description helps explain what the node is about.
See The Parts of a Menu.)
To use texinfo-start-menu-description
, position point in a menu
entry line and type C-c C-c C-d. The command looks for and copies
the title that goes with the node name, and inserts the title as a
description; it positions point at the beginning of the inserted text so you
can edit it. The function does not insert the title if the menu entry
line already contains a description.
This command is only an aid to writing descriptions; it does not do the whole job. You must edit the inserted text since a title tends to use the same words as a node name but a useful description uses different words.
You can show the sectioning structure of a Texinfo file by using the
C-c C-s command (texinfo-show-structure
). This command
lists the lines that begin with the @-commands for @chapter
,
@section
, and the like. It constructs what amounts to a table
of contents. These lines are displayed in another buffer called the
‘*Occur*’ buffer. In that buffer, you can position the cursor
over one of the lines and use the C-c C-c command
(occur-mode-goto-occurrence
), to jump to the corresponding spot
in the Texinfo file.
Show the @chapter
, @section
, and such lines of a
Texinfo file.
Go to the line in the Texinfo file corresponding to the line under the cursor in the *Occur* buffer.
If you call texinfo-show-structure
with a prefix argument by
typing C-u C-c C-s, it will list not only those lines with the
@-commands for @chapter
, @section
, and the like, but
also the @node
lines. You can use texinfo-show-structure
with a prefix argument to check whether the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’
pointers of an @node
line are correct.
Often, when you are working on a manual, you will be interested only
in the structure of the current chapter. In this case, you can mark
off the region of the buffer that you are interested in by using the
C-x n n (narrow-to-region
) command and
texinfo-show-structure
will work on only that region. To see
the whole buffer again, use C-x n w (widen
).
(See Narrowing in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more
information about the narrowing commands.)
In addition to providing the texinfo-show-structure
command,
Texinfo mode sets the value of the page delimiter variable to match
the chapter-level @-commands. This enables you to use the C-x
] (forward-page
) and C-x [ (backward-page
)
commands to move forward and backward by chapter, and to use the
C-x n p (narrow-to-page
) command to narrow to a chapter.
See Pages in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more information
about the page commands.
texinfo-show-structure
¶It is not always easy to keep track of the nodes, chapters, sections, and subsections of a Texinfo file. This is especially true if you are revising or adding to a Texinfo file that someone else has written.
In GNU Emacs, in Texinfo mode, the texinfo-show-structure
command lists all the lines that begin with the @-commands that
specify the structure: @chapter
, @section
,
@appendix
, and so on. With an argument (C-u
as prefix argument, if interactive),
the command also shows the @node
lines. The
texinfo-show-structure
command is bound to C-c C-s in
Texinfo mode, by default.
The lines are displayed in a buffer called the ‘*Occur*’ buffer,
indented by hierarchical level. For example, here is a part of what was
produced by running texinfo-show-structure
on this manual:
Lines matching "^@\\(chapter \\|sect\\|subs\\|subh\\| unnum\\|major\\|chapheading \\|heading \\|appendix\\)" in buffer texinfo.texi. ... 4177:@chapter Nodes 4198: @heading Two Paths 4231: @section Node and Menu Illustration 4337: @section The @code{@@node} Command 4393: @subheading Choosing Node and Pointer Names 4417: @subsection How to Write a @code{@@node} Line 4469: @subsection @code{@@node} Line Tips ...
This says that lines 4337, 4393, and 4417 of texinfo.texi begin
with the @section
, @subheading
, and @subsection
commands respectively. If you move your cursor into the ‘*Occur*’
window, you can position the cursor over one of the lines and use the
C-c C-c command (occur-mode-goto-occurrence
), to jump to
the corresponding spot in the Texinfo file. See Using Occur in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more
information about occur-mode-goto-occurrence
.
The first line in the ‘*Occur*’ window describes the regular
expression specified by texinfo-heading-pattern. This regular
expression is the pattern that texinfo-show-structure
looks for.
See Using Regular Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual,
for more information.
When you invoke the texinfo-show-structure
command, Emacs will
display the structure of the whole buffer. If you want to see the
structure of just a part of the buffer, of one chapter, for example,
use the C-x n n (narrow-to-region
) command to mark the
region. (See Narrowing in The GNU Emacs Manual.) This is
how the example used above was generated. (To see the whole buffer
again, use C-x n w (widen
).)
If you call texinfo-show-structure
with a prefix argument by
typing C-u C-c C-s, it will list lines beginning with
@node
as well as the lines beginning with the @-sign commands
for @chapter
, @section
, and the like.
You can remind yourself of the structure of a Texinfo file by looking at the list in the ‘*Occur*’ window; and if you have mis-named a node or left out a section, you can correct the mistake.
occur
¶Sometimes the texinfo-show-structure
command produces too much
information. Perhaps you want to remind yourself of the overall structure
of a Texinfo file, and are overwhelmed by the detailed list produced by
texinfo-show-structure
. In this case, you can use the occur
command directly. To do this, type:
M-x occur
and then, when prompted, type a regexp, a regular expression for
the pattern you want to match. (See Regular Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual.) The occur
command works from
the current location of the cursor in the buffer to the end of the
buffer. If you want to run occur
on the whole buffer, place
the cursor at the beginning of the buffer.
For example, to see all the lines that contain the word ‘@chapter’ in them, just type ‘@chapter’. This will produce a list of the chapters. It will also list all the sentences with ‘@chapter’ in the middle of the line.
If you want to see only those lines that start with the word
‘@chapter’, type ‘^@chapter’ when prompted by
occur
. If you want to see all the lines that end with a word
or phrase, end the last word with a ‘$’; for example,
‘catching mistakes$’. This can be helpful when you want to see
all the nodes that are part of the same chapter or section and
therefore have the same ‘Up’ pointer.
See Using Occur in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more information.
The texi2any
command will create an Info file for a hierarchically
organized Texinfo file that lacks ‘Next’, ‘Previous’ and ‘Up’ pointers
(see Writing a @node
Line). Thus, in general, there is no need for explicit
‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers. In this setting, menus will be added
automatically for nodes without an explicit menu. (See texi2any
: The Translator for Texinfo, for more information about texi2any
.)
If you still want explicit pointers, Texinfo mode provides commands for
automatically creating or updating menus and node pointers. The commands are
called “update” commands because their most frequent use is for updating a
Texinfo file after you have worked on it; but you can use them to insert the
‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers into an @node
line that has none
and to create menus in a file that has none.
You can use the updating commands to:
You can also use the commands to update all the nodes and menus in a region or in a whole Texinfo file.
The updating commands work only with conventional Texinfo files, which
are structured hierarchically like books. In such files, a structuring
command line must follow closely after each @node
line, except
for the ‘Top’ @node
line. (A structuring command line is
a line beginning with @chapter
, @section
, or other
similar command.)
You can write the structuring command line on the line that follows
immediately after an @node
line or else on the line that
follows after a single @comment
line or a single
@ifinfo
line. You cannot interpose more than one line between
the @node
line and the structuring command line; and you may
interpose only a @comment
line or an @ifinfo
line.
Commands which work on a whole buffer require that the ‘Top’ node be
followed by a node with a @chapter
or equivalent-level command.
The menu updating commands will not create a main or master menu for a
Texinfo file that has only @chapter
-level nodes! The menu
updating commands only create menus within nodes for lower level
nodes. To create a menu of chapters, you must provide a ‘Top’
node.
The menu updating commands remove menu entries that refer to other Info files since they do not refer to nodes within the current buffer. This is a deficiency. Rather than use menu entries, you can use cross references to refer to other Info files. None of the updating commands affect cross-references.
Texinfo mode has five updating commands that are used most often: two
are for updating the node pointers or menu of a single node (or a
region); two are for updating every node pointer and menu in a file;
and one, the texinfo-master-menu
command, is for creating a
master menu for a complete file, and optionally, for updating every
node and menu in the whole Texinfo file.
The texinfo-master-menu
command is the primary command:
Create or update a master menu that includes all the other menus (incorporating the descriptions from pre-existing menus, if any).
With an argument (prefix argument, C-u, if interactive), first create or update all the nodes and all the regular menus in the buffer before constructing the master menu. (See The Top Node and Master Menu, for more about a master menu.)
For texinfo-master-menu
to work, the Texinfo file must have a
‘Top’ node and at least one subsequent node.
After extensively editing a Texinfo file, you can type the following:
C-u M-x texinfo-master-menu
or
C-u C-c C-u m
This updates all the nodes and menus completely and all at once.
The other major updating commands do smaller jobs and are designed for the person who updates nodes and menus as he or she writes a Texinfo file.
The commands are:
Insert the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers for the node that point is
within (i.e., for the @node
line preceding point). If the
@node
line has pre-existing ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, or ‘Up’
pointers in it, the old pointers are removed and new ones inserted.
With an argument (prefix argument, C-u, if interactive), this command
updates all @node
lines in the region (which is the text
between point and mark).
Create or update the menu in the node that point is within. With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if interactive), the command makes or updates menus for the nodes which are either within or a part of the region.
Whenever texinfo-make-menu
updates an existing menu, the
descriptions from that menu are incorporated into the new menu. This
is done by copying descriptions from the existing menu to the entries
in the new menu that have the same node names. If the node names are
different, the descriptions are not copied to the new menu.
Insert or update the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers for every node in the buffer.
Create or update all the menus in the buffer. With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if interactive), first insert or update all the node pointers before working on the menus.
If a master menu exists, the texinfo-all-menus-update
command
updates it; but the command does not create a new master menu if none
already exists. (Use the texinfo-master-menu
command for
that.)
When working on a document that does not merit a master menu, you can type the following:
C-u C-c C-u C-a
or
C-u M-x texinfo-all-menus-update
This updates all the nodes and menus.
The texinfo-column-for-description
variable specifies the
column to which menu descriptions are indented. By default, the value
is 32 although it can be useful to reduce it to as low as 24. You
can set the variable via customization (see Customization in The GNU Emacs Manual) or with the M-x set-variable
command (see Examining and Setting Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual).
Also, the texinfo-indent-menu-description
command may be used to
indent existing menu descriptions to a specified column. Finally, if
you wish, you can use the texinfo-insert-node-lines
command to
insert missing @node
lines into a file. In particular, you can
ignore @node
lines altogether in your first draft and then
use the texinfo-insert-node-lines
command to create @node
lines for you. However, we do not recommend this practice. It is better
to name the node itself at the same time that you write a segment so you
can easily make cross-references. Useful cross-references are an
especially important feature of a good Texinfo manual.
(See Other Updating Commands, for more information.)
To use the updating commands, you must organize the Texinfo file hierarchically with chapters, sections, subsections, and the like. When you construct the hierarchy of the manual, do not ‘jump down’ more than one level at a time: you can follow the ‘Top’ node with a chapter, but not with a section; you can follow a chapter with a section, but not with a subsection. However, you may ‘jump up’ any number of levels at one time—for example, from a subsection to a chapter.
Each @node
line, with the exception of the line for the ‘Top’
node, must be followed by a line with a structuring command such as
@chapter
, @section
, or
@unnumberedsubsec
.
Each @node
line/structuring-command line combination
must look either like this:
@node Comments, Minimum, Conventions, Overview @comment node-name, next, previous, up @section Comments
or like this (without the @comment
line):
@node Comments, Minimum, Conventions, Overview @section Comments
or like this (without the explicit node pointers):
@node Comments @section Comments
In this example, ‘Comments’ is the name of both the node and the section. The next node is called ‘Minimum’ and the previous node is called ‘Conventions’. The ‘Comments’ section is within the ‘Overview’ node, which is specified by the ‘Up’ pointer.
If a file has a ‘Top’ node, it must be called ‘top’ or ‘Top’ and be the first node in the file.
The menu updating commands create a menu of sections within a chapter, a menu of subsections within a section, and so on. This means that you must have a ‘Top’ node if you want a menu of chapters.
GNU Emacs Texinfo mode provides the
texinfo-multiple-files-update
command. This command creates or
updates ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers of included files as
well as those in the outer or overall Texinfo file, and it creates or
updates a main menu in the outer file. Depending on whether you call
it with optional arguments, the command updates only the pointers in
the first @node
line of the included files or all of them.
With C-u as a prefix argument, create and insert a master menu in the outer file. With a numeric prefix argument, such as C-u 2, first update all the menus and all the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers of all the included files before creating and inserting a master menu in the outer file.
In more details:
Called without any arguments:
@node
line in each file included in an outer or overall
Texinfo file.
Called with C-u as a prefix argument:
@node
line in each
included file.
Called with a numeric prefix argument, such as C-u 8:
texinfo-master-menu
with an argument when you are
working with just one file.
Note the use of the prefix argument in interactive use: with a regular
prefix argument, just C-u, the
texinfo-multiple-files-update
command inserts a master menu;
with a numeric prefix argument, such as C-u 8, the command
updates every pointer and menu in all the files and
then inserts a master menu.
If you plan to use the texinfo-multiple-files-update
command,
the outer Texinfo file that lists included files within it should
contain nothing but the beginning and end parts of a Texinfo file, and
a number of @include
commands listing the included files. It
should not even include indices, which should be listed in an included
file of their own.
Moreover, each of the included files must contain exactly one highest
level node (conventionally, @chapter
or equivalent),
and this node must be the first node in the included file.
Furthermore, each of these highest level nodes in each included file
must be at the same hierarchical level in the file structure.
Usually, each is a @chapter
, an @appendix
, or an
@unnumbered
node. Thus, normally, each included file contains
one, and only one, chapter or equivalent-level node.
The outer file should contain only one node, the ‘Top’ node. It
should not contain any nodes besides the single ‘Top’ node. The
texinfo-multiple-files-update
command will not process
them.
In addition to the major updating commands, Texinfo mode possesses several less frequently used updating commands:
Insert @node
lines before the @chapter
,
@section
, and other sectioning commands wherever they are
missing throughout a region in a Texinfo file.
With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if interactive), the
command texinfo-insert-node-lines
not only inserts
@node
lines but also inserts the chapter or section titles as
the names of the corresponding nodes. In addition, it inserts the
titles as node names in pre-existing @node
lines that lack
names. Since node names should be more concise than section or
chapter titles, you must manually edit node names so inserted.
For example, the following marks a whole buffer as a region and inserts
@node
lines and titles throughout:
C-x h C-u M-x texinfo-insert-node-lines
This command inserts titles as node names in @node
lines; the
texinfo-start-menu-description
command (see Inserting Frequently Used Commands) inserts titles as descriptions in
menu entries, a different action. However, in both cases, you need to
edit the inserted text.
Indent every description in the menu following point to the specified
column. You can use this command to give yourself more space for
descriptions. With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if
interactive), the texinfo-indent-menu-description
command indents
every description in every menu in the region. However, this command
does not indent the second and subsequent lines of a multi-line
description.
Insert the names of the nodes immediately following and preceding the
current node as the ‘Next’ or ‘Previous’ pointers regardless of those
nodes’ hierarchical level. This means that the ‘Next’ node of a
subsection may well be the next chapter. Sequentially ordered nodes are
useful for novels and other documents that you read through
sequentially. (However, in Info, the g * command lets
you look through the file sequentially, so sequentially ordered nodes
are not strictly necessary.) With an argument (prefix argument, if
interactive), the texinfo-sequential-node-update
command
sequentially updates all the nodes in the region.
Texinfo mode provides several commands for formatting part or all of a Texinfo file for Info.
texi2any
/makeinfo
Within Emacs ¶The texi2any
program provides better error messages
than either of the Emacs formatting commands. We recommend it.
The texi2any
program is independent of Emacs.
You can run texi2any
(or makeinfo
) in GNU Emacs
Texinfo mode by using either the makeinfo-region
or the
makeinfo-buffer
commands. In Texinfo mode, the commands
are bound to C-c C-m C-r and C-c C-m C-b by default.
When you invoke makeinfo-region
the output goes to a temporary
buffer. When you invoke makeinfo-buffer
output goes to the
file set with @setfilename
(see @setfilename
: Set the Output File Name).
The Emacs makeinfo-region
and makeinfo-buffer
commands
run the texi2any
program in a temporary shell buffer. If
texi2any
finds any errors, Emacs displays the error messages in
the temporary buffer.
You can parse the error messages by typing C-x `
(next-error
). This causes Emacs to go to and position the
cursor on the line in the Texinfo source that texi2any
thinks
caused the error. See Running make
or
Compilers Generally in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more
information about using the next-error
command.
In addition, you can kill the shell in which the texi2any
command is running or make the shell buffer display its most recent
output.
Kill the current running texi2any
(or makeinfo
) job
(from makeinfo-region
or makeinfo-buffer
).
Redisplay the texi2any
shell buffer to display its most recent
output.
(Note that the parallel commands for killing and recentering a TeX job are C-c C-t C-k and C-c C-t C-l. See Formatting and Printing in Texinfo Mode.)
You can specify options for texi2any
by setting the
makeinfo-options
variable with either the M-x
customize or the M-x set-variable command, or by setting the
variable in your .emacs initialization file.
For example, you could write the following in your .emacs file:
(setq makeinfo-options "--paragraph-indent=0 --no-split --fill-column=70 --verbose")
For more information, see
Easy Customization Interface in The GNU Emacs Manual,
Examining and Setting Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual,
Init File in The GNU Emacs Manual, and
texi2any
Options.
texinfo-format…
Commands ¶In GNU Emacs in Texinfo mode, you can format part or all of a Texinfo
file with the texinfo-format-region
command. This formats the
current region and displays the formatted text in a temporary buffer
called ‘*Info Region*’.
Similarly, you can format a buffer with the
texinfo-format-buffer
command. This command creates a new
buffer and generates the Info file in it. Typing C-x C-s will
save the Info file under the name specified by the
@setfilename
line which must be near the beginning of the
Texinfo file.
texinfo-format-region
Format the current region for Info.
texinfo-format-buffer
Format the current buffer for Info.
The texinfo-format-region
and texinfo-format-buffer
commands provide you with some error checking, and other functions can
provide you with further help in finding formatting errors. These
procedures are described in an appendix; see Catching Mistakes.
However, the texi2any
program provides better error checking
(see Running texi2any
/makeinfo
Within Emacs).
A peculiarity of the texinfo-format-buffer
and
texinfo-format-region
commands is that they do not indent (nor
fill) paragraphs that contain @w
or @*
commands.
GNU Emacs can be used for formatting and printing with TeX, from an Emacs Shell. Texinfo mode also provides predefined key commands for formatting and printing.
Texinfo mode provides several predefined key commands for TeX formatting and printing. These include commands for sorting indices, looking at the printer queue, killing the formatting job, and recentering the display of the buffer in which the operations occur.
Often, when you are writing a document, you want to typeset and print
only part of a file to see what it will look like. You can use the
texinfo-tex-region
and related commands for this purpose. Use
the texinfo-tex-buffer
command to format all of a
buffer.
For texinfo-tex-region
or texinfo-tex-buffer
to work, the
file must start with a ‘\input texinfo’ line and must
include a @settitle
line. The file must end with @bye
on a line by itself. (When you use texinfo-tex-region
, you must
surround the @settitle
line with start-of-header and
end-of-header lines.)
Run texi2dvi
on the buffer. In addition to running TeX on the
buffer, this command automatically creates or updates indices as
needed.
Run TeX on the current region.
If @-commands related to printed output are between the
start-of-header and end-of-header lines, then
texinfo-tex-region
will format the
region accordingly. For example, if you write the @smallbook
command
between the start-of-header and end-of-header lines, texinfo-tex-region
,
will format the region in “small” book size.
Run texindex
to sort the indices of a Texinfo file formatted with
texinfo-tex-region
. The texinfo-tex-region
command does
not run texindex
automatically; it only runs the tex
typesetting command. You must run the texinfo-tex-region
command
a second time after sorting the raw index files with the texindex
command. (Usually, you do not format an index when you format a region,
only when you format a buffer. Now that the texi2dvi
command
exists, there is little or no need for this command.)
Print a DVI file that was made with texinfo-tex-region
or
texinfo-tex-buffer
.
Show the print queue.
Delete a job from the print queue; you will be prompted for the job
number shown by a preceding C-c C-t C-q command
(texinfo-show-tex-print-queue
).
Kill the currently running TeX job started by either
texinfo-tex-region
or texinfo-tex-buffer
, or any other
process running in the Texinfo shell buffer.
Quit a TeX formatting job that has stopped because of an error by sending an x to it. When you do this, TeX preserves a record of what it did in a .log file.
Redisplay the shell buffer in which the TeX printing and formatting commands are run to show its most recent output.
Thus, the usual sequence of commands for formatting a buffer is as follows (with comments to the right):
C-c C-t C-b Run texi2dvi
on the buffer.
C-c C-t C-p Print the DVI file.
C-c C-t C-q Display the printer queue.
The Texinfo mode TeX formatting commands start a subshell in Emacs
called the *tex-shell*. The texinfo-tex-command
,
texinfo-texindex-command
, and tex-dvi-print-command
commands are all run in this shell.
You can watch the commands operate in the ‘*tex-shell*’ buffer, and you can switch to and from and use the ‘*tex-shell*’ buffer as you would any other shell buffer.
The formatting and print commands depend on the values of several variables. The default values are:
Variable Default value texinfo-texi2dvi-command "texi2dvi" texinfo-tex-command "tex" texinfo-texindex-command "texindex" texinfo-delete-from-print-queue-command "lprm" texinfo-tex-trailer "@bye" tex-start-of-header "%**start" tex-end-of-header "%**end" tex-dvi-print-command "lpr -d" tex-show-queue-command "lpq"
You can change the values of these variables with the M-x set-variable command (see Examining and Setting Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual), or with your .emacs initialization file (see Init File in The GNU Emacs Manual).
Beginning with version 20, GNU Emacs offers a user-friendly interface, called Customize, for changing values of user-definable variables. See Easy Customization Interface in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more details about this. The Texinfo variables can be found in the ‘Development/Docs/Texinfo’ group, once you invoke the M-x customize command.
Yet another way to apply the TeX formatting command to a Texinfo file
is to put that command in a local variables list at the end of the
Texinfo file. You can then specify the tex
or texi2dvi
commands as a compile-command
and have Emacs run it by typing
M-x compile. This creates a special shell called the
*compilation* buffer in which Emacs runs the compile command.
For example, at the end of the gdb.texi file, after the
@bye
, you could put the following:
Local Variables: compile-command: "texi2dvi gdb.texi" End:
This technique is most often used by programmers who also compile programs this way; see Compilation in The GNU Emacs Manual.
In Texinfo mode, each set of commands has default keybindings that begin with the same keys. All the commands that are custom-created for Texinfo mode begin with C-c. The keys are somewhat mnemonic.
The insert commands are invoked by typing C-c twice and then the first letter of the @-command to be inserted. (It might make more sense mnemonically to use C-c C-i, for ‘custom insert’, but C-c C-c is quick to type.)
C-c C-c c Insert ‘@code’. C-c C-c d Insert ‘@dfn’. C-c C-c e Insert ‘@end’. C-c C-c i Insert ‘@item’. C-c C-c n Insert ‘@node’. C-c C-c s Insert ‘@samp’. C-c C-c v Insert ‘@var’. C-c { Insert braces. C-c ] C-c } Move out of enclosing braces.
C-c C-c C-d Insert a node’s section title in the space for the description in a menu entry line.
The texinfo-show-structure
command is often used within a
narrowed region.
C-c C-s List all the headings.
The texinfo-master-menu
command creates a master menu; and can
be used to update every node and menu in a file as well.
C-c C-u m
M-x texinfo-master-menu
Create or update a master menu.
C-u C-c C-u m With C-u as a prefix argument, first create or update all nodes and regular menus, and then create a master menu.
The update pointer commands are invoked by typing C-c C-u and
then either C-n for texinfo-update-node
or C-e for
texinfo-every-node-update
.
C-c C-u C-n Update a node. C-c C-u C-e Update every node in the buffer.
Invoke the update menu commands by typing C-c C-u
and then either C-m for texinfo-make-menu
or
C-a for texinfo-all-menus-update
. To update
both nodes and menus at the same time, precede C-c C-u
C-a with C-u.
C-c C-u C-m Make or update a menu.
C-c C-u C-a Make or update all menus in a buffer.
C-u C-c C-u C-a With C-u as a prefix argument, first create or update all nodes and then create or update all menus.
The Info formatting commands that are written in Emacs Lisp are invoked by typing C-c C-e and then either C-r for a region or C-b for the whole buffer.
The Info formatting commands that are based on the
texi2any
/makeinfo
program are invoked by typing
C-c C-m and then either C-r for a region or C-b for
the whole buffer.
Use the texinfo-format…
commands:
C-c C-e C-r Format the region. C-c C-e C-b Format the buffer.
Use texi2any
/makeinfo
:
C-c C-m C-r Format the region. C-c C-m C-b Format the buffer. C-c C-m C-l Recenter thetexi2any
output buffer. C-c C-m C-k Kill thetexi2any
formatting job.
The TeX typesetting and printing commands are invoked by typing
C-c C-t and then another control command: C-r for
texinfo-tex-region
, C-b for texinfo-tex-buffer
,
and so on.
C-c C-t C-r Run TeX on the region. C-c C-t C-b Runtexi2dvi
on the buffer. C-c C-t C-i Runtexindex
. C-c C-t C-p Print the DVI file. C-c C-t C-q Show the print queue. C-c C-t C-d Delete a job from the print queue. C-c C-t C-k Kill the current TeX formatting job. C-c C-t C-x Quit a currently stopped TeX formatting job. C-c C-t C-l Recenter the output buffer.
The remaining updating commands do not have standard keybindings because they are rarely used.
M-x texinfo-insert-node-lines
Insert missing @node
lines in region.
With C-u as a prefix argument,
use section titles as node names.
M-x texinfo-multiple-files-update Update a multi-file document. With C-u 2 as a prefix argument, create or update all nodes and menus in all included files first.
M-x texinfo-indent-menu-description
Indent descriptions.
M-x texinfo-sequential-node-update
Insert node pointers in strict sequence.
In general, there is no need to edit or process Info files. Most of the content of Info file is plain text, but the tag tables require computing offsets for nodes and indirect files (see Tag Files and Split Files), which is impractical. The Texinfo processors output well-formatted Info from Texinfo input. Also, lot of information from the Texinfo source is lost in the Info file. The Texinfo source is therefore more suitable to analyse a manual, be it for error reporting, for statistics, or to set up translations.
Still, especially with manually written Info files, there are some situations
where it may be interesting to process Info files directly, in particular
to compute Info files node offsets and to compute split Info files file
offsets. Two Emacs commands do that. Info-tagify
adds a tag table
for a nonsplit file lacking one. This function is also useful for Info
file validation (see Finding Badly Referenced Nodes). It is
also possible to split a nonsplit Info file with Info-split
.
Texinfo processors create tag tables automatically. The only exception
arise when texinfo-format-buffer
is called with a prefix, as
C-u M-x texinfo-format-buffer, to create an non split Info
file without a tag table (which can be useful in some cases for Info file
validation, see Creating an Unsplit File and Adding a Tag Table). Adding a tag table is therefore
more generally useful for manually written Info files.
To create a tag table for an nonsplit file, visit the Info file you wish to tagify and type:
M-x Info-tagify
(Note the uppercase ‘I’ in Info-tagify
.) This creates an
Info file with a tag table. A tag table is part of a well formed Info
file (see Tag Files and Split Files). A tag table is also needed to validate
or split the Info file.
You should split a large file or else let the
texinfo-format-buffer
or makeinfo-buffer
command do it
for you automatically. (Generally you will let one of the formatting
commands do this job for you. See Formatting for Info.)
The split-off files are called the indirect subfiles.
Tag tables are created automatically by the formatting command; you only need to create a tag table yourself if you are doing the job manually. See Tagifying a File, for information about creating a tag table.
Visit the Info file you wish to tagify and split manually and type the two commands:
M-x Info-tagify M-x Info-split
(Note that the ‘I’ in ‘Info’ is uppercase.)
When you use the Info-split
command, the buffer is modified into a
(small) Info file which lists the indirect subfiles. This file should be
saved in place of the original visited file. The indirect subfiles are
written in the same directory the original file is in, with names generated
by appending ‘-’ and a number to the original file name.
The primary file still functions as an Info file, but it contains just the tag table and a directory of subfiles. See Tag Files and Split Files.
Besides mistakes in the content of your documentation, there are two kinds of mistake you can make with Texinfo: you can make mistakes with @-commands, and you can make mistakes with the structure of the nodes and chapters.
For finding problems with @-commands, you can run TeX or a region formatting command on the region that has a problem; indeed, you can run these commands on each region as you write it.
For finding problems with the structure of nodes and chapters, you can use
C-c C-s (texinfo-show-structure
) and the related occur
command and you can use the M-x Info-validate command.
texi2any
Preferredtexi2any
Preferred ¶The texi2any
program does an excellent job of catching errors
and reporting them—far better than texinfo-format-region
or
texinfo-format-buffer
. In addition, the various functions for
automatically creating and updating node pointers and menus remove
many opportunities for human error.
Use texi2any
(or its Texinfo mode manifestations,
makeinfo-region
and makeinfo-buffer
) to format your
file and check for other errors. This is the best way to work with
Texinfo. But if you cannot use texi2any
, or your problem
is very puzzling, then you may want to use the tools described
in this section.
After you have written part of a Texinfo file, you can use the
texinfo-format-region
or the makeinfo-region
command to
see whether the region formats properly.
Most likely, however, you are reading this section because for some
reason you cannot use the makeinfo-region
command; therefore, the
rest of this section presumes that you are using
texinfo-format-region
.
If you have made a mistake with an @-command,
texinfo-format-region
will stop processing at or after the
error and display an error message. To see where in the buffer the
error occurred, switch to the ‘*Info Region*’ buffer; the cursor
will be in a position that is after the location of the error. Also,
the text will not be formatted after the place where the error
occurred (or more precisely, where it was detected).
For example, if you accidentally end a menu with the command @end
menus
with an ‘s’ on the end, instead of with @end menu
, you
will see an error message that says:
@end menus is not handled by texinfo
The cursor will stop at the point in the buffer where the error occurs, or not long after it. The buffer will look like this:
---------- Buffer: *Info Region* ---------- * Menu: * Using texinfo-show-structure:: How to use `texinfo-show-structure' to catch mistakes. * Running Info-validate:: How to check for unreferenced nodes. @end menus ∗ ---------- Buffer: *Info Region* ----------
The texinfo-format-region
command sometimes provides slightly
odd error messages. For example, the following cross-reference fails
to format:
(@xref{Catching Mistakes, for more info.)
In this case, texinfo-format-region
detects the missing closing
brace but displays a message that says ‘Unbalanced parentheses’
rather than ‘Unbalanced braces’. This is because the formatting
command looks for mismatches between braces as if they were
parentheses.
Sometimes texinfo-format-region
fails to detect mistakes. For
example, in the following, the closing brace is swapped with the
closing parenthesis:
(@xref{Catching Mistakes), for more info.}
Formatting produces:
(*Note for more info.: Catching Mistakes)
The only way for you to detect this error is to realize that the reference should have looked like this:
(*Note Catching Mistakes::, for more info.)
Incidentally, if you are reading this node in Info and type f
RET (Info-follow-reference
), you will generate an error
message that says:
No such node: "Catching Mistakes) The only way ...
This is because Info perceives the example of the error as the first
cross-reference in this node and if you type a RET immediately
after typing the Info f command, Info will attempt to go to the
referenced node. If you type f catch TAB RET, Info
will complete the node name of the correctly written example and take
you to the ‘Catching Mistakes’ node. (If you try this, you can return
from the ‘Catching Mistakes’ node by typing l
(Info-last
).)
You can also catch mistakes when you format a file with TeX.
Usually, you will want to do this after you have run
texinfo-format-buffer
(or, better, makeinfo-buffer
) on
the same file, because texinfo-format-buffer
sometimes displays
error messages that make more sense than TeX. (See Catching Errors with Info Formatting, for more information.)
For example, TeX was run on a Texinfo file, part of which is shown here:
---------- Buffer: texinfo.texi ---------- name of the Texinfo file as an extension. The @samp{??} are `wildcards' that cause the shell to substitute all the raw index files. (@xref{sorting indices, for more information about sorting indices.) ---------- Buffer: texinfo.texi ----------
(The cross-reference lacks a closing brace.) TeX produced the following output, after which it stopped:
---------- Buffer: *tex-shell* ---------- Runaway argument? {sorting indices, for more information about sorting indices.) @ETC. ! Paragraph ended before @xref was complete. <to be read again> @par l.27 ? ---------- Buffer: *tex-shell* ----------
In this case, TeX produced an accurate and understandable error message:
Paragraph ended before @xref was complete.
‘@par’ is an internal TeX command of no relevance to Texinfo. ‘l.27’ means that TeX detected the problem on line 27 of the Texinfo file. The ‘?’ is the prompt TeX uses in this circumstance.
Unfortunately, TeX is not always so helpful, and sometimes you must truly be a Sherlock Holmes to discover what went wrong.
In any case, if you run into a problem like this, you can do one of three things.
This is often the best thing to do. However, beware: the one error may produce a cascade of additional error messages as its consequences are felt through the rest of the file. To stop TeX when it is producing such an avalanche of error messages, type C-c (or C-c C-c, if you are running a shell inside Emacs).
If you are running TeX inside Emacs, you need to switch to the shell buffer and line at which TeX offers the ‘?’ prompt.
Sometimes TeX will format a file without producing error messages even
though there is a problem. This usually occurs if a command is not ended
but TeX is able to continue processing anyhow. For example, if you fail
to end an itemized list with the @end itemize
command, TeX will
write a DVI file that you can print out. The only error message that
TeX will give you is the somewhat mysterious comment:
(@end occurred inside a group at level 1)
However, if you print the DVI file, you will find that the text
of the file that follows the itemized list is entirely indented as if
it were part of the last item in the itemized list. The error message
is the way TeX says that it expected to find an @end
command somewhere in the file; but that it could not determine where
it was needed.
Another source of notoriously hard-to-find errors is a missing
@end group
command. If you ever are stumped by
incomprehensible errors, look for a missing @end group
command
first.
If the Texinfo file lacks header lines, TeX may stop in the beginning of its run and display output that looks like the following. The ‘*’ indicates that TeX is waiting for input.
This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2c 7.0) (test.texinfo [1]) *
In this case, simply type \end RET after the asterisk. Then write the header lines in the Texinfo file and run the TeX command again. (Note the use of the backslash, ‘\’. TeX uses ‘\’ instead of ‘@’; and in this circumstance, you are working directly with TeX, not with Texinfo.)
You can use the Info-validate
command to check whether any of
the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, ‘Up’ or other node pointers fail to point to a
node. This command checks that every node pointer points to an
existing node. The Info-validate
command works only on Info
files, not on Texinfo files.
The texi2any
program validates pointers automatically, so you
do not need to use the Info-validate
command if you are using
texi2any
. With the customization variable
CHECK_NORMAL_MENU_STRUCTURE
set, texi2any
will also
warn if the nodes pointers (either explicitly or automatically set)
are not consistent with the order of node menu entries.
texi2any
does not check that every ‘Next’ pointer is matched
by a ‘Previous’ (in the node where the ‘Next’ points) which points back,
since it may be correct for a non standard document structure.
You only may need to use Info-validate
if you
are unable to run texi2any
and instead must create an Info file
using texinfo-format-region
or texinfo-format-buffer
, or
if you write an Info file from scratch.
Info-validate
¶To use Info-validate
, visit the Info file you wish to check and
type:
M-x Info-validate
Note that the Info-validate
command requires an uppercase
‘I’. You may also need to create a tag table before running
Info-validate
. See Tagifying a File.
If your file is valid, you will receive a message that says “File appears valid”. However, if you have a pointer that does not point to a node, error messages will be displayed in a buffer called ‘*problems in info file*’.
For example, Info-validate
was run on a test file that contained
only the first node of this manual. One of the messages said:
In node "Overview", invalid Next: Texinfo Mode
This meant that the node called ‘Overview’ had a ‘Next’ pointer that did not point to anything (which was true in this case, since the test file had only one node in it).
Now suppose we add a node named ‘Texinfo Mode’ to our test case but we do not specify a ‘Previous’ for this node. Then we will get the following error message:
In node "Texinfo Mode", should have Previous: Overview
This is because, with a standard document structure, every ‘Next’ pointer should be matched by a ‘Previous’ (in the node where the ‘Next’ points) which points back.
Info-validate
also checks that all menu entries and cross-references
point to actual nodes.
Info-validate
requires a tag table and does not work with files
that have been split. (The texinfo-format-buffer
command
automatically splits large files.) In order to use Info-validate
on a large file, you must run texinfo-format-buffer
with an
argument so that it does not split the Info file; and you must create a
tag table for the unsplit file.
You can run Info-validate
only on a single Info file that has a
tag table. The command will not work on the indirect subfiles that
are generated when a master file is split. If you have a large file
(longer than 300,000 bytes or so), you need to run the
texinfo-format-buffer
or makeinfo-buffer
command in such
a way that it does not create indirect subfiles. You will also need
to create a tag table for the Info file. After you have done this,
you can run Info-validate
and look for badly referenced
nodes.
The first step is to create an unsplit Info file. To prevent
texinfo-format-buffer
from splitting a Texinfo file into
smaller Info files, give a prefix to the M-x
texinfo-format-buffer command:
C-u M-x texinfo-format-buffer
or else
C-u C-c C-e C-b
When you do this, texinfo-format-buffer
will not split the file and will
not create a tag table for it.
After creating an unsplit Info file, you must create a tag table for
it (see Tagifying a File). Visit the unsplit Info file created by
texinfo-format-buffer
and type:
M-x Info-tagify
The third step is to validate the Info file:
M-x Info-validate
(Note the uppercase ‘I’ in Info-validate
.)
In brief, the steps are:
C-u M-x texinfo-format-buffer M-x Info-tagify M-x Info-validate
After you have validated the node structure, you can rerun
texinfo-format-buffer
in the normal way so it will construct a
tag table and split the file automatically, or you can make the tag
table and split the file manually (see Splitting a File Manually).
You can format Texinfo files for Info using batch-texinfo-format
and Emacs batch mode. You can run Emacs in batch mode from any shell,
including a shell inside of Emacs. (See Initial Options in The GNU Emacs Manual.)
Here is a shell command to format all the files that end in .texinfo in the current directory:
emacs -batch -funcall batch-texinfo-format *.texinfo
Emacs processes all the files listed on the command line, even if an error occurs while attempting to format some of them.
Run batch-texinfo-format
only with Emacs in batch mode as shown;
it is not interactive. It kills the batch mode Emacs on completion.
batch-texinfo-format
is convenient if you lack texi2any
and want to format several Texinfo files at once. When you use Batch
mode, you create a new Emacs process. This frees your current Emacs, so
you can continue working in it. (When you run
texinfo-format-region
or texinfo-format-buffer
, you cannot
use that Emacs for anything else until the command finishes.)
Here are additional commands which affect the document as a whole. Most of these commands are for customizing the appearance of the printed output. They are generally all given before the Top node, if they are given at all.
@setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before Chapters@paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation@firstparagraphindent
: Indenting After Headings@exampleindent
: Environment Indenting@smallbook
: Printing “Small” Books@pagesizes
[width][, height]: Custom Page Sizes@setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before Chapters ¶In an officially bound book, text is usually printed on both sides of the paper, chapters start on right-hand pages, and right-hand pages have odd numbers. But in short reports, text often is printed only on one side of the paper. Also in short reports, chapters sometimes do not start on new pages, but are printed on the same page as the end of the preceding chapter, after a small amount of vertical whitespace.
You can use the @setchapternewpage
command with various
arguments to specify how chapters should be started in printed output
and whether headers should be formatted for printing on one or both sides of
the paper (single-sided or double-sided printing).
Write the @setchapternewpage
command at the beginning of a
line followed by its argument. For example, you would write the
following to cause each chapter to start on a fresh odd-numbered page:
@setchapternewpage odd
You can specify one of three alternatives with the
@setchapternewpage
command:
@setchapternewpage off
Typeset a new chapter on the same page as the last chapter, after skipping some vertical whitespace. Also, format page headers for single-sided printing.
@setchapternewpage on
Start new chapters on new pages and format page headers for single-sided printing. This is the form most often used for short reports or personal printing. This is the default.
@setchapternewpage odd
Start new chapters on new, odd-numbered pages (right-handed pages) and typeset for double-sided printing. This is the form most often used for books and manuals.
Texinfo does not have a @setchapternewpage even
command,
because there is no printing tradition of starting chapters or books on
an even-numbered page.
If you don’t like the default headers that @setchapternewpage
sets, you can explicit control them with the @headings
command.
See The @headings
Command.
At the beginning of a manual or book, pages are not numbered—for example, the title and copyright pages of a book are not numbered. By convention, table of contents and frontmatter pages are numbered with roman numerals and not in sequence with the rest of the document.
The @setchapternewpage
has no effect in output formats that do
not have pages, such as Info and HTML.
We recommend not including any @setchapternewpage
command in
your document source at all, since such desired pagination is not
intrinsic to the document. For a particular hard copy run, if you
don’t want the default output (no blank pages, same headers on all
pages) use the --texinfo option to texi2dvi
to
specify the output you want.
Most printed manuals contain headings along the top of every page except the title and copyright pages. Some manuals also contain footings. Headings and footings have no meaning in Info or the other output formats.
Texinfo provides two standard heading formats, one for manuals printed on one side of each sheet of paper, and the other for manuals printed on both sides of the paper. By default, nothing is specified for the footing of a Texinfo file, so the footing remains blank.
Texinfo also has several heading and footing commands that you can use to generate your own heading and footing formats.
In Texinfo, headings and footings are single lines at the tops and bottoms of pages; you cannot create multiline headings or footings. Each header or footer line is divided into three parts: a left part, a middle part, and a right part. Any part, or a whole line, may be left blank. Text for the left part of a header or footer line is set flushleft; text for the middle part is centered; and, text for the right part is set flushright.
@headings
Command ¶The @headings
command is rarely used. It specifies what kinds of
page headings and footings to print on each page. Usually, this is
controlled by the @setchapternewpage
command. You need the
@headings
command only if the @setchapternewpage
command
does not do what you want.
You can use @headings
as follows:
@headings off
Turn off printing of page headings.
@headings single
Turn on page headings appropriate for single-sided printing.
@headings double
Turn on page headings appropriate for double-sided printing.
@headings singleafter
@headings doubleafter
Turn on single
or double
headings, respectively, after the
current page is output.
@headings on
Turn on page headings: single
if ‘@setchapternewpage
on’, double
otherwise.
For example, suppose you write @setchapternewpage off
before the
@titlepage
command to start a new chapter on the
same page as the end of the last chapter. This command also causes
page headers to be typeset for single-sided printing. To cause
page headers to be typeset for double-sided printing, write @headings
double
.
You can stop any page headings at all from being generated by writing
@headings off
on a line of its own, like this:
@headings off
Texinfo provides two standard heading formats, one for manuals printed on one side of each sheet of paper, and the other for manuals printed on both sides of the paper.
The standard format for single-sided printing consists of a header line in which the left-hand part contains the name of the chapter, the central part is blank, and the right-hand part contains the page number. A single-sided page looks like this:
_______________________ | | | chapter page number | | | | Start of text ... | | ... | | |
In the standard double-sided format, the left part of the left-hand
(even-numbered) page contains the page number, the central part is
blank, and the right part contains the title (specified by the
@settitle
command). The left part of the right-hand
(odd-numbered) page contains the name of the chapter, the central part
is blank, and the right part contains the page number.
An even-numbered page and an odd-numbered page, side by side as in an
open book, look like this:
_______________________ _______________________ | | | | | page number title | | chapter page number | | | | | | Start of text ... | | More text ... | | ... | | ... | | | | |
The chapter name is preceded by the word “Chapter”, the chapter number and a colon. This makes it easier to keep track of where you are in the manual.
Note that on pages where a new chapter starts, some text may be omitted from the heading line.
By default, nothing is specified for the footing of a Texinfo file, so the footing remains blank.
You can use the standard headings provided with Texinfo or specify your own. By default, Texinfo has no footers, so if you specify them, the available page size for the main text will be slightly reduced.
Texinfo provides six commands for specifying headings and footings:
@everyheading
and @everyfooting
generate page headers and
footers that are the same for both even- and odd-numbered pages.
@evenheading
and @evenfooting
commands generate headers
and footers for even-numbered (left-hand) pages.
@oddheading
and @oddfooting
generate headers and footers
for odd-numbered (right-hand) pages.
You must cancel the predefined heading commands with the
@headings off
command before defining your own specifications.
Here is how to place the chapter name at the left, the page number in the center, and the date at the right of every header for both even- and odd-numbered pages:
@headings off @everyheading @thischapter @| @thispage @| @today{}
You need to divide the left part from the central part and the central part from the right part by inserting ‘@|’ between parts. Otherwise, the specification command will not be able to tell where the text for one part ends and the next part begins.
Each part can contain text or @-commands. The text is printed as if the part were within an ordinary paragraph in the body of the page. The @-commands replace themselves with the page number, date, chapter name, or whatever.
Here are the six heading and footing commands:
@everyheading left @| center @| right
¶@everyfooting left @| center @| right
The ‘every’ commands specify the format for both even- and odd-numbered pages. These commands are for documents that are printed on one side of each sheet of paper, or for documents in which you want symmetrical headers or footers.
@evenheading left @| center @| right
¶@oddheading left @| center @| right
@evenfooting left @| center @| right
@oddfooting left @| center @| right
The ‘even’ and ‘odd’ commands specify the format for even-numbered pages and odd-numbered pages. These commands are for books and manuals that are printed on both sides of each sheet of paper.
Use the ‘@this…’ series of @-commands to provide the names of chapters and sections and the page number. You can use the ‘@this…’ commands in the left, center, or right portions of headers and footers.
Here are the ‘@this…’ commands:
@thispage
¶Expands to the current page number.
@thissectionname
¶Expands to the name of the current section.
@thissectionnum
¶Expands to the number of the current section.
@thissection
¶Expands to the number and name of the current section, in the format ‘Section 1: Title’.
@thischaptername
¶Expands to the name of the current chapter.
@thischapternum
¶Expands to the number of the current chapter, or letter of the current appendix.
@thischapter
¶Expands to the number and name of the current chapter, in the format ‘Chapter 1: Title’.
@thistitle
¶Expands to the name of the document, as specified by the
@settitle
command.
@thisfile
¶For @include
files only: expands to the name of the current
@include
file. If the current Texinfo source file is not an
@include
file, this command has no effect. This command does
not provide the name of the current Texinfo source file unless
it is an @include
file. (See Include Files, for more
information about @include
files.)
You can also use the @today{}
command, which expands to the
current date, in ‘1 Jan 1900’ format.
Other @-commands and text are printed in a header or footer just as if they were in the body of a page. It is useful to incorporate text, particularly when you are writing drafts:
@headings off @everyheading @emph{Draft!} @| @thispage @| @thischapter @everyfooting @| @| Version: 0.27: @today{}
Beware of overlong titles: they may overlap another part of the header or footer and blot it out.
If you have very short chapters and/or sections, several of them can
appear on a single page. You can specify which chapters and sections
you want @thischapter
, @thissection
and other such
macros to refer to on such pages as follows:
@everyheadingmarks ref
¶@everyfootingmarks ref
The ref argument can be either top
(the @this...
commands will refer to the chapter/section at the top of a page) or
bottom
(the commands will reflect the situation at the bottom
of a page). These ‘@every...’ commands specify what to do on
both even- and odd-numbered pages.
@evenheadingmarks ref
¶@oddheadingmarks ref
@evenfootingmarks ref
@oddfootingmarks ref
These ‘@even...’ and ‘@odd...’ commands specify what to do on only even- or odd-numbered pages, respectively. The ref argument is the same as with the ‘@every...’ commands.
Write these commands immediately after the @...contents
commands, or after the @end titlepage
command if you don’t
have a table of contents or if it is printed at the end of your
manual. These commands have no effect in LaTeX.
By default, for TeX, the @this...
commands reflect the situation at
the bottom of a page both in headings and in footings.
@paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation ¶The Texinfo processors may insert whitespace at the beginning of the
first line of each paragraph, thereby indenting that paragraph. You can
use the @paragraphindent
command to specify this indentation.
Write a @paragraphindent
command at the beginning of a line
followed by either ‘asis’ or a number:
@paragraphindent indent
The indentation is according to the value of indent:
asis
Do not change the existing indentation (not implemented in printed output).
none
Omit all indentation.
Indent by n space characters in Info output, by n ems in printed output.
The default value of indent is 3. @paragraphindent
is
ignored for HTML output.
It is best to write the @paragraphindent
command before the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file, so the region
formatting commands indent paragraphs as specified. See Start of Header.
@firstparagraphindent
: Indenting After Headings ¶As you can see in the present manual, the first paragraph in any
section is not indented by default. Typographically, indentation is a
paragraph separator, which means that it is unnecessary when a new
section begins. This indentation is controlled with the
@firstparagraphindent
command:
@firstparagraphindent word
The first paragraph after a heading is indented according to the value of word:
none
Prevents the first paragraph from being indented (default).
This option is ignored by makeinfo
if
@paragraphindent asis
is in effect.
insert
Include normal paragraph indentation. This respects the paragraph
indentation set by a @paragraphindent
command
(see @paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph Indentation).
@firstparagraphindent
is ignored for HTML and DocBook output.
It is best to write the @firstparagraphindent
command before the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file, so the region
formatting commands indent paragraphs as specified. See Start of Header.
@exampleindent
: Environment Indenting ¶The Texinfo processors indent each line of @example
and similar
environments. You can use the @exampleindent
command to specify
this indentation. Write an @exampleindent
command at the
beginning of a line followed by either ‘asis’ or a number:
@exampleindent indent
The indentation is according to the value of indent:
asis
Do not change the existing indentation (not implemented in printed output).
Omit all indentation.
Indent environments by n space characters in Info output, by n ems in printed output.
The default value of indent is 5 spaces in Info, and 0.4in in printed output, which is somewhat less. (The reduction is to help fit more characters onto physical lines in printed manuals.)
It is best to write the @exampleindent
command before the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file, so the region
formatting commands indent paragraphs as specified. See Start of Header.
@smallbook
: Printing “Small” Books ¶By default, TeX typesets pages for printing in an 8.5 by 11 inch format, which is the “letter” size commonly used in the United States. However, you can direct TeX or LaTeX to typeset a document in a 7 by 9.25 inch format that is suitable for bound books by inserting the following command on a line by itself at the beginning of the Texinfo file, before the title page:
@smallbook
(Since many books are about 7 by 9.25 inches, this command might better
have been called the @regularbooksize
command, but it came to be
called the @smallbook
command by comparison to the 8.5 by 11
inch format.)
See Format with texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
,
and Preparing for TeX, for other ways to format with
@smallbook
with TeX that do not require changing the source file.
You can format a document for printing on ISO 216 A4 paper size with
the @afourpaper
command. Write the command on a line by
itself near the beginning of the Texinfo file, before the title page.
You may or may not prefer the formatting that results from the command
@afourlatex
. There’s also @afourwide
for A4 paper in
wide format, @afivepaper
for A5 paper, and @bsixpaper
for
B6 paper.
See Format with texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
and Preparing for TeX, for other ways to format for different
paper sizes that do not require changing the source file.
@pagesizes
[width][, height]: Custom Page Sizes ¶You can explicitly specify the height and (optionally) width of the main
text area on the page with the @pagesizes
command. Write this
on a line by itself near the beginning of the Texinfo file, before the
title page. The height comes first, then the width if desired,
separated by a comma. Examples:
@pagesizes 200mm,150mm
and
@pagesizes 11.5in
This would be reasonable for printing on B5-size paper. To emphasize, this command specifies the size of the text area, not the size of the paper (which is 250mm by 177mm for B5, 14in by 8.5in for legal).
To make more elaborate changes, such as changing any of the page margins, you must define a new command in texinfo.tex or texinfo.cnf.
See Format with texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
,
and Preparing for TeX, for other ways to specify
@pagesizes
that do not require changing the source file.
Some versions of TeX, namely pdfTeX and LuaTeX, have microtypography features. These involve stretching font glyphs slightly, and allowing text to produce very slightly into the margins. Use of these gives TeX more flexibility in breaking a paragraph into lines, and can improve paragraph appearance by reducing hyphenation and producing a more consistent typographic color.
texinfo.tex uses these features (‘microtype’ for short) when available. You can turn microtype off by specifying ‘@microtype off’ in your input file; likewise, ‘@microtype on’ turns microtype back on.
The fonts used in LaTeX output may not be scalable. If fonts are not scalable, using microtypography could trigger an error when converting the LaTeX output. Therefore microtypography is not turned on in the default case in LaTeX output. It is possible to turn it on with ‘@microtype on’. A way to get scalable fonts for the font used in the default LaTeX output is to install the CM-Super font package (http://ctan.org/pkg/cm-super).
The @microtype
command does nothing for other output formats.
You can attempt to direct TeX to typeset pages larger or smaller
than usual with the \mag
TeX command. Everything that is
typeset is scaled proportionally larger or smaller. (\mag
stands for “magnification”.) This is not a Texinfo
@-command, but is a raw TeX command that is prefixed with a
backslash. You have to write this command between @tex
and
@end tex
(see Raw Formatter Commands).
Follow the \mag
command with an ‘=’ and then a number that
is 1000 times the magnification you desire. For example, to print pages
at 1.2 normal size, write the following near the beginning of the
Texinfo file, before the title page:
@tex \global\mag=1200 @end tex
With some printing technologies, you can print normal-sized copies that look better than usual by giving a larger-than-normal master to your print shop. They do the reduction, thus effectively increasing the resolution.
Depending on your system, DVI files prepared with a
nonstandard-\mag
may not print or may print only with certain
magnifications. Be prepared to experiment.
Here we describe the technical details of the Info format.
In this formal description, the characters <>*()|=#
are used
for the language of the description itself. Other characters are
literal. The formal constructs used are typical: <...>
indicates a metavariable name, ‘=’ means definition, ‘*’
repetition, ‘?’ optional, ‘()’ grouping, ‘|’
alternation, and ‘#’ comment.
In general, programs that read Info files should try to be case-insensitive to keywords that occur in the file (for example, ‘Tag Table’ and ‘Tag table’ should be equivalent) in order to support Info-generating programs that use different capitalization.
We specify literal parentheses (those that are part of the Info
format) with <lparen>
and <rparen>
, meaning the single
characters ‘(’ and ‘)’ respectively. Finally,
the two-character sequence ‘^x’ means the single
character ‘CTRL-x’, for any x.
This format definition was written some 25 years after the Info format was first devised. So in the event of conflicts between this definition and actual practice, practice wins. It also assumes some general knowledge of Texinfo; it is meant to be a guide for implementors rather than a rigid technical standard. We may refer back to other parts of this manual for examples and definitions, rather than redundantly spelling out every detail.
To begin, an Info manual is either nonsplit (contained wholly within a single file) or split (across several files).
The syntax for a nonsplit manual is:
<nonsplit info file> = <preamble> <node>* <tag table>? <local variables>?
When split, there is a main file, which contains only pointers to the nodes given in other subfiles. The main file looks like this:
<split info main file> = <preamble> <indirect table> <tag table> <local variables>?
The subfiles in a split manual have the following syntax:
<split info subfile> = <preamble> <node>*
Note that the tag table is not optional for split files, as it is used with the indirect table to deduce which subfile a particular node is in.
Several of the sections in an Info file (such as nodes or tag tables) begin with a sequence:
<separator> = (^L)?^_(^L)?^J
That is, a ‘CTRL-_’ character followed by a newline, with optional formfeed characters.
The <preamble>
is text at the beginning of all output files.
It is not intended to be visible by default in an Info viewer, but
may be displayed upon user request.
<preamble> = <identification> # "This is FILENAME, produced by ..." <copying text> # Expansion of @copying text. <dir entries> # Derived from @dircategory and @direntry.
These pieces are:
<identification line>
An arbitrary string beginning the output file, followed by a blank line.
<copying text>
The expansion of a @copying
environment, if the manual has
one (see @copying
: Declare Copying Permissions).
<dir entries>
The result of any @dircategory
and @direntry
commands present in the manual (see Installing Info Directory Files).
<indirect table> = <separator> Indirect: (<filename>: <bytepos>)*
The indirect table is written to the main file in the case of split output only. It specifies, as a decimal integer, the starting byte position (zero-based) that the first node of each subfile would have if the subfiles were concatenated together in order, not including the top-level file. The first node of actual content is pointed to by the first entry.
As an example, suppose split output is generated for the GDB manual. The top-level file gdb.info will contain something like this:
<separator> Indirect: gdb.info-1: 1878 gdb.info-2: 295733 ...
This tells Info viewers that the first node of the manual occurs at byte 1878 of the file gdb.info-1 (which would be after that file’s preamble.) The first node in the gdb.info-2 subfile would start at byte 295733 if gdb.info-2 were appended to gdb.info-1, including any preamble sections in both files.
Unfortunately, Info-creating programs such as makeinfo
have not
always implemented these rules perfectly, due to various bugs and
oversights. Therefore, robust Info viewers should fall back to
searching “nearby” the given position for a node, instead of
giving up immediately if the position is not exactly at a node beginning.
<tag table> = <separator> Tag Table: (<lparen>Indirect<rparen>)? (Node|Ref): <nodeid>^?<bytepos> <separator> End Tag Table
The ‘(Indirect)’ line appears in the case of split output only.
The tag table specifies the starting byte position of each node and anchor in the file. In the case of split output, it is only written in the main output file.
Each line defines an identifier as either an anchor or a node, as specified. For example, ‘Node: Top^?1647’ says that the node named ‘Top’ starts at byte 1647 while ‘Ref: Overview-Footnote-1^?30045’ says that the anchor named ‘Overview-Footnote-1’ starts at byte 30045. It is an error to define the same identifier both ways.
In the case of nonsplit output, the byte positions simply refer to the location in the output file. In the case of split output, the byte positions refer to an imaginary file created by concatenating all the split files (but not the top-level file). See the previous section.
Here is an example:
^_ Tag Table: Node: Top^?89 Node: Ch1^?292 ^_ End Tag Table
This specifies a manual with two nodes, ‘Top’ and ‘Ch1’, at byte positions 89 and 292 respectively. Because the ‘(Indirect)’ line is not present, the manual is not split.
Preamble sections or other non-node sections of files do not have a tag table entry.
The local variables section is optional and is currently used to give the encoding information. It may be augmented in the future.
<local variables> = <separator> Local Variables: coding: <encoding> End:
See @documentencoding enc
: Set Input Encoding.
Regular nodes look like this:
<node> = <separator> File: <fn>, Node: <id1>, (Next: <id2>, )? (Prev: <id3>, )? Up: <id4> <general text, until the next ^_ or end-of-file>
At least one space or tab must be present after each colon and comma,
but any number of spaces are ignored. The <id>
node identifiers have
following format:
<id> = (<lparen><infofile><rparen>)?<node-spec>? <node-spec> = <nodename> | <del><nodename><del> <del> = ^?
This <node>
defines <id1>
in file <fn>
, which is typically
either ‘manualname’ or ‘manualname.info’. No parenthesized
<infofile>
component may appear within <id1>
.
Each of the identifiers after Next
, Prev
and Up
refer to nodes or anchors within a file. These pointers normally
refer within the same file, but ‘(dir)’ is often used to point to
the top-level dir file. If an <infofile>
component is used then
the node name may be omitted, in which case the node identifier refers
to the ‘Top’ node within the referenced file.
The Next
and Prev
pointers are optional. The Up
pointer is technically also optional, although most likely this
indicates a mistake in the node structuring. Conventionally, the
nodes are arranged to form a tree, but this is not a requirement of
the format.
Node names containing periods, commas, colons or parentheses can confuse Info
readers. If it is necessary to refer to a node whose name contains any of
these, the <nodename>
should be surrounded by a pair of DEL
characters (‘CTRL-?’, character number 127). makeinfo
adds
these characters when needed in the default case. Note that not all Info
readers recognize this syntax. See Info Node Names Constraints.
The <general text>
of the node can include the special constructs
described next.
Conventionally menus appear at the end of nodes, but the Info format places no restrictions on their location.
<menu> = * Menu: (<menu entry> | <menu comment>)*
The parts of a <menu entry>
are also described in The Parts of a Menu. They have the same syntax as cross-references, with a leading ‘*’
instead of ‘* (N|n)ote’ (see Info Format: Cross-reference). Indices
extend the menu format to specify the destination line; see Info Format: Printindex.
A <menu comment>
is any line not beginning with ‘*’ that
appears either at the beginning of the menu or is separated from a
menu entry by one or more blank lines. These comments are intended to
be displayed as part of the menu, as-is (see Writing a Menu).
The @image
command results in the following special directive
within the Info file (see Inserting Images):
<image> = ^@^H[image src="<image file>" (text="<txt file contents>")? (alt="<alt text>")? ^@^H]
The line breaks and indentation in this description are editorial; the whitespace between the different parts of the directive in Info files is arbitrary.
In the strings <image file>
, <txt file contents>
and <alt
text>
, ‘"’ is quoted as ‘\"’ and ‘\’ is quoted as
‘\\’. The txt and alt specifications are optional.
The alt
value serves the same purpose as in HTML: A prose
description of the image. In text-only displays or speech systems,
for example, the alt
value may be used instead of displaying the
(typically graphical) <image file>
.
The <txt file contents>
, if present, should be taken as an ASCII
representation of the image, for possible use on a text-only display.
The format does not prescribe the choice between displaying the
<image file>
, the <alt text>
or the <txt file contents>
.
An index in Info format is a kind of menu, with an additional directive at the beginning to mark it as an index menu.
<printindex> = ^@^H[index^@^H] * Menu: <index entry>*
The <index entry>
items are similar to normal menu entries, but
the free-format description is replaced by the line number of where
the entries occurs in the text:
<index entry> = * <entry text>: <node-spec>. <line-spec> <line-spec> = <lparen>line <lineno><rparen>
The initial part, ‘<entry text>: <entry node>.’, should be on a
single line. The <entry text>
is the index term.
Even though <entry text>
is followed by a colon, it may itself
contain colons, so Info readers should try to include as much of the
line as possible in the <entry text>
. (However, <entry text>
may not contain the DEL
characters that may occur in <node-spec>
.)
<lineno>
is an unsigned integer, given relative to the start
of the <entry node>
. An optional line break may occur before
‘<line-spec>’.
Here is an example:
^@^H[index^@^H] * Menu: * thunder: Weather Phenomena. (line 5)
This means that an index entry for ‘thunder’ appears at line 5 of the node ‘Weather Phenomena’.
A general cross-reference in Info format has one of the following two forms:
<cross-reference> = * (N|n)ote <id>:: | * (N|n)ote <label>:<id>(.|,) <id> = (<lparen><infofile><rparen>)?<node-spec>? <label> = <label text> | <del><label text><del>
No space should occur between the ‘*’ character and the following
‘N’ or ‘n’. ‘*Note’ should be used at the start of a
sentence, otherwise ‘*note’ should be used. (Some Info readers,
such as the one in Emacs, can display ‘*Note’ and ‘*note’ as
‘See’ and ‘see’ respectively.) In both cases, <label
text>
is descriptive text.
In both forms the <id>
refers to a node or anchor, in the same way
as a reference in the node information line does (see Info Format: Regular Nodes). The optional parenthesized ‘<infofile>’ is the
name of the manual being referenced, and <node-spec>
gives the
node or anchor within that manual.
The second form has a descriptive label. A cross-reference in this form
should usually be terminated with a comma or period, to make it
feasible to find the end of the <id>
.
If <label>
contains a colon character (:
), it should be
surrounded with a pair of <del>
characters.
Likewise, quoting characters may be used for the node
name if it contains problematic characters;
then a terminating comma or period is not needed.
As stated earlier, this quoting mechanism is not supported in all
Info-reading programs.
The format does not prescribe how to find other manuals to resolve such references.
Here are some examples:
*note GNU Free Documentation License:: *note Tag table: Info Format Tag Table, for details. *Note Overview: (make)Top. *Note ^?:^?: (bash)Bourne Shell Builtins. *Note alloca.h: (gnulib)^?alloca.h^?.
The first shows a reference to a node in the current manual using the short form.
The second also refers to a node in the current manual, namely ‘Info Format Tag Table’; the ‘Tag table’ before the ‘:’ is only a label on this particular reference, and the ‘for details.’ is text belonging to the sentence, not part of the reference.
The third example refers to the node ‘Top’ in another manual, namely ‘make’, with ‘Overview’ being the label for this cross-reference.
The fourth example shows a colon character being quoted in a label, and the fifth example shows a period being quoted in a node name.
See Cross-references.
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. https://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See https://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
This is an alphabetical list of all the @-commands, assorted Emacs Lisp functions, and several variables. To make the list easier to use, the commands are listed without their preceding ‘@’.
Jump to: | _
-
¡
¿
'
‚
›
"
„
»
(
@
&
#
`
<
$
8
a A Æ B C D Ð E F G H I J ȷ K L Ł M N o O Ø Œ P Q R S SS T U V W X Y Þ |
---|
texi2any
can handle non ASCII characters
in input file names, but non ASCII characters in output name will create
problems for some output formats, especially for cross-references.
We have found that it is helpful to refer to versions of independent manuals as ‘editions’ and versions of programs as ‘versions’; otherwise, we find we are liable to confuse each other in conversation by referring to both the documentation and the software with the same words.
Prior to the Texinfo 5 release in 2013, this feature was supported in
an ad hoc way (the --commands-in-node-names option to
makeinfo
). Now it is part of the language.
In TeX output, @var
currently uses a
slanted typewriter font in code contexts such as @code
or @example
. We plan to change this in the next release to
use a variable-width, slanted roman font in all contexts. To avoid
this change, set the ‘txicodevaristt’ flag using @set
;
specify ‘@clear txicodevaristt’ to make this change now
(see @set
and @value
). Note that this flag does nothing in
LaTeX output.
A footnote should complement or expand upon the primary text, but a reader should not need to read a footnote to understand the primary text. For a thorough discussion of footnotes, see The Chicago Manual of Style, which is published by the University of Chicago Press.
Here is the sample footnote.
This syntax is used for Emacs Lisp keywords. See A Sample Function Description in GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
texi2any
supports more encodings for Texinfo
manuals, potentially all the encodings supported by both Perl and iconv
(see Generic Charset Conversion in The GNU C Library).
The support in output formats may be lacking, however, especially for LaTeX
output.
PDF stands for ‘Portable Document Format’. It was invented by Adobe Systems for document interchange, based on their PostScript language.
On MS-DOS/MS-Windows systems, Info will try the .inf extension as well.